diff options
102 files changed, 20629 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk.po b/docs/mcc-help/uk.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..340137dd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk.po @@ -0,0 +1,12562 @@ +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia rpmdrake help package. +# +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2012, 2013. +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia rpmdrake help 3.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-10-09 20:58+0400\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-10-09 21:38+0300\n" +"Last-Translator: Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>\n" +"Language-Team: Ukrainian <kde-i18n-uk@kde.org>\n" +"Language: uk\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" +"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:11 +msgid "Access WebDAV shared drives and directories" +msgstr "Доступ до дисків і каталогів WebDAV спільного використання" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:14 +msgid "diskdrake --dav" +msgstr "diskdrake --dav" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"diskdrake--dav1.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"diskdrake--dav-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"diskdrake--dav1.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"diskdrake--dav-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure " +"WebDAV shares</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:30 en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:22 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:21 +#: en/drak3d.xml:15 en/drakconnect.xml:16 en/draknetcenter.xml:29 +#: en/draksambashare.xml:27 en/drakvpn.xml:16 en/keyboarddrake.xml:17 +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:21 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "Вступ" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV\">WebDAV</link> is a " +"protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it " +"appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a " +"WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV " +"server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:40 +msgid "Creating a new entry" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:42 +msgid "" +"The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if " +"any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new entry. " +"Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:46 +msgid "" +"Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions. Continue " +"with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking " +"<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the " +"<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct " +"it, if needed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:53 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--dav3.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--dav3.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:58 +msgid "" +"The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount " +"point." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:61 +msgid "" +"In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other " +"options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:66 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--dav4.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--dav4.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:71 +msgid "" +"The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the " +"access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:74 +msgid "" +"After you accepted the configuration with the radio button <guibutton>Done</" +"guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and you new mount point is " +"listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you are asked to save " +"or not the modifications in <emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this " +"option if you want that the remote directory is available at each boot. If " +"your configuration is for one-time usage, do not save it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:3 +msgid "Share your hard disk partitions" +msgstr "Налаштування доступу до розділів жорсткого диска" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:6 +msgid "diskdrake --fileshare" +msgstr "diskdrake --fileshare" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--fileshare.png\" revision=\"1\" " +"xml:id=\"diskdrake--fileshare-im1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" /> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--fileshare.png\" revision=\"1\" " +"xml:id=\"diskdrake--fileshare-im1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" /> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> від імені " +"адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"This simple tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you, the " +"administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home " +"subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have " +"computers running either Linux or Windows operating system." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цієї простої програми ви, як адміністратор, зможете надати " +"користувачам змогу надавати підкаталоги з каталогу користувача у /home у " +"спільне користування іншим користувачам у локальній мережі. Комп’ютери цих " +"інших користувачів можуть працювати під керуванням операційних систем Linux " +"або Windows." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:20 +msgid "" +"It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled " +"\"Share your hard disk partitions\"." +msgstr "" +"Доступ до цього модуля можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, вкладка " +"«Локальні диски», пункт «Налаштувати доступ до розділів жорсткого диска»." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:23 +msgid "" +"First, answer the question : \"<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to " +"share some of their directories ?</guilabel>\", click on <guibutton>No " +"sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on " +"<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on " +"<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for " +"the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their " +"directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically " +"created by the system. You will be asked about this later." +msgstr "" +"Спочатку вам слід дати відповідь на питання: «<guilabel>Чи хотіли б ви " +"дозволити користувачам надавати доступ до деяких з їхніх тек?</guilabel>» " +"Позначте пункт <guibutton>Без спільного доступу</guibutton>, якщо доступ " +"слід заборонити всім користувачам, пункт <guibutton>Дозволити всім " +"користувачам</guibutton>, якщо доступ слід дозволити всім, і " +"<guibutton>Спеціальний</guibutton>, якщо слід деяким користувачам заборонити " +"доступ, а деяким надати. У останньому випадку, користувачі, які матимуть " +"доступ до надання каталогів у спільне користування, мають належати до групи " +"fileshare, яку буде автоматично створено системою. Додаткове питання щодо " +"цього буде задано програмою на наступних кроках налаштовування." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you " +"choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. " +"Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on " +"the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both " +"Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any " +"required packages will be installed if necessary." +msgstr "" +"Після натискання кнопки <guilabel>Гаразд</guilabel> з’явиться друга сторінка " +"налаштувань, за допомогою якої ви зможете вибрати тип спільних ресурсів, " +"<guibutton>NFS</guibutton> або <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. Виберіть варіант " +"<guibutton>NFS</guibutton>, якщо єдиною операційною системою у локальній " +"мережі є Linux. Якщо ж у мережі є комп’ютери під керуванням Windows, " +"виберіть пункт <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. Щойно вибір буде зроблено, " +"натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>. Якщо це потрібно, система " +"виконає встановлення необхідних для роботи з новими налаштуваннями пакунків." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen. In " +"this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows " +"you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare " +"group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, " +"then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the " +"fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information " +"about Userdrake, see <link ns2:href=\"userdrake.xml\">this page</link>" +msgstr "" +"Якщо не було вибрано варіант «Спеціальний», на цьому налаштовування буде " +"завершено. Якщо ж ви вибрали варіант «Спеціальний», з’явиться додаткова " +"сторінка, на якій програма попросить вас відкрити вікно програми Userdrake. " +"За допомогою Userdrake ви зможете додати користувачів, яким буде дозволено " +"надавати каталоги у спільне користування, до групи fileshare. На вкладці " +"«Користувачі» натисніть пункт користувача, якого слід додати до цієї групи, " +"потім натисніть кнопку <guimenuitem>Виправити</guimenuitem>, на вкладці " +"«Групи». Позначте пункт групи fileshare і натисніть кнопку " +"<guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>. Докладніший опис програми Userdrake можна " +"знайти на <link ns2:href=\"userdrake.xml\">цій сторінці</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:50 +msgid "" +"When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and " +"reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account." +msgstr "" +"Щоб внесені вами зміни набули чинності, після додавання нового користувача " +"до групи fileshare, слід від’єднати комп’ютер від локальної мережі, а потім " +"встановити з’єднання повторно." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:55 +msgid "" +"From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her " +"file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers " +"have this facility." +msgstr "" +"Після цієї операції кожен з учасників групи fileshare зможе просто позначити " +"у програмі для керування файлами свого графічного середовища пункт каталогу, " +"дані з якого слід надати у спільне користування, і скористатися можливостями " +"з надання спільного доступу цієї програми (такі можливості передбачено не у " +"всіх програмах)." + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:1 en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:3 en/mcc-boot.xml:3 +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:2 en/mcc-localdisks.xml:3 en/mcc-networkservices.xml:2 +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:2 en/mcc-network.xml:1 en/mcc-security.xml:3 +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:2 en/mcc-system.xml:2 en/MCC.xml:1 +#: en/software-management.xml:2 en/transfugdrake.xml:1 +msgid "en" +msgstr "uk" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:3 +msgid "Access NFS shared drives and directories" +msgstr "Налаштування спільного доступу до дисків і тек NFS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:6 +msgid "diskdrake --nfs" +msgstr "diskdrake --nfs" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"2\" xml:id=\"diskdrake--nfs-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"2\" xml:id=\"diskdrake--nfs-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:17 +msgid "." +msgstr "." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare " +"some shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The " +"protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix " +"systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at boot. " +"Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session for a " +"user with tools such as file browsers." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цієї програми<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> ви " +"можете оголосити деякі з каталогів спільного користування доступними всім " +"користувачам комп’ютера. Використаний для цього протокол — NFS, протокол, що " +"використовується у більшості систем Linux або Unix. Такі спільні каталоги " +"стануть доступними для користувачів одразу після завантаження системи. " +"Доступ до спільних каталогів можна здійснювати безпосередньо з робочого " +"сеансу користувача за допомогою програм для керування файлами." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:36 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:38 +msgid "Procedure" +msgstr "Процедура" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers " +"which share directories." +msgstr "" +"Натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Пошук серверів</guibutton>, щоб отримати список " +"серверів, які надають каталоги у спільне користування." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the " +"shared directories and select the directory you want to access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:46 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs2.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:51 +msgid "" +"The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have " +"to specify where to mount the directory." +msgstr "" +"Стане доступною кнопка <guibutton>Точка монтування</guibutton>, за допомогою " +"якої ви зможете вказати точку монтування для каталогу." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:55 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs3.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs3.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:60 +msgid "" +"After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and " +"change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After " +"mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button." +msgstr "" +"Після вибору точки монтування ви можете наказати системі змонтувати каталог. " +"Ви також можете перевірити або змінити параметри монтування за допомогою " +"кнопки <guibutton>Параметри</guibutton>. Після монтування каталогу його " +"можна демонтувати за допомогою тієї самої кнопки." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:66 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs4.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs4.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:72 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:71 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs5.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs5.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:77 +msgid "" +"On accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will " +"displayed, asking \"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications\". This " +"will make the directory available at each boot, if the network is " +"accessible. The new directory is then available in your file browser, for " +"example in dolphin." +msgstr "" +"Після підтвердження налаштувань натисканням кнопки <guibutton>Зроблено</" +"guibutton> система попросить вас відповісти на питання щодо того, чи бажаєте " +"ви зберегти внесені зміни до /etc/fstab. Внесення змін до цього файла " +"зробить каталог доступним одразу після завантаження системи, якщо локальна " +"мережа є доступною. Після цього доступ до нового каталогу можна буде " +"здійснювати за допомогою програми для керування файлами вашої системи, " +"наприклад Dolphin." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:84 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs6.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs6.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:3 +msgid "CD/DVD burner" +msgstr "Програма для запису КД/DVD" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:3 +msgid "diskdrake --removable" +msgstr "diskdrake --removable" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"diskdrake--removable-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"diskdrake--removable.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"diskdrake--removable-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"diskdrake--removable.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:12 en/drakinvictus.xml:12 +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:187 en/draknetprofile.xml:12 en/drakups.xml:12 +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12 en/drakwizard_bind.xml:12 +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:12 en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:12 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:12 +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:12 en/drakxservices.xml:12 en/msecgui.xml:12 +msgid "" +"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:14 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> від імені " +"адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:11 +msgid "Access Windows (SMB) shared drives and directories" +msgstr "Налаштування спільного доступу до дисків і тек Windows (SMB)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:14 +msgid "diskdrake --smb" +msgstr "diskdrake --smb" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:23 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare " +"which shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The " +"protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) " +"systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared " +"directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with " +"tools such as file browsers." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цієї програми ви можете вказати каталоги, доступ до яких " +"зможуть отримувати всі користувачі комп’ютера. Для доступу буде використано " +"протокол SMB, який набув популярності разом з операційними системами " +"Windows®. Доступ до каталогу спільного користування можна буде отримати " +"одразу після завантаження системи. Доступ до каталогів спільного " +"користування можна також отримати в межах окремого сеансу за допомогою " +"програм для керування файлами." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of " +"available servers, for example with <xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" +msgstr "" +"До запуску цієї програми варто визначити назви доступних серверів, наприклад " +"за допомогою <xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:40 +msgid "" +"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who " +"share directories." +msgstr "" +"Натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Пошук серверів</guibutton>, щоб отримати список " +"серверів, які надають каталоги у спільне користування." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:43 +msgid "" +"Click on the server name and on > before the server name to display the " +"list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access." +msgstr "" +"Натисніть пункт з назвою сервера, а потім кнопку «>» перед цією назвою, " +"щоб переглянути список спільних каталогів. Позначте пункт каталогу, до якого " +"ви хочете отримати доступ." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you " +"have to specify where to mount the directory." +msgstr "" +"Стане доступною кнопка <guibutton>Точка монтування</guibutton>, за допомогою " +"якої ви зможете вказати точку монтування для каталогу." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:51 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb2.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:56 +msgid "" +"After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount " +"button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the " +"<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" +"Після вибору точки монтування ви можете наказати системі змонтувати каталог " +"за допомогою кнопки <guimenu>Монтувати</guimenu>. Ви також можете перевірити " +"або змінити параметри монтування за допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Параметри</" +"guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:60 +msgid "" +"In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to " +"connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it " +"with the same button." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою вікна параметрів ви можете вказати ім’я користувача і пароль, " +"яким мають користуватися ті, хто хоче з’єднатися з сервером SMB. Після " +"монтування каталогу його можна демонтувати за допомогою тієї самої кнопки." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:65 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb3.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb3.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:76 +msgid "" +"After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask " +"\"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications\". Saving, will allow " +"directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The " +"new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in dolphin." +msgstr "" +"Після підтвердження налаштувань натисканням кнопки <guibutton>Зроблено</" +"guibutton> система попросить вас відповісти на питання щодо того, чи бажаєте " +"ви зберегти внесені зміни до /etc/fstab. Внесення змін до цього файла " +"зробить каталог доступним одразу після завантаження системи, якщо локальна " +"мережа є доступною. Після цього доступ до нового каталогу можна буде " +"здійснювати за допомогою програми для керування файлами вашої системи, " +"наприклад Dolphin." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:83 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb5.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb5.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:3 +msgid "3D Desktop Effects" +msgstr "Ефекти 3D-стільниці" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drak3d.xml:5 +msgid "drak3d" +msgstr "drak3d" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drak3d.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drak3d-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center" +"\" fileref=\"drak3d.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drak3d-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center" +"\" fileref=\"drak3d.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drak3d</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drak3d</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:17 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> lets you manage the 3D " +"desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by " +"default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:25 +msgid "Getting Started" +msgstr "Початкові зауваження" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:27 +msgid "" +"To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the " +"package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can " +"start." +msgstr "" +"Щоб скористатися цим інструментом, вам слід встановити пакунок glxinfo. Якщо " +"цей пакунок ще не було встановлено, система попросить вас встановити його до " +"того, як запустить drak3d." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:31 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window. Here you " +"can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or " +"<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a composite/" +"window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special effects for your " +"desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn it on." +msgstr "" +"Після запуску drak3d буде показано вікно меню. За допомогою цього вікна ви " +"зможете вибрати варіант роботи: <guilabel>Без ефектів 3D-стільниці</" +"guilabel> або <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion є частиною " +"композитної системи керування вікнами, яка уможливлює використання " +"спеціальних ефектів з апаратним прискоренням на вашій стільниці. Виберіть " +"варіант <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>, щоб увімкнути таку композитну " +"систему керування вікнами." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:38 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of " +"Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be " +"installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the <guibutton>Ok</" +"guibutton> button to continue." +msgstr "" +"Якщо ви вперше користуєтеся цією програмою після початкового встановлення " +"Mageia, система покаже повідомлення з попередженням щодо того, що для роботи " +"Compiz Fusion слід встановити деякі пакунки. Натисніть кнопку " +"<guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drak3d.xml:44 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drak3d-im3\" fileref=" +"\"drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drak3d-im3\" fileref=" +"\"drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz " +"Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in " +"for the changes to take effect." +msgstr "" +"Щойно буде встановлено відповідні пакунки, ви побачите позначений пункт " +"Compiz Fusion у меню drak3d. Втім, для користування новими ефектами слід " +"вийти з облікового запису користувача і знову увійти до нього." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:53 +msgid "" +"After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz " +"Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager) tool." +msgstr "" +"Після повторного входу до системи буде задіяно Compiz Fusion. Налаштувати " +"Compiz Fusion можна за допомогою програми ccsm (CompizConfig Settings " +"Manager)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:59 +msgid "Troubleshooting" +msgstr "Вирішення проблем" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:62 +msgid "Can't See Desktop after Logging in" +msgstr "Після входу до системи не видно стільниці" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:64 +msgid "" +"If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop " +"but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in " +"screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d." +msgstr "" +"Якщо після вмикання Compiz Fusion і спроби увійти до облікового запису, ви " +"нічого не побачите, перезавантажте операційну систему, щоб повернутися до " +"вікна входу до системи. У цьому вікні натисніть кнопку «Стільниця» і " +"виберіть drak3d." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drak3d.xml:70 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:75 +msgid "" +"When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be " +"prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login " +"with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the " +"log in problem." +msgstr "" +"Після входу до системи, якщо ваш обліковий запис є адміністративним, система " +"попросить вас ввести пароль до вашого облікового запису. Якщо ж ваш " +"обліковий запис не є адміністративним, скористайтеся обліковим записом " +"адміністратора. Після входу до адміністративного облікового запису ви " +"зможете скасувати зміни у системі, які призвели до її непрацездатності." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakauth.xml:9 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Authentication" +msgstr "Розпізнавання" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakauth.xml:11 +msgid "drakauth" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakauth.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakauth.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakauth-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakauth.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakauth-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakauth</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakauth</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> enables you to modify the " +"manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:25 +msgid "" +"By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your " +"computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so " +"and give information about that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Set up boot system" +msgstr "Налаштувати спосіб завантаження системи" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:5 +msgid "drakboot --boot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"drakboot--boot.png\" align=" +"\"center\" xml:id=\"drakboot--boot-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"drakboot--boot.png\" align=" +"\"center\" xml:id=\"drakboot--boot-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:15 en/drakboot--boot.xml:126 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakboot --boot</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakboot --boot</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:14 +msgid "" +"this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure " +"the boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default " +"boot, etc.)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:19 +msgid "" +"It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set " +"up boot system\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing. Changing " +"some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:28 +msgid "" +"In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible to " +"choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub or Lilo, and " +"with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question of taste, there are " +"no other consequences. You can also set the <guibutton>Boot device</" +"guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you are an expert. The boot " +"device is where the bootloader is installed and any modification can prevent " +"you machine from booting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:36 +msgid "" +"In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set " +"the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in seconds. " +"During this delay, grub or Lilo will display the list of available operating " +"systems, prompting you to make your choice, if no selection is made, the " +"bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:43 +msgid "" +"In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is " +"possible to set a password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:46 +msgid "The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:49 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton>" +msgstr "Увімкнути ACPI" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:51 +msgid "" +"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the " +"power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was " +"the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI " +"compatible." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:56 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton>" +msgstr "Увімкнути SMP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:58 +msgid "" +"SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for " +"multicore processors." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:62 +msgid "" +"If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual " +"processor and enable SMP." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:66 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local APIC:</" +"guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:69 +msgid "" +"APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two " +"components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O " +"APIC. This one routes the interrupts it receives them from peripheral buses " +"to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful " +"for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC " +"system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message " +"\"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7\"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local " +"APIC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:78 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<guibutton>Clean /tmp at each boot:</guibutton>" +msgstr "Очищати /tmp при кожному перезавантаженні" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:80 +msgid "" +"If checked, this option will empty the /tmp directory at each boot, " +"preventing it from become too big and clearing the trackings that don't need " +"to be kept." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:85 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakboot1.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakboot1.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:90 +msgid "" +"In the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen, you can see the list of all the " +"available entries at boot time. The default one is asterisked. To change the " +"order of the menu entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the " +"selected item. If you click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or " +"<guibutton>Modify </guibutton>buttons, a new window appears to add a new " +"entry in the Grub menu or to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar " +"with Lilo or Grub to be able to use these tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:99 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakboot2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakboot2.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:104 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want " +"to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command \"title\". For " +"example: Mageia3." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:108 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches " +"the Grub command \"kernel\". For example /boot/vmlinuz." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:111 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the " +"kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command \"root\". For example (hd0,1)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:115 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to " +"the kernel at boot time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:118 +msgid "" +"If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this " +"entry by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:121 +msgid "" +"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to " +"chose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> " +"file and a Network profile in the drop-down lists. (Complements needed)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakboot.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Set up autologin to automatically log in" +msgstr "Налаштувати автореєстрацію" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakboot.xml:6 +msgid "drakboot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakboot.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakboot-im1\" fileref=" +"\"drakboot.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakboot-im1\" fileref=" +"\"drakboot.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakboot</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakboot</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to " +"automatically login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without " +"asking for any password. It's called autologin. This is generally a good " +"idea when there is only one user like to be using the machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:22 +msgid "" +"It is found under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot</emphasis> tab in the " +"Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up autologin to automatically log in\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:26 +msgid "The interface buttons are pretty obvious:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:28 +msgid "" +"Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system starts</" +"guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the boot. If " +"not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be possible " +"to launch the graphic interface manually." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:33 +msgid "" +"If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either " +"<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to " +"continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check " +"<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if " +"needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default " +"username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakclock.xml:3 +msgid "Manage date and time" +msgstr "Керування параметрами дати і часу" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakclock.xml:5 +msgid "drakclock" +msgstr "drakclock" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakclock.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakclock.png\" xml:id=\"drakclock-im1\" " +"revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakclock.png\" xml:id=\"drakclock-im1\" " +"revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakclock</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakclock</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:14 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the tab " +"System in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>\"Manage date and time" +"\"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a right " +"click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray." +msgstr "" +"Цю програму можна запустити за допомогою сторінки «Система» Центру керування " +"Mageia. Відповідний пункт підписано <guilabel>Налаштувати дату і час<" +"/guilabel>. У деяких стільничних середовищах програму можна запустити за " +"допомогою клацання правою кнопкою миші на віджеті годинника у системному " +"лотку з наступним вибором пункту «Скоригувати дату і час...»." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:21 +msgid "It's a very simple tool." +msgstr "Це дуже проста програма." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:23 +msgid "" +"On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">calendar</emphasis>. " +"On the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on " +"the upper right), the 2nd (in blue) and it is a Sunday. Select the month " +"(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or " +"2012). Select the day by clicking on its number." +msgstr "" +"У верхній лівій частині розташовано панель <emphasis role=\"bold\">календаря<" +"/emphasis>. На наведеному вище знімку вікна показано дату: «квітень» (у " +"верхньому лівому куті), 2013 (у верхньому правому куті), 6 число (синім " +"кольором), неділя. Вибрати місяць (або рік) можна натисканням маленьких " +"стрілочок з боків від напису «квітень» (або «2013»). День можна вибрати " +"натисканням відповідного пункту у календарі." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:29 +msgid "" +"On the bottom left is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Network Time Protocol</" +"emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on time by " +"synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time " +"Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server." +msgstr "" +"У нижній лівій частині вікна розташовано панель синхронізації <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Протокол Network Time</emphasis>. Ви можете підтримувати завжди " +"точні покази годинника за допомогою синхронізації часу з сервером. Позначте " +"пункт <guilabel>Увімкнути протокол Network Time</guilabel> і виберіть " +"найближчий до вашого розташування сервер." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:34 +msgid "" +"On the right part is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">clock</emphasis>. It's " +"useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, " +"minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows " +"to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see " +"your desktop environment settings for that." +msgstr "" +"У правій частині вікна розташовано панель <emphasis role=\"bold\">годинника<" +"/emphasis>. Якщо увімкнено NTP, зміна показаний на ній даних не має сенсу. У " +"трьох полях годинника показано значення годин, хвилин та секунд (17, 8 і 13 " +"на знімку вікна). Скористайтеся невеличкими стрілочками, щоб встановити на " +"годиннику належне значення часу. Формат показу часу змінити не можна. Для " +"зміни формату показу скористайтеся відповідною програмою з вашого " +"стільничного середовища." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:40 +msgid "" +"At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the " +"<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the " +"nearest town." +msgstr "" +"Нарешті, у правій нижній частині вікна можна вибрати часовий пояс. Для цього " +"слід натиснути кнопку <guibutton>Змінити часовий пояс</guibutton> і вибрати " +"відповідний пункт з наданого списку." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they " +"will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation " +"settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Remove a connection" +msgstr "Вилучити з'єднання" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3 +msgid "drakconnect --del" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakconnect--del-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakconnect--del.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakconnect--del-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakconnect--del.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakconnect --del</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here, you can delete a network interface<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=" +"\"0\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:14 +msgid "" +"Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then " +"click <emphasis>next</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted " +"successfully." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:3 +msgid "Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)" +msgstr "Налаштовування нового мережевого інтерфейсу (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:6 +msgid "drakconnect" +msgstr "drakconnect" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakconnect-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakconnect.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakconnect-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakconnect.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconnect</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakconnect</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:18 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure much " +"of local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from " +"your access provider or your network administrator." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цього модуля ви можете налаштувати доступ вашого комп’ютера до " +"локальної мережі або інтернету. Вам знадобляться деякі дані від вашої " +"компанії-надавача послуг або адміністратора вашої мережі." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware " +"and provider you have." +msgstr "" +"Виберіть тип з’єднання, яке слід налаштувати. Тип визначається використаним " +"вами обладнанням та параметрами роботи компанії-надавача послуг." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:30 +msgid "A new Wired connection (Ethernet)" +msgstr "Нове дротове з’єднання (Ethernet)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:34 en/drakconnect.xml:162 +msgid "" +"The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one " +"to configure." +msgstr "" +"У першому вікні буде показано список доступних інтерфейсів. Виберіть той з " +"них, який слід налаштувати." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:39 en/drakconnect.xml:167 +msgid "" +"At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP " +"address." +msgstr "" +"На цьому кроці можна визначитися зі способом отримання комп’ютером IP-" +"адреси: автоматично або вручну." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:44 en/drakconnect.xml:187 en/drakconnect.xml:557 +msgid "Automatic IP" +msgstr "Автоматична IP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers " +"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained " +"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. " +"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option " +"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers " +"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address " +"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме " +"комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано " +"вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати " +"адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо " +"назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, " +"<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано " +"сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з " +"адреси DHCP</emphasis>. Можливість визначення назви вузла передбачено не на " +"всіх серверах DHCP. Якщо ви налаштовуєте ваш комп’ютер на отримання IP-" +"адреси з домашнього маршрутизатора ADSL, навряд чи слід позначати цей пункт." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:61 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect5.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect5.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:68 en/drakconnect.xml:205 en/drakconnect.xml:572 +msgid "The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:" +msgstr "" +"За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна додатково вказати " +"такі параметри:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:72 en/drakconnect.xml:209 en/drakconnect.xml:576 +msgid "Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)" +msgstr "Домен пошуку (не можна вказати, якщо адреса надається сервером DHCP)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:77 en/drakconnect.xml:214 en/drakconnect.xml:581 +msgid "the DHCP client" +msgstr "Клієнт DHCP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:81 en/drakconnect.xml:218 en/drakconnect.xml:585 +msgid "DHCP timeout" +msgstr "Затримку DHCP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:85 en/drakconnect.xml:222 +msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server" +msgstr "Отримати сервери YP з DHCP (типово позначено): вкажіть сервер NIS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:90 en/drakconnect.xml:227 en/drakconnect.xml:594 +msgid "Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)" +msgstr "Отримати сервери NTPD з DHCP (визначає сервер синхронізації часу)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:95 en/drakconnect.xml:232 en/drakconnect.xml:599 +msgid "" +"the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server " +"requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP address. " +"This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers." +msgstr "" +"DHCP потрібна назва вузла. Позначайте цей пункт, лише якщо сервер DHCP " +"вимагає від своїх клієнтів вказувати назву вузла до призначення IP-адреси. " +"Цей пункт може не працювати на деяких серверах DHCP." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:104 en/drakconnect.xml:241 +msgid "" +"After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection " +"configurations are explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" +"Після підтвердження внесених змін наступні кроки налаштовування може бути " +"виконано у загальний для всіх типів з’єднання спосіб: <xref linkend=" +"\"drakconnect-end\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:111 en/drakconnect.xml:248 en/drakconnect.xml:615 +msgid "Manual configuration" +msgstr "Налаштування вручну" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:115 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS " +"servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no " +"HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is " +"attributed by default." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме " +"комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано " +"вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати " +"адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо " +"назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, " +"<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:121 en/drakconnect.xml:258 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like " +"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</" +"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your service " +"provider's website." +msgstr "" +"У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат: <emphasis>192.168." +"x.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є <emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А дані " +"щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна отримати з сайта вашого постачальника " +"послуг." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:126 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is " +"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", " +"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need " +"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic ADSL would not need " +"this setting." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен пошуку</" +"emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої частини, до " +"крапки. Наприклад, якщо ваш комп’ютер має назву «comp1», а його повна назва " +"у домені — «comp1.domivka.net», доменом пошуку має бути «domivka.net». Якщо " +"вам точно не відомо, чи слід вказувати якийсь домен пошуку, його можна " +"просто не вказувати. Знову ж таки, цей пункт не потрібен для налаштування " +"домашнього ADSL." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:135 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect30.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect30.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:142 en/drakconnect.xml:279 en/drakconnect.xml:351 +#: en/drakconnect.xml:458 en/drakconnect.xml:636 en/drakconnect.xml:688 +#: en/drakconnect.xml:780 +msgid "The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:150 +msgid "A new Satellite connection (DVB)" +msgstr "Нове супутникове з’єднання (DVB)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:152 en/drakconnect.xml:696 en/draknetcenter.xml:136 +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:142 en/draknetcenter.xml:203 +msgid "" +"This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:158 +msgid "A new Cable modem connection" +msgstr "Нове кабельне з’єднання за допомогою модема" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:172 +msgid "You have to specify a authentication method:" +msgstr "Вам слід вказати спосіб розпізнавання (автентифікації):" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:176 +msgid "None" +msgstr "Немає" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:180 +msgid "" +"BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name " +"and password." +msgstr "" +"BPALogin (потрібен для Telstra). У цьому випадку вам слід вказати ім’я " +"користувача і пароль." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:191 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers " +"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained " +"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. " +"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option " +"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers " +"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address " +"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Кабельний/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, " +"отримуватиме комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде " +"вказано вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде " +"вказати адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. " +"Якщо назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, " +"<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано " +"сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з " +"адреси DHCP</emphasis>. Можливість визначення назви вузла передбачено не на " +"всіх серверах DHCP. Якщо ви налаштовуєте ваш комп’ютер на отримання IP-" +"адреси з домашнього маршрутизатора ADSL, навряд чи слід позначати цей пункт." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:252 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers " +"to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME " +"is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is " +"attributed by default." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Кабельний/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, " +"отримуватиме комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде " +"вказано вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде " +"вказати адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. " +"Якщо назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, " +"<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:263 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is " +"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", " +"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need " +"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic connection would not " +"need this setting." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен пошуку</" +"emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої частини, до " +"крапки. Наприклад, якщо ваш комп’ютер має назву «comp1», а його повна назва " +"у домені — «comp1.domivka.net», доменом пошуку має бути «domivka.net». Якщо " +"вам точно не відомо, чи слід вказувати якийсь домен пошуку, його можна " +"просто не вказувати. Знову ж таки, цей пункт не потрібен для налаштування " +"домашнього з’єднання." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:272 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect32.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect32.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:287 +msgid "A new DSL connection" +msgstr "Нове DSL-з’єднання" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:291 +msgid "" +"If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to " +"configure it." +msgstr "" +"Якщо програмою буде виявлено інтерфейси мережі, вона запропонує вибрати один " +"з них і налаштувати його." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:296 en/drakconnect.xml:663 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave." +msgstr "" +"Програма запропонує список компаній, які буде розподілено за країнами. " +"Виберіть вашу компанію. Якщо її пункту немає у списку, виберіть пункт " +"<guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть параметри, надані вам " +"постачальником послуг." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:303 en/drakconnect.xml:380 +msgid "Select one of the protocols available:" +msgstr "Виберіть один з доступних протоколів:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:307 +msgid "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)" +msgstr "Протокол динамічної конфігурації клієнта (DHCP)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:311 +msgid "Manual TCP/IP configuration" +msgstr "Налаштування TCP/IP вручну" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:315 +msgid "PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)" +msgstr "PPP через ADSL (PPPoA)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:319 +msgid "PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)" +msgstr "PPP через Ethernet (PPoE)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:323 +msgid "Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)" +msgstr "Протокол тунелю точка-до-точки (PPTP)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:329 +msgid "Access settings" +msgstr "Параметри доступу" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:333 en/drakconnect.xml:678 +msgid "Account Login (user name)" +msgstr "Рахунок користувача (ім'я користувача)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:337 en/drakconnect.xml:414 en/drakconnect.xml:682 +msgid "Account password" +msgstr "Пароль рахунка" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:341 +msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)" +msgstr "(Додатково) Віртуальний шлях ID (VPI)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:345 +msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)" +msgstr "(Додатково) Віртуальний коловий ID (VCI)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:289 en/drakconnect.xml:359 en/drakconnect.xml:646 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"orderedlist\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "<placeholder type=\"orderedlist\" id=\"0\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:357 +msgid "A new ISDN connection" +msgstr "Нове ISDN-з’єднання" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:361 en/drakconnect.xml:706 +msgid "The wizard asks which device to configure:" +msgstr "Програма-майстер попросить вас вказати пристрій для налаштовування:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:365 +msgid "Manual choice (internal ISDN card)" +msgstr "Вибір вручну (Внутрішня плата ISDN)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:369 +msgid "External ISDN modem" +msgstr "Зовнішній модем ISDN" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:375 +msgid "" +"A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and manufacturer. " +"Select your card." +msgstr "" +"Програма запропонує вам список обладнання, розподіленого за категоріями та " +"виробниками. Виберіть вашу картку." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:384 +msgid "Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)" +msgstr "Протокол для всього іншого світу, окрім Європи (DHCP)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:389 +msgid "Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)" +msgstr "Європейський протокол (EDSS1)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:395 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave you. Then it is " +"asked for parameters:" +msgstr "" +"Програма запропонує список компаній, які буде розподілено за країнами. " +"Виберіть вашу компанію. Якщо її пункту немає у списку, виберіть пункт " +"<guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть параметри, надані вам " +"постачальником послуг. Після цього програма попросить вас вказати такі дані:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:402 +msgid "Connection name" +msgstr "Назва зв'язку" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:406 +msgid "Phone number" +msgstr "Номер телефону" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:410 +msgid "Login ID" +msgstr "ID користувача" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:418 +msgid "Authentication method" +msgstr "Метод автентифікації" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:424 +msgid "" +"After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or " +"manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask." +msgstr "" +"Після цього виберіть спосіб отримання IP-адреси: автоматично чи вручну. У " +"другому випадку вкажіть IP-адресу і маску підмережі." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:430 +msgid "" +"The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by " +"automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to " +"put:" +msgstr "" +"На наступному кроці слід вибрати спосіб отримання адрес серверів DNS: " +"автоматично чи вручну. У випадку визначення вручну вам слід вказати такі " +"дані:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:436 +msgid "Domain name" +msgstr "Назва домену" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:440 +msgid "First and second DNS Server" +msgstr "Перший і другий сервер DNS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:444 +msgid "" +"Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you " +"are sure that your provider is configured to accept it." +msgstr "" +"Вкажіть, чи слід визначати назву вузла на основі IP-адреси. Цей пункт слід " +"позначати, лише якщо вам відомо, що постачальником послуг передбачено таке " +"визначення." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:452 +msgid "" +"The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic " +"or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the " +"IP address." +msgstr "" +"На наступному кроці слід вибрати спосіб, у який комп’ютер отримуватиме " +"адресу шлюзу, автоматично чи вручну. Якщо ви виберете спосіб отримання " +"вручну, вам доведеться вказати IP-адресу." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:464 +msgid "A new Wireless connection (WiFi)" +msgstr "Нове бездротове з’єднання (WiFi)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:468 +msgid "" +"A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for " +"Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure. Use ndiswrapper " +"only if the other configuration methods did not work." +msgstr "" +"На першій сторінці буде показано список доступних інтерфейсів та пункт для " +"драйвера Windows (ndiswrapper). Виберіть інтерфейс, який ви хочете " +"налаштувати. Скористайтеся пунктом ndiswrapper, лише якщо інші способи " +"налаштовування не призведуть до бажаних результатів." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:475 +msgid "" +"At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that " +"the card has detected." +msgstr "" +"На цьому кроці ви зможете вибрати потрібну вам точку доступу зі списку " +"точок, які було виявлено карткою." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:480 +msgid "Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:" +msgstr "Специфічний параметр для карток бездротового зв’язку:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:483 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect31.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect31.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:490 +msgid "Operating mode:" +msgstr "Режим роботи:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:494 +msgid "Managed" +msgstr "Керується" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:497 +msgid "To access to an existing access point (the most frequent)." +msgstr "Для отримання доступу до точки доступу (найпоширеніший випадок)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:503 +msgid "Ad-Hoc" +msgstr "Ad-Hoc" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:506 +msgid "To configure direct connection between computers." +msgstr "Для налаштовування безпосереднього з’єднання між комп’ютерами." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:514 +msgid "Network Name (ESSID)" +msgstr "Мережне ім'я (ESSID)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:518 +msgid "Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured." +msgstr "" +"Режим шифрування, залежить від параметрів налаштування вашої точки доступу." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:523 +msgid "WPA/WPA2" +msgstr "WPA/WPA2" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:526 +msgid "This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it." +msgstr "" +"Варто використовувати саме цей режим шифрування, якщо його підтримку " +"передбачено з боку вашого обладнання." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:532 +msgid "WEP" +msgstr "WEP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:535 +msgid "Some old hardware deals only this encryption method." +msgstr "" +"На застарілому обладнанні можливе використання лише цього способу шифрування." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:543 +msgid "Encryption key" +msgstr "Ключ шифрування" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:545 +msgid "It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point." +msgstr "Зазвичай надається разом з обладнанням, яке працює як точка доступу." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:552 +msgid "" +"At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a " +"manual IP address." +msgstr "" +"На цьому кроці можна вибрати між автоматичним призначенням IP-адреси та " +"визначенням її вручну." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:561 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are " +"declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained below. " +"In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The HOSTNAME of " +"the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name " +"localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The Hostname can also be " +"provided by the DHCP server with the option <emphasis>Assign host name from " +"DHCP server</emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме " +"комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано " +"вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати " +"адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо " +"назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, " +"<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано " +"сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з " +"адреси DHCP</emphasis>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:589 +msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers" +msgstr "Отримати сервери YP з DHCP (типово позначено): вкажіть сервери NIS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:608 +msgid "" +"After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all " +"connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" +"Після підтвердження налаштувань, визначених цим кроком, програма перейде до " +"кроку, який є спільним для всіх налаштовувань з’єднань: <xref linkend=" +"\"drakconnect-end\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:619 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід вказати сервери DNS. Тут також " +"можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо назву вузла не буде вказано, " +"типово буде призначено назву <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:625 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the IP address always looks like " +"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</" +"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your providers " +"website." +msgstr "" +"У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат: <emphasis>192.168." +"x.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є <emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А дані " +"щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна отримати з сайта вашого постачальника " +"послуг." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:630 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, before the " +"period." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен пошуку</" +"emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої частини, до " +"крапки." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:644 +msgid "A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection" +msgstr "Нове з’єдднання GPRS/Edge/3G" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:648 +msgid "" +"If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to " +"configure it." +msgstr "" +"Якщо програмою буде виявлено інтерфейси бездротової мережі, вона запропонує " +"вибрати один з них і налаштувати його." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:653 +msgid "The PIN number is asked. Keep left if this PIN number is not required." +msgstr "" +"Програма попросить вас вказати PIN-код. Не вказуйте, якщо PIN не потрібен." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:658 +msgid "" +"The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option " +"<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:670 +msgid "Provide access settings" +msgstr "Вкажіть параметри доступу" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:674 +msgid "Access Point Name" +msgstr "Назва точки доступу" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:694 +msgid "A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection" +msgstr "Нове з’єднання комутованого доступу до мережі з Bluetooth" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:702 +msgid "A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)" +msgstr "Нове аналогове телефонне з’єднання за допомогою модема (POTS)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:710 +msgid "Manual choice" +msgstr "Вибір вручну" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:714 +msgid "Detected hardware, if any." +msgstr "Виявлене обладнання, якщо обладнання вдасться виявити." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:720 +msgid "A list of ports is proposed. Select your port." +msgstr "Список запропонованих портів. Виберіть потрібний вам порт." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:724 +msgid "" +"If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package " +"<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>." +msgstr "" +"Якщо цей пакунок ще не встановлено, програма запропонує встановити пакунок " +"<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:729 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave. Then it is asked " +"for Dialup options:" +msgstr "" +"Вам буде запропоновано список постачальників послуг, поділений за країнами. " +"Виберіть у ньому пункт вашого постачальника. Якщо відповідного пункту у " +"списку не виявиться, виберіть пункт <guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а " +"потім вкажіть значення параметрів, надані вашим постачальником послуг. Після " +"цього програма попросить вас вказати параметри додзвону:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:736 +msgid "<emphasis>Connection name</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Назва з’єднання</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:740 +msgid "<emphasis>Phone number</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Номер телефону</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:744 +msgid "<emphasis>Login ID</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Ідентифікатор користувача</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:748 +msgid "<emphasis>Password</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Пароль</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:752 +msgid "<emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:" +msgstr "<emphasis>Розпізнавання</emphasis>, виберіть один з таких варіантів:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:756 +msgid "PAP/CHAP" +msgstr "PAP/CHAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:760 +msgid "Script-based" +msgstr "На основі скрипту" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:764 +msgid "PAP" +msgstr "PAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:768 +msgid "Terminal-based" +msgstr "На основі термінала" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:772 +msgid "CHAP" +msgstr "CHAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:786 +msgid "Ending the configuration" +msgstr "Завершення налаштовування" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:788 +msgid "In the next step, you can specify:" +msgstr "На наступному кроці ви можете вказати такі параметри:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:792 +msgid "<emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Дозволити користувачам керувати з’єднанням</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:796 +msgid "<emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>З’єднуватися під час завантаження</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:800 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Увімкнути облік потоку даних</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:804 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Дозволити керування інтерфейсом за допомогою Network Manager</" +"emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:809 +msgid "" +"In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow " +"access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch " +"automatically between access point according to the signal strength." +msgstr "" +"У випадку бездротового з’єднання буде показано додатковий пункт " +"<emphasis>Дозволити роумінг точки доступу</emphasis>. За допомогою цього " +"пункту можна надати комп’ютеру змогу автоматично перемикатися між точками " +"доступу відповідно до потужності сигналу." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:816 +msgid "With the advanced button, you can specify:" +msgstr "" +"За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> ви можете вказати:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:820 +msgid "Metric (10 by default)" +msgstr "Метрику (типово 10)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:824 +msgid "MTU" +msgstr "MTU" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:828 +msgid "Network Hotplugging" +msgstr "Увімкнення мережі «вгарячу»" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:832 +msgid "Enable IPv6 to IPv4 tunnel" +msgstr "Увімкнути тунелювання з IPv6 до IPv4" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:836 +msgid "" +"The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start " +"immediately or not." +msgstr "" +"На останньому кроці можна визначити, чи буде виконано спробу з’єднатися " +"негайно." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:840 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect9.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect9.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:3 +msgid "Open a console as administrator" +msgstr "Відкриття консолі від імені адміністратора" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:5 +msgid "drakconsole" +msgstr "drakconsole" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakconsole-im1\" fileref=\"drakconsole.png" +"\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakconsole-im1\" fileref=\"drakconsole.png" +"\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconsole</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakconsole</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:14 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives you access to a " +"console which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more " +"information about that." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цієї програми ви можете отримати доступ до консолі, відкритої " +"від імені адміністратора системи (користувача root). Думаємо, цього опису " +"достатньо, щоб зрозуміти, про що йдеться." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:8 +msgid "Manage disk partitions" +msgstr "Керування розділами диска" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:10 +msgid "drakdisk or diskdrake" +msgstr "drakdisk або diskdrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:14 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakdiskBackup-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"fileref=\"drakdiskBackup.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakdiskBackup-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"fileref=\"drakdiskBackup.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake</emphasis> " +"as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakdisk</emphasis> або <emphasis role=\"bold\">" +"diskdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:20 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is very powerful, a tiny " +"error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a " +"partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll " +"see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on <emphasis>Exit</" +"emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue." +msgstr "" +"Ця програма є дуже потужною — найменша помилка або випадкове натискання " +"клавіш може призвести до втрати всіх даних на розділі або навіть витирання " +"всього жорсткого диска. З цієї причини вам буде показано наведене вище вікно " +"над вікном програми. Натисніть кнопку <emphasis>Вийти</emphasis>, якщо ви не " +"впевнені, чи бажаєте продовжувати роботу з програмою." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:30 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you " +"want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc)." +msgstr "" +"Якщо у вашій системі декілька жорстких дисків, ви можете перемкнутися на " +"потрібний вам жорсткий диск вибором відповідної вкладки (sda, sdb, sdc тощо)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:34 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"drakdisk-" +"im1\" fileref=\"drakdisk.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"drakdisk-" +"im1\" fileref=\"drakdisk.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:39 +msgid "" +"You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your " +"preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, " +"resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a " +"partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear all</" +"guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete disk, " +"the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a partition." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете вибрати одну з багатьох дій, за допомогою яких ви можете " +"скоригувати розподіл вашого диска відповідно до ваших потреб. Витирання " +"всього жорсткого диска, поділ та об’єднання розділів, зміна розмірів розділів " +"або файлової системи розділів, форматування або перегляд вмісту розділу: все " +"це можна зробити за допомогою цієї програми. Кнопку <emphasis><guibutton>" +"Очистити все</guibutton></emphasis> у нижній частині вікна призначено для " +"витирання всього диска. Доступ до інших кнопок дій, розташованих праворуч, " +"можна отримати після натискання розділу на картинці диска." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot " +"choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition " +"must be unmounted first." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:51 +msgid "It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side" +msgstr "" +"Зміну розмірів розділу можна виконувати лише за рахунок правої межі розділу." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:53 +msgid "" +"To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to " +"delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button " +"<guibutton role=\"bold\">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part " +"is selected" +msgstr "" +"Щоб змінити тип розділу (наприклад, з ext3 на ext4), вам слід вилучити " +"розділ, а потім повторно створити його з новим значенням типу. Якщо буде " +"позначено порожню частину диска, у вікні програми з’явиться кнопка <guibutton " +"role=\"bold\">Створити</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:58 +msgid "You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете вибрати точку монтування, якої не існує. Якщо буде здійснено такий " +"вибір, відповідну точку монтування буде створено." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:62 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakdiskMountedPartition-im1\" revision=" +"\"1\" fileref=\"drakdiskMountedPartition.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakdiskMountedPartition-im1\" revision=" +"\"1\" fileref=\"drakdiskMountedPartition.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG" +"\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:67 +msgid "" +"Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> " +"gives some extra available actions, like labelling the partition, as can be " +"seen in the screenshot below." +msgstr "" +"Натискання кнопки <emphasis><guibutton>Перемкнути в режим експерта</guibutton>" +"</emphasis> надасть вам доступ до додаткових дій, зокрема визначення мітки " +"розділу, як це показано на наведеному нижче знімку." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:72 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakdiskExpertUnmounted-" +"im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png\" format=\"PNG" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakdiskExpertUnmounted-" +"im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png\" format=\"PNG" +"\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakedm.xml:5 +msgid "Set up display manager" +msgstr "Налаштування програми для керування сеансами" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakedm.xml:7 +msgid "drakedm" +msgstr "drakedm" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakedm.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakedm-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center" +"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakedm.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakedm-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center" +"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakedm.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:17 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakedm</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakedm</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:16 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"Here<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> you can choose which display " +"manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available " +"on your system will be shown." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цієї програми ви можете вибрати засіб керування сеансами " +"(менеджер реєстрації), який буде використано для входу до вашого стільничного " +"середовища. У списку буде показано лише ті стільничні середовища, які " +"встановлено у вашій системі." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:24 +msgid "" +"Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look different. " +"However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM is a " +"lightweight display manager, KDM and GDM have more extras." +msgstr "" +"Більшість користувачів помітять лише те, що зміниться вікно входу до системи. " +"Втім, різні менеджери реєстрації мають також і різні можливості. LXDM є " +"найневибагливішим і найпростішим, KDM і GDM мають значно ширші можливості." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Set up your personal firewall" +msgstr "Встановити особистий захисний шлюз" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:5 +msgid "drakfirewall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"drakfirewall.png\" align=" +"\"center\" xml:id=\"drakfirewall-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"drakfirewall.png\" align=" +"\"center\" xml:id=\"drakfirewall-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakfirewall</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"Security tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up your personal " +"firewall\". it is the same tool in the first tab of \"Configure system " +"security, permissions and audit\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:20 +msgid "" +"A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming " +"connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the " +"first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection " +"attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - " +"<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable " +"the firewall, and only check the needed services." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:27 +msgid "" +"It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on " +"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field " +"<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these " +"examples :" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:32 +msgid "80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:34 +msgid "24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:37 +msgid "The listed ports should be separated by a space." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:39 +msgid "" +"If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is " +"checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:43 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall2.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) " +"it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even " +"recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature " +"allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box " +"<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second " +"box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure " +"somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards " +"corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot " +"below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be " +"warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:64 +msgid "These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:68 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall3.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall3.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:74 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall4.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall4.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:79 +msgid "" +"In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the " +"Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary " +"packages are downloaded." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:84 +msgid "" +"If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network & " +"Internet, icon Set up a new network interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "DrakFloppy: Creating a Boot Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:8 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:725 +msgid "boot disk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><abstract><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:10 +#, fuzzy +msgid "creating" +msgstr "створення" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><abstract><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:12 +#, fuzzy +msgid "applications" +msgstr "Програми" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><abstract><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:14 +msgid "DrakFloppy" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><abstract><para><inlinemediaobject> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../drakfloppy-icon.png\" " +"width=\"2cm\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../drakfloppy-icon.png\" " +"width=\"2cm\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><abstract><para> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=" +"\"1\"/><placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"2\"/>If you did not " +"create a boot disk when you installed your system, this tool allows you to " +"do so. This is also a rescue disk which allows you to perform maintenance " +"tasks on your system in case of failure." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:28 +msgid "Using DrakFloppy" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:31 +msgid "" +"If you want to create a <quote>default</quote> boot disk, that is, one that " +"is based on your current kernel, all you have to do is insert a floppy disk " +"in the appropriate floppy drive, select that drive from the " +"<guilabel>Device</guilabel> pull-down list and press the <guibutton>OK</" +"guibutton> button. A dialog will pop up and remind you that a diskette must " +"be inserted in the drive. Accept it to create the disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:40 +msgid "" +"If you want to customize your boot disk, you will have to hit the " +"<guibutton>Preferences</guibutton> button and a window will pop up (see " +"<xref linkend=\"drakfloppy-custom-disk\"></xref>)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:47 +msgid "Making a Custom Boot Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:51 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"2\" fileref=\"drakfloppy-custom-disk.png" +"\" align=\"center\" width=\"11.5cm\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakfloppy-" +"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"2\" fileref=\"drakfloppy-custom-disk.png" +"\" align=\"center\" width=\"11.5cm\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakfloppy-" +"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:46 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:25 +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:158 en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:9 +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" +msgstr "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:57 +msgid "" +"The window has two sections: one containing check boxes with options for " +"<command>mkinitrd</command>, and another one with the modules <quote>tree</" +"quote>. Select the modules you need to be added to the floppy. In this " +"example, we want to use the <acronym>IDE</acronym> tape module and pre-load " +"it. Use the <guibutton>Remove a module</guibutton> button to remove the " +"currently selected module. When you are done customizing the boot disk press " +"the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, return to <application>drakfloppy</" +"application>'s window and then proceed as indicated above to create the disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakfont.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts" +msgstr "Вилучити і встановити шрифти. Імпорт шрифтів Windows™" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakfont.xml:6 +#, fuzzy +msgid "drakfont" +msgstr "DrakFont" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakfont.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakfont-im1\" fileref=" +"\"drakfont.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakfont-im1\" fileref=" +"\"drakfont.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakfont</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakfont</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab. It " +"allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen " +"above shows:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:22 +msgid "the installed font names, styles and sizes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:26 +msgid "a preview of the selected font." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:30 +msgid "some buttons explained here later." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:36 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Get Windows Fonts: <emphasis/></emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Отримати шрифти з Windows: <emphasis/></emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:38 +msgid "" +"This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You " +"must have Microsoft Windows installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:41 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Параметри:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:43 +msgid "" +"It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly) able " +"to use the fonts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:46 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Uninstall:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Вилучити:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:48 +msgid "" +"This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place. Be " +"careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the " +"documents that use them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:52 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Імпортувати:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:54 +msgid "" +"Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The " +"supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the " +"fonts to install, click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis> when " +"done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont " +"main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Parental Controls" +msgstr "Батьківський контроль" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakguard.xml:5 +msgid "drakguard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakguard.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakguard.png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"drakguard-im1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakguard.png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"drakguard-im1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakguard</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakguard</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental Control</" +"guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the drakguard " +"package (not installed by default)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:21 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Presentation" +msgstr "Презентація" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to " +"restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three " +"useful capabilities:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:29 +msgid "" +"It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by " +"controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:35 +msgid "" +"It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can " +"only execute what you accept them to execute." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:40 +msgid "" +"It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through blacklists/" +"whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the website. To " +"achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental control blocker " +"DansGuardian." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:49 +msgid "Configuring Parental controls" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:52 +msgid "" +"If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, " +"Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on " +"your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel " +"feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named " +"users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by " +"an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this " +"prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will " +"then suggest you reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:61 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental " +"control is enable and the Block programm tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:64 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the " +"websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all " +"the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:68 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have " +"their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the " +"right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are " +"not inconvenienced. Select an user in the left hand side and click " +"on<guibutton> Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user. Select an " +"user in the right hand side and click on<guibutton> Remove</guibutton> to " +"remove him/her from the allowed users." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:76 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Time control: </guibutton>If checked, internet access is allowed " +"with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and " +"<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time " +"window.<guibutton/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:82 +msgid "Blacklist/Whitelist tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:84 +msgid "" +"Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:89 +msgid "Block Programs Tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:91 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to " +"restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the " +"applications you wish to block." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:95 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand " +"side will not be subject to acl blocking." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:9 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Share the Internet connection with other local machines" +msgstr "Розділити доступ до Інтернету з іншими користувачами" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakgw.xml:12 +msgid "drakgw" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakgw.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakgw.png\" format=\"PNG" +"\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakgw-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakgw.png\" format=\"PNG" +"\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakgw-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:25 +msgid "Principles" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject> +#: en/drakgw.xml:28 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakgw-net.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakgw-net.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>This is useful when you have a " +"computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local " +"network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to " +"other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the " +"gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card " +"must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to " +"the Internet (2)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are " +"set up, as documented in <xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:45 +msgid "Gateway wizard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:48 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakgw</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakgw</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> offers successive steps " +"which are shown below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:54 +msgid "" +"If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this " +"and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:60 +msgid "" +"specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard " +"automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that " +"what is proposed is correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:66 +msgid "" +"specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes " +"one, check that this is correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:71 +msgid "" +"The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask " +"and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual " +"configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:78 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>bind</code> is installed. Otherwise, you have to " +"specify the address of a DNS server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:84 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure " +"it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:91 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, " +"with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the " +"proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:99 +msgid "" +"The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to " +"printers and to share them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:104 +msgid "" +"You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:109 +msgid "Configure the client" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:111 +msgid "" +"If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to " +"specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address " +"automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting " +"to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is " +"using." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:117 +msgid "" +"If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular " +"specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the " +"gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:123 +msgid "Stop connection sharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:125 +msgid "" +"If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch " +"the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the sharing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Hosts definitions" +msgstr "Клієнти мережі" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:5 +msgid "drakhosts" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakhosts." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"drakhosts-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakhosts." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"drakhosts-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakhosts</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakhosts</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed IP-" +"addresses, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to " +"specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name " +"instead of the IP-address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:20 +msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>" +msgstr "<guibutton>Додати</guibutton>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:22 +msgid "" +"With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window " +"to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an " +"alias which can be used in the same way that the name is." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:27 +msgid "<guibutton>Modify</guibutton>" +msgstr "<guibutton>Змінити</guibutton>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:29 +msgid "" +"You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the " +"same window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall" +msgstr "Додаткові налаштування мережевого інтерфейсу і захисного шлюзу" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3 +msgid "drakinvictus" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakinvictus-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakinvictus.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakinvictus-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakinvictus.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakinvictus</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:10 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Network Center" +msgstr "Мережевий центр" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:12 +msgid "draknetcenter" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"draknetcenter.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"draknetcenter-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"draknetcenter.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"draknetcenter-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draknetcenter</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"Network & Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Network " +"Center\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31 +msgid "" +"When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks " +"configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, " +"etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending " +"on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its " +"settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a " +"network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, " +"ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:42 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterEthernet-on.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterEthernet-on.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:46 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterEthernet-off.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterEthernet-off.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:51 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterWireless-off.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterWireless-off.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:55 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterWireless-on.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterWireless-on.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:39 +msgid "" +"In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the " +"first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <placeholder " +"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/> (this one is not connected<placeholder " +"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"1\"/> ) and the second section shows " +"wireless networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <placeholder type=" +"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"2\"/> and this one <placeholder type=" +"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"3\"/>if connected. For the other network types, " +"the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not " +"connected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:62 +msgid "" +"In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected " +"networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal strengh</" +"guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and the " +"<guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then either " +"on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> or " +"<guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network to " +"another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings window " +"(see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption key in " +"particular)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:72 +msgid "Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:75 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter1.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter1.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:84 +msgid "The Monitor button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:87 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter4.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter4.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:92 +msgid "" +"This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the " +"PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is " +"available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray " +"-> Monitor Network</guimenu>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:97 +msgid "" +"There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the " +"local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which " +"gives details about connection status." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:102 +msgid "" +"At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic accounting</" +"guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:108 +msgid "The Configure button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:110 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">A - For a wired network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:113 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter2.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:118 +msgid "" +"It is possible to change all the settings given during network creation. " +"Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> " +"<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual " +"configuration may give better results." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:123 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks " +"like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the " +"<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are " +"available from your providers website." +msgstr "" +"У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат: <emphasis>" +"192.168.0.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є <emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А " +"дані щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна отримати з сайта вашого постачальника " +"послуг." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:128 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count " +"the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in " +"the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may " +"have to reconnect to the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:133 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager:" +"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Дозволити керування інтерфейсом за допомогою Network Manager</" +"emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:140 en/draknetcenter.xml:185 +msgid "<guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:147 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter5.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter5.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:152 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">B - For a wireless network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:154 +msgid "Only the item not already seen above are explained." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:157 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter3.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter3.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:162 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Operating mode:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Режим роботи:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:164 +msgid "" +"Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access " +"point, there is an <emphasis role=\"bold\">ESSID</emphasis> detected. " +"Select <guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as " +"the access point, your network card needs to support this mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:170 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:173 +msgid "If it is a private network, you need to know this settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:175 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a " +"passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA " +"personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used " +"in private networks." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:180 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:" +msgstr "Дозволити роумінг точки доступу" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:182 +msgid "" +"Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access " +"point while remaining connected to the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:192 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter6.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter6.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:201 +msgid "The Advanced Settings button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:208 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter7.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter7.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Manage different network profiles" +msgstr "Керувати різними мережевими профілями" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:3 +msgid "draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draknetprofile-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draknetprofile.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draknetprofile-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draknetprofile.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draknetprofile</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draknetprofile</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:9 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Share drives and directories using NFS" +msgstr "Надати спільний доступ до файлів і тек з використанням NFS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draknfs.xml:11 +msgid "draknfs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknfs.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:24 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Prerequisites" +msgstr "Передумови" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:27 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draknfs</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draknfs</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:26 +msgid "" +"When the wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is launched for the " +"first time, it may display the following message:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:33 +msgid "The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:37 +msgid "" +"After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:42 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Main window" +msgstr "Головне вікно" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:44 +msgid "" +"A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list " +"is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a " +"configuration tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:50 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Modify entry" +msgstr "Змінити запис" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:52 +msgid "" +"The configuration tool is labeled \"Modify entry\". It may be also launched " +"with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are " +"available." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknfs.xml:57 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs4.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im4\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs4.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im4\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:64 +#, fuzzy +msgid "NFS Directory" +msgstr "Каталог NFS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The " +"<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose " +"it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:72 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Host access" +msgstr "Доступ до машини" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:74 +msgid "" +"Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared " +"directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:77 +msgid "NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:79 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name " +"recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard " +"characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the " +"domain cs.foo.edu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all " +"hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either " +"`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:96 +#, fuzzy +msgid "User ID Mapping" +msgstr "Відображення ід. користувача" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:98 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid " +"0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client " +"cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on " +"the server itself." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:103 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root squashing. " +"This option is mainly useful for diskless clients (no_root_squash)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:107 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids " +"to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP " +"directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID " +"mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:113 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of " +"the anonymous account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:118 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Advanced options" +msgstr "Додаткові параметри" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests " +"originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option " +"is on by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:124 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read " +"and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any " +"request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by " +"using this option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:129 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from " +"violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made " +"by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:134 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can " +"help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See " +"exports(5) man page for more details." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:141 en/draksambashare.xml:202 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Menu entries" +msgstr "Пункти меню" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:143 +msgid "So far the list is has at least one entry." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draknfs.xml:146 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs5.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im5\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs5.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im5\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:153 en/draksambashare.xml:208 +msgid "File|Write conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:155 +msgid "Save the current configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:159 +msgid "NFS Server|Restart" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:161 en/draksambashare.xml:223 +msgid "" +"The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:166 +msgid "NFS Server|Reload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:168 en/draksambashare.xml:230 +msgid "" +"The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:10 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Proxy" +msgstr "Проксі" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:12 +msgid "drakproxy" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakproxy.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakproxy-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakproxy.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakproxy-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakproxy</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakproxy</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:22 +msgid "" +"If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use " +"this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> to configure it. Your net " +"administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify " +"some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:30 +msgid "" +"From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a " +"proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts as " +"an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other " +"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, " +"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a " +"different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to " +"simplify and control their complexity." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:3 +msgid "Configure Media" +msgstr "Налаштувати джерело" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:5 +msgid "drakrpm-edit-media" +msgstr "drakrpm-edit-media" + +#. 2013-01-06 marja - added Qilaq's and spturtle's corrections +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakrpm-edit-media-im1\" fileref=\"drakrpm-" +"edit-media.png\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakrpm-edit-media-im1\" fileref=\"drakrpm-" +"edit-media.png\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><important><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:17 +msgid "" +"First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (as known as " +"repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources " +"to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button " +"below)." +msgstr "" +"Одразу після встановлення системи слід додати записи джерел програмного " +"забезпечення (їх також називають сховищами, носіями даних, дзеркалами). Це " +"означає, що вам слід вибрати джерела програмного забезпечення, які буде " +"використано для встановлення і оновлення пакунків та програм (див. кнопку " +"<guilabel>Додати</guilabel>, описану нижче)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:21 en/MageiaUpdate.xml:17 en/MageiaUpdate.xml:32 +#: en/XFdrake.xml:36 en/XFdrake.xml:75 en/XFdrake.xml:89 +msgid "<note>" +msgstr "<note>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:22 +msgid "" +"Your system is running under an architecture than may be 32-bit called i586, " +"or 64-bit called x86_64. Take care to choose repositories that suit your " +"system or are not dependent of the architecture, these are called noarch " +"packages." +msgstr "" +"Ваша система може працювати на 32-бітовій апаратній архітектурі, яка " +"називається у дистрибутиві i586, або 64-бітовій архітектурі, яка має назву " +"x86_64. Вам слід вибрати сховища, які відповідають вашій системі та сховища " +"для пакунків, які не залежать від архітектури (їх ще називають noarch)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:26 en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:15 +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:21 en/MageiaUpdate.xml:40 en/XFdrake.xml:79 +msgid "</note>" +msgstr "</note>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:30 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> від імені " +"адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:28 +msgid "" +"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Software management.</emphasis><placeholder type=\"footnote\" " +"id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" +"Доступ до цієї програми можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, сторінка " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Менеджер програм</emphasis><placeholder type=" +"\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:34 +msgid "The columns" +msgstr "Стовпчики" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:36 +msgid "Column Enable:" +msgstr "Стовпчик «Доступний»:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:38 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with " +"some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable." +msgstr "" +"Позначені джерела буде використано для встановлення нових пакунків. " +"Спеціальні джерела, зокрема Testing і debug, вибирати не варто, оскільки їх " +"використання може призвести до непрацездатності системи." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:42 +msgid "Column Update:" +msgstr "Стовпчик «Поновлення»:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:44 +msgid "" +"The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only " +"media with \"Update\" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, " +"this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root " +"and type <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"Якщо джерело буде використано для оновлення пакунків, його слід позначити у " +"цьому стовпчику. Має бути позначено лише джерела зі словом " +"«Update» (оновлення) у назві. З міркувань безпеки значення у цьому стовпчику " +"не можна змінювати за допомогою цієї програми. Вам доведеться відкрити " +"консоль і від імені адміністратора (root) віддати команду <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media --expert</emphasis>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:50 +msgid "Column medium:" +msgstr "Стовпчик «Джерело»:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:52 +msgid "" +"Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release " +"versions contain at least:" +msgstr "" +"Тут буде показано назву джерела. Офіційні сховища Mageia для остаточних " +"випусків містять принаймні такі елементи:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:57 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs " +"available supported by Mageia." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">core</emphasis> (основа) — сховище, що містить " +"більшість програм, які підтримуються спільнотою Mageia." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:62 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs " +"which are not free" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:67 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there " +"might be patent claims in some countries." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">tainted</emphasis> (нечисте) — сховища з вільним " +"програмним забезпеченням, щодо використання якого у певних країнах можуть " +"застосовуватися патентні обмеження." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:70 +msgid "Each medium has 4 sub-sections:" +msgstr "Кожен запис джерела містить 4 підрозділи:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:74 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the " +"this version of Mageia was released." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">release</emphasis> (випуск) — сховище пакунків на " +"день випуску вашої версії Mageia." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:79 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since " +"release due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium " +"enabled, even with a very slow internet connection." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">updates</emphasis> (оновлення) — пакунки, оновлені з " +"часу випуску з міркувань безпеки або усування вад. Це джерело варто " +"увімкнути всім, навіть якщо з’єднання з інтернетом є дуже повільним." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:85 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions " +"backported from Cauldron (the next version under development)." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">backports</emphasis> (зворотне портування) — для " +"деяких з пакунків нові версії портуються зі сховища Cauldron (сховища " +"наступної версії дистрибутива, розробку якої ще не завершено)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:91 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests " +"of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the " +"corrections." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">testing</emphasis> (тестування) — сховище, яке " +"використовується для проміжного тестування оновлень, щоб дати змогу тим, хто " +"звітує про вади, та учасникам команди із забезпечення якості перевірити " +"працездатність виправлених пакунків." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:99 +msgid "The buttons on the right" +msgstr "Кнопки на панелі праворуч" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:102 +msgid "<guibutton>Remove:</guibutton>" +msgstr "<guibutton>Вилучити:</guibutton>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:104 +msgid "" +"To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to " +"remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example) since " +"all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium." +msgstr "" +"Щоб вилучити джерело, наведіть на його пункт вказівник миші і клацніть лівою " +"кнопкою, потім натисніть цю кнопку. Іноді варто вилучити пункт носія, який " +"було використано для встановлення системи (компакт-диск або DVD) оскільки " +"всі пакунки з цього носія можна встановити з офіційного джерела основних " +"пакунків (Core) відповідного випуску." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:109 +msgid "<guibutton>Edit:</guibutton>" +msgstr "<guibutton>Виправити:</guibutton>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:111 +msgid "" +"Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and " +"proxy)." +msgstr "" +"Надає вам змогу вносити зміни до параметрів позначеного запису джерела " +"(адресу, програму для звантаження і параметри проксі-сервера)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:114 +msgid "<guibutton>Add:</guibutton>" +msgstr "<guibutton>Додати:</guibutton>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:116 +msgid "" +"Add the official repositories available on the internet. These repositories " +"contains only sure and well tested software. Clicking on the add button " +"opens a pop up window giving the choices of installing the \"Update sources " +"only\" or the \"Full set of sources\". The first choice the essential, the " +"second is more useful." +msgstr "" +"Кнопка для додавання офіційних сховищ з інтернету. У офіційних сховищах " +"містяться лише надійні і добре перевірені пакунки. Після натискання кнопки " +"<guibutton>Додати</guibutton> програма відкриє контекстне вікно, за " +"допомогою якого ви зможете вибрати набір джерел для встановлення: «Тільки " +"джерела з поновленнями» або «Повний набір джерел». Перший варіант є " +"мінімалістичним, другий — найкориснішим." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:122 +msgid "<guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton>" +msgstr "<guibutton>Кнопки зі стрілками вгору і вниз:</guibutton>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:124 +msgid "" +"Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list " +"in the displayed order and will install the first found package (for a same " +"release number, if not, the last release will be installed). So if " +"possible, place the fastest repositories on the top." +msgstr "" +"Ці кнопки призначено для впорядковування списку. Під час пошуків пакунків " +"програмою Drakrpm виконується завантаження списку сховищ у показаному " +"порядку, пакунок встановлюється зі сховища, яке стоятиме вище у списку (якщо " +"номер випуску пакунка є однаковим в усіх сховищах; якщо номер буде різним, " +"програма встановить пакунок з найсвіжішого випуску). Отже, якщо можна, " +"розташовуйте сховища з найшвидшим доступом на початку списку." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:131 en/harddrake2.xml:64 +msgid "The menu" +msgstr "Меню програми" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:133 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu>" +msgstr "<guimenu>Файл</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Оновити</guimenuitem>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:135 +msgid "" +"A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and " +"click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" +"У відповідь на вибір цього пункту буде відкрито вікно зі списком джерел. " +"Виберіть ті з них, дані яких слід оновити, і натисніть кнопку " +"<guibutton>Оновити</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:138 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:140 +msgid "" +"Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's " +"too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the " +"actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them out. " +"Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose " +"between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the " +"<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by " +"clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:150 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakrpmEditMedia2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakrpmEditMedia2.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:155 +msgid "" +"You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very " +"close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available " +"mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:160 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:162 +msgid "" +"It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that " +"isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:" +msgstr "" +"Ви можете виконати встановлення з нового джерела (наприклад, зі стороннього " +"сховища спільноти), яке не підтримується офіційно спільнотою Mageia. У " +"відповідь на вибір цього пункту меню буде показано нове вікно:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:166 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:165 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the medium type, find a " +"smart name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, " +"according to the medium type)" +msgstr "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Виберіть тип джерела, вкажіть " +"коротку назву, яка добре описує відповідне сховище, і додайте адресу (або " +"шлях до джерела, залежно від його типу)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:173 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:175 +msgid "" +"This item allows you to choose when to \"Verify RPMs to be installed" +"\" (always or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to " +"define the download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by " +"default-, update only, always or never)." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цього пункту меню ви можете визначити, коли слід " +"<guilabel>Перевіряти пакунки, які встановлюються</guilabel> (завжди або " +"ніколи), визначити програму для отримання пакунків (curl, wget або aria2) і " +"вказати правила отримання даних щодо пакунків (на запит (типовий варіант), " +"тільки поновлення, завжди або ніколи)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:180 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:182 +msgid "" +"To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate " +"the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the " +"window that appear, select a medium and then click on <guibutton>Add</" +"guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click on " +"<guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key." +msgstr "" +"З метою забезпечення кращої безпеки для розпізнавання джерела " +"використовуються цифрові ключі. Для кожного з джерел можна дозволити або " +"заборонити використання ключа. У вікні, яке буде відкрито, виберіть джерело " +"і натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Додати</guibutton>, щоб уможливити " +"використання нового ключа, або позначте пункт ключа і натисніть кнопку " +"<guibutton>Вилучити</guibutton>, щоб заборонити його використання." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:189 +msgid "Do this with care, as with all security-related questions" +msgstr "" +"Будьте обережними, як і з усіма іншими питаннями, пов’язаними з безпекою." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:190 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:192 +msgid "" +"If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it " +"here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if " +"necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>." +msgstr "" +"Якщо для доступу до інтернету з вашого комп’ютера слід користуватися проксі-" +"сервером, ви можете вказати параметри його роботи. Вам слід вказати " +"<guibutton>Назву проксі</guibutton> і, якщо потрібно, вказати " +"<guilabel>Користувача</guilabel> і <guilabel>Пароль</guilabel>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakrpm-update.xml:3 +msgid "Software Packages Update (OLD)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakrpm-update.xml:3 +msgid "drakrpm-update" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-update.xml:8 +msgid "DON'T USE THIS FILE, USE MageiaUpdate.xml INSTEAD!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:10 +msgid "Share directories and drives with Samba" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:13 +#, fuzzy +msgid "draksambashare" +msgstr "Draksambashare" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:17 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:29 +msgid "" +"Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some " +"resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure " +"the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is " +"also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the " +"resources of the Samba server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:37 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Preparation" +msgstr "Приготування" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:39 +msgid "" +"To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP " +"address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with " +"<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter-ti1\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:43 +msgid "" +", or at the DHCP server which identifies the station with its MAC-address " +"and give it always the same address. The firewall has also to allow the " +"incoming requests to the Samba server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:51 +msgid "Wizard - Standalone server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:54 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis role=\"bold" +"\"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draksambashare</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:53 +msgid "" +"At the first run, the tools <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> checks " +"if needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are " +"not yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:61 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare0.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare0-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare0.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare0-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:68 +msgid "" +"In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already " +"selected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:71 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare1.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare1-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare1.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare1-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:78 +msgid "" +"Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the " +"access to the shared resources." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:81 +msgid "" +"The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on " +"the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:85 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare2.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare2-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare2.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare2-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:92 +msgid "Choose the security mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the " +"resource" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:101 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for " +"each share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:106 +msgid "" +"You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP " +"addess or host name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:110 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare3.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare3-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare3.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare3-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:116 +msgid "" +"Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be " +"described in the Windows workstations." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare4.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im4\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare4.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im4\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:127 +msgid "" +"The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:131 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare5.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im5\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare5.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im5\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:138 +msgid "" +"The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the " +"configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in <code>/" +"etc/samba/smb.conf</code>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:143 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare6.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im6\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare6.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im6\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:152 +msgid "Wizard - Primary domain controller" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:155 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare13.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare13.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:154 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the \"Primary domain " +"controller\" option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is " +"to support or not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are " +"then the same as for standalone server, except you can choose also the " +"security mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:165 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and " +"group accounts in a central, shared, account repository. The centralized " +"account repository is shared between (security) controllers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:174 +msgid "Declare a directory to share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:176 +msgid "With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:179 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare15.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im7\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare15.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im7\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:185 +msgid "" +"A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the <guibutton>Modify</" +"guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether the directory is " +"visible to the public, writable or browseable. The share name can not be " +"modified." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:191 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare16.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im8\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare16.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im8\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:204 +msgid "When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:210 +msgid "Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:215 +msgid "Samba server|Configure" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:217 +msgid "The wizard can be run again with this command." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:221 +msgid "Samba server|Restart" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:228 +msgid "Samba Server|Reload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:236 +msgid "Printers share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:238 +msgid "Samba also allows you to share printers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:241 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare17.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare17.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:240 en/drakvpn.xml:46 en/logdrake.xml:89 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:42 en/rpmdrake.xml:147 en/rpmdrake.xml:157 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:167 en/rpmdrake.xml:177 en/rpmdrake.xml:187 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:222 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:248 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Samba users" +msgstr "Користувачі Sa&mba" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:253 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare18.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare18.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:250 +msgid "" +"In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared " +"resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref " +"linkend=\"userdrake-ti1\"/><placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksec.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Configure authentication for Mageia tools" +msgstr "Налаштувати розпізнавання для інструментів Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksec.xml:6 +msgid "draksec" +msgstr "draksec" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksec.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draksec-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center" +"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draksec.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draksec-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center" +"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draksec.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksec</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draksec</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:20 +msgid "" +"It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks " +"usually done by the administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in " +"the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a " +"drop down list gives the choice between:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:29 +msgid "No password: The tool is launched without asking any password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:34 +msgid "User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:39 +msgid "Root password: the root password is asked before the tool launching" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:44 +msgid "" +"The default values depend of the chosen security level. See in the same MCC " +"tab, the tool \"Configure system security, permissions and audit\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Snapshots" +msgstr "Знімки" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:3 +msgid "draksnapshot-config" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draksnapshot-config-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draksnapshot-config.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draksnapshot-config-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draksnapshot-config.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:12 +msgid "" +"If you see the screen above when starting this tool, please close it. This " +"crash has been reported many times." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:14 +msgid "" +"You can read more about the problem in this bug report: <link xlink:href=" +"\"https://bugs.mageia.org/show_bug.cgi?id=3032\">bug 3032</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:17 +msgid "" +"We shall replace the screenshot with a correct one of the tool, and fill " +"this page with instructions about how to use it, when the bug is fixed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksnapshot-config</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draksnapshot-config</emphasis> від імені " +"адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksound.xml:3 +msgid "Sound Configuration" +msgstr "Налаштовування звуку" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksound.xml:5 +msgid "draksound" +msgstr "draksound" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksound.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksound-im1\" fileref=" +"\"draksound.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksound-im1\" fileref=" +"\"draksound.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksound</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draksound</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>.¶" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Draksound deals with the sound configuration, including the driver choice, " +"PulseAudio options and trouble shooting. It will help you if you experience " +"sound problems or if you change the sound card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:23 +msgid "" +"The drop down list called <guilabel>Driver</guilabel> allows you to select a " +"driver from all the ones available on the computer that match the sound card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:28 +msgid "" +"Most of the time, it is possible to choose a driver using the OSS or ALSA " +"API. OSS is the oldest and very basic, we recommend to choose ALSA when " +"possible for its enhanced features." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound " +"inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting " +"sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio " +"volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:38 +msgid "" +"PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it " +"enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:41 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It " +"is also recommended to leave it enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:44 +msgid "" +"The button <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> display a new windows with three " +"buttons :" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/draksound.xml:48 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Draksound1.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Draksound1.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:53 +msgid "" +"The first button gives total freedom of choice. You have to know what you " +"are doing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:56 +msgid "" +"The second one is obvious and the last one gives assistance with fixing any " +"problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this before asking " +"the community for help." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakups.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Set up a UPS for power monitoring" +msgstr "Встановити UPS для контролю за живленням" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakups.xml:3 +msgid "drakups" +msgstr "drakups" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakups.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakups-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center" +"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakups.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakups-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center" +"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakups.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakups.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakups</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakups</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Configure VPN Connection to secure network access" +msgstr "Налаштувати з'єднання VPN для безпеки доступу до мережі" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:6 +msgid "drakvpn" +msgstr "drakvpn" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakvpn-im1\" align=\"center" +"\" fileref=\"drakvpn1.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakvpn-im1\" align=\"center" +"\" fileref=\"drakvpn1.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakvpn</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakvpn</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:18 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure " +"secure access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local " +"workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the " +"configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is " +"already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the " +"network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:30 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Налаштування" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:32 +msgid "" +"First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which " +"protocol is used for your virtual private network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:35 +msgid "Then give your connection a name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:37 +msgid "At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:42 +msgid "For Cisco VPN" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:47 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn3.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn3.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:54 +msgid "" +"For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the " +"first time the tools is used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:58 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn7.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn7.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:57 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the files that you " +"received from the network administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:64 +msgid "Advanced parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:67 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn8.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn8.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:72 +msgid "The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:76 +msgid "" +"When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN " +"connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:79 +msgid "" +"This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network " +"connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect " +"to this VPN." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3 +msgid "Configure webserver" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard apache2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_apache2-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_apache2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_apache2-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_apache2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> від імені " +"адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3 +msgid "Configure DNS" +msgstr "Налаштовування DNS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard bind" +msgstr "drakwizard bind" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_bind-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_bind.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_bind-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_bind.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard bind</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:3 +msgid "Configure DHCP" +msgstr "Налаштовування DHCP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard dhcp" +msgstr "drakwizard dhcp" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_dhcp-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_dhcp.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_dhcp-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_dhcp.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:3 +msgid "Configure time" +msgstr "Налаштовування часу" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard ntp" +msgstr "drakwizard ntp" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_ntp-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_ntp.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_ntp-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_ntp.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3 +msgid "Configure FTP" +msgstr "Налаштовування FTP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard proftpd" +msgstr "drakwizard proftpd" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_proftpd-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_proftpd.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_proftpd-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_proftpd.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> від імені " +"адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:3 +msgid "Configure proxy" +msgstr "Налаштовування проксі-сервера" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard squid" +msgstr "drakwizard squid" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_squid-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_squid.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_squid-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_squid.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard squid</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3 +msgid "OpenSSH daemon configuration" +msgstr "Налаштовування фонової служби OpenSSH" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard sshd" +msgstr "drakwizard sshd" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_sshd-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_sshd.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_sshd-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_sshd.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - License Terms of the Distribution" +msgstr "Застаріле — ліцензійна угода щодо дистрибутива" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml:8 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-license.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-im1\" revision=\"3\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-license.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-im1\" revision=\"3\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml:14 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:204 +msgid "license" +msgstr "ліцензія" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Before continuing, you should " +"carefully read the terms of the license. It covers the entire " +"<application>Mageia</application> distribution. If you agree with all the " +"terms it contains, select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and click on " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. If not, clicking on <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> " +"will reboot your computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml:22 +msgid "" +"If you are curious about any technical changes which have occurred in the " +"distribution since the last release, you can click on the <guibutton>Release " +"Notes</guibutton> button to display them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Adding a User" +msgstr "Застаріле — додавання користувача" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx-addUser.png\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-addUser-" +"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx-addUser.png\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-addUser-" +"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:16 +#, fuzzy +msgid "users" +msgstr "Користувачі" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:18 +#, fuzzy +msgid "adding" +msgstr "Додавання:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:12 +msgid "" +"<application>GNU/Linux</application> is a multi-user system which means each " +"user can have his or her own preferences, own files and so on. But unlike " +"<literal>root</literal>, who is the system administrator, the <placeholder " +"type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>users you add at this point won't be authorized " +"to change anything except their own files and their own configurations, " +"protecting the system from unintentional or malicious changes which could " +"have a serious impact on it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You will have to create at least one regular user for yourself — this is the " +"account which you should use for routine, day-to-day usage. Although it's " +"very easy to log in as <literal>root</literal> to do anything and " +"everything, it may also be very dangerous! A very simple mistake could mean " +"that your system won't work any more. If you make a serious mistake as a " +"regular user, the worst that can happen is that you'll lose some " +"information, but you won't affect the entire system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:33 +msgid "" +"The first field asks you for a real name. <application>DrakX</application> " +"will use the first word you type in this field and copy it, all in " +"lowercase, to the <guimenu>Login name</guimenu> field, which is the name " +"this user will enter to log on to the system. You can override it and change " +"the <guimenu>Login Name</guimenu>. The next step is to enter a password. " +"From a security point of view, a non-privileged (regular) user's password is " +"not as crucial as the <literal>root</literal> password, but that's no reason " +"to neglect it by making it blank or too simple: after all, <emphasis>your</" +"emphasis> files could be the ones at risk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Once you click on <guimenu>Accept user</guimenu> you can add other users. " +"Add a user for each one of your friends, your father, your sister, etc. " +"Click <guimenu>Next</guimenu> when you're finished adding users." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><tip><para> +#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:54 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:623 +msgid "" +"Clicking the <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button allows you to change the " +"default <literal>shell</literal> for that user (<application>bash</" +"application> by default)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Choosing Mount Points" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:14 en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:16 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:532 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:534 +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:14 en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:22 +msgid "root" +msgstr "root" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:15 +#, fuzzy +msgid "partition" +msgstr "Розділ диска" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:15 en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:24 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:110 +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:21 +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:28 +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:52 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:442 +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:472 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:482 +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:502 en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:17 +msgid "partitions" +msgstr "розділи" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:10 +msgid "" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard drive. " +"You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most " +"common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a " +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=" +"\"1\"/>root partition (<literal revision=\"3\">/</literal>). Do not choose " +"too small a partition or you will not be able to install enough software. In " +"most cases it is best to also create a <literal>/home</literal> partition, " +"to store your data on (only possible if you have more than one Linux " +"partition available)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Each partition is listed as follows: \"Device\", \"Capacity\", \"Mount point" +"\",\"Type\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:22 +msgid "" +"\"Device\", is structured: \"hard drive type\", \"hard drive number\", " +"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:28 +msgid "" +"When the mount points are correct, or corrected, click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>. You'll then be given the choice to format one or more of the " +"partitions you just chose to install Mageia on. Usually, formatting " +"<literal>/</literal> and saving <literal>/home</literal> (if the same " +"partition was your <literal>/home</literal> before), is a good choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Multiple CD-ROM Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml:7 +msgid "" +"The <application>Mandriva Linux</application> installation is distributed on " +"several <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>s. If a selected package is located on " +"another <acronym>CD</acronym>, <application>DrakX</application> will eject " +"the current <acronym>CD</acronym> and ask you to insert the required one. If " +"you do not have the requested <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> at hand, just click " +"on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, and the corresponding packages will not be " +"installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Choose Packages to Install" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:11 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Graphical Environment" +msgstr "Графічне середовище" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:13 en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:31 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:48 en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:57 +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:72 +msgid "packages" +msgstr "пакунки" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:14 +#, fuzzy +msgid "graphical environment" +msgstr "Графічне середовище" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <guilabel>Graphical Environment</" +"guilabel>: this is where you will choose your preferred graphical " +"environment. At least one must be selected if you want to have a graphical " +"interface available." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:21 +msgid "Choose Package Groups to Install" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-choosePackages.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-choosePackages-im1\" revision=\"3\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:32 +#, fuzzy +msgid "installing" +msgstr "встановлення" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>It's now time to specify which " +"programs you wish to install on your system. There are thousands of packages " +"available for <application>Mageia</application>, and to make it simpler to " +"manage, they have been placed into groups of similar applications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:40 +msgid "" +"<application>Mageia</application> sorts package groups into categories. You " +"can mix and match applications from the various categories, so a " +"<guilabel>Workstation</guilabel> installation can still have applications " +"from the <guilabel>Server</guilabel> category installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:49 +#, fuzzy +msgid "workstation" +msgstr "Робоча станція" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Workstation</guilabel>: " +"if you plan to use your machine as a workstation, select one or more of the " +"groups in this category. The special <literal>LSB</literal> group will " +"configure your system so that it complies as much as possible with the <link " +"xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" xlink:href=\"http://www." +"linuxbase.org/\">Linux Standard Base Project</link> specifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:58 +#, fuzzy +msgid "server" +msgstr "Сервер:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:57 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Server</guilabel>: if " +"your machine is intended to be a server, select which of the more common " +"services you wish to install on your machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Moving the mouse cursor over a group name will display a short explanatory " +"text about that group." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:73 +msgid "individual selection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:76 +msgid "" +"You can check the <guilabel>Individual package selection</guilabel> box, " +"which is useful if you're familiar with the packages being offered or if you " +"want to have total control over what will be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:82 +msgid "" +"If you start the installation in <guilabel>Upgrade</guilabel> mode, you can " +"deselect all groups and prevent the installation of any new packages. This " +"is useful for repairing or updating an existing system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:91 +msgid "Minimal Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:93 +msgid "" +"If you deselect all groups when performing a regular installation (as " +"opposed to an upgrade), a new dialog shows after pressing the " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, suggesting different options for a " +"minimal installation:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:101 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>With X</guilabel>: install the minimum number of packages possible " +"to have a working graphical desktop." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:106 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>With basic documentation</guilabel>: installs the base system plus " +"basic utilities and their documentation. This installation is suitable for " +"setting up a server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:112 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Truly minimal install</guilabel>: installs the absolute minimum " +"number of packages necessary to get a working <application>Linux</" +"application> system. With this installation you will only have a command-" +"line interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:120 +msgid "Choosing Individual Packages to Install" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:125 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-choosePackagesTree.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-choosePackages-im2\" revision=\"1\" " +"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:130 +msgid "" +"If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present a " +"tree structure containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. " +"While browsing the tree, you can select entire groups, subgroups, or " +"individual packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:136 +msgid "" +"Whenever you select a package on the tree, a description will appear on the " +"right to let you know the purpose of that package." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:141 +msgid "" +"If a server package has been selected, either because you specifically chose " +"the individual package or because it was part of a group of packages, you " +"will be asked to confirm that you really want those server packages to be " +"installed. By default <application>Mageia</application> will automatically " +"start any installed services (servers) at boot time. Even if they are safe " +"and have no known issues at the time the distribution was shipped, it is " +"entirely possible that security holes were discovered after this version of " +"<application>Mageia</application> was finalized. If you don't know what a " +"particular service is supposed to do or why it's being installed, then click " +"<guibutton>No</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:157 +msgid "dependencies" +msgstr "залежності" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:158 +#, fuzzy +msgid "automatic" +msgstr "автоматична" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:156 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> The <guilabel>Show automatically " +"selected packages</guilabel> option is used to disable the warning dialog. " +"Those appear whenever the installer automatically selects a package to " +"resolve a dependency issue. Some packages depend on others and the " +"installation of one particular package may require the installation of " +"another one. The installer can determine which packages are required to " +"satisfy a dependency and to successfully complete the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:170 +msgid "" +"The little floppy disk icon at the bottom of the list allows you to load or " +"save the packages list. This is useful if you have a number of machines that " +"you wish to configure identically. Click on this icon and select whether you " +"wish to <guilabel>Load</guilabel> or <guilabel>Save</guilabel> the packages " +"list, then select the medium in the following screen and click on the " +"<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Partitioning your Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-doPartitionDisks.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You now need to decide where you want to install <application>Mageia</" +"application> on your hard drive. If your hard drive is empty or if an " +"existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to " +"re-partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard drive means to " +"logically divide it in order to create the space required for your new " +"<application>Mageia</application> system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:24 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:15 +#, fuzzy +msgid "DrakX" +msgstr "DrakX" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:24 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Because the process of " +"partitioning a hard drive is usually irreversible and can lead to data loss, " +"partitioning can be intimidating and stressful for the inexperienced user. " +"Fortunately, <application>DrakX</application> includes a wizard which " +"simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the " +"rest of this section and, above all, take your time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Depending on the configuration of your hard drive, several options are " +"available:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:39 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Use free space</guibutton>. This option will perform an automatic " +"partitioning of your blank drive(s). If you use this option there will be no " +"further prompts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:46 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:352 +#, fuzzy +msgid "mount points" +msgstr "Точки монтування" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:46 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Use existing " +"partitions</guibutton>. The wizard has detected one or more existing " +"<application>Linux</application> partitions on your hard drive. If you want " +"to use them, choose this option. You will then be asked to choose the mount " +"points associated with each of the partitions. The legacy mount points are " +"selected by default, and for the most part it's a good idea to keep them. " +"You will also be asked to choose the partitions to be formatted or preserved." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:62 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Use the free space on the Windows partition</guibutton>. If " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> is installed " +"on your hard drive, you might have to create free space for <application>GNU/" +"Linux</application>. To do so, you can delete your " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and " +"data (see the <quote>Erase entire disk</quote> solution below) or resize " +"your <acronym>FAT</acronym> or <acronym>NTFS</acronym> partition. Resizing " +"can be performed without the loss of any data, <emphasis>provided you've " +"previously defragmented the <application>Windows<superscript>®</" +"superscript></application> partition. Backing up your data is strongly " +"recommended</emphasis>. Using this option is recommended if you want to use " +"both <application>Mageia</application> and " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on the same " +"computer in a <emphasis>dual boot</emphasis> configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:75 +msgid "" +"Before choosing this option, please understand that after this procedure, " +"the size of your <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> partition will be smaller than when you started, which means " +"you will have less free space to store your data or to install new software." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:83 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Erase entire disk</guibutton>. If you want to delete all data and " +"all partitions present on your hard drive and replace them with " +"<application>Mageia</application>, choose this option. Be warned that you " +"won't be able to undo this operation after you confirm." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:90 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:427 +msgid "" +"If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will " +"be deleted." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Remove Windows(TM)</guibutton>. This option appears when the hard " +"drive is entirely taken by <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application>. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the " +"drive, partitioning everything from scratch." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:102 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:437 +msgid "" +"If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will " +"be lost." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:110 +#, fuzzy +msgid "custom" +msgstr "Нетиповий" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:109 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Custom disk " +"partitioning</guibutton>. Choose this option if you want to manually " +"partition your hard drive. Be careful: it is a powerful but dangerous choice " +"and you can very easily lose all your data. That's why this option is only " +"recommended if you have performed custom disk partitioning before, and have " +"enough <application>GNU/Linux</application> experience to know what you are " +"doing. For more instructions on how to use the <application>DiskDrake</" +"application> utility, refer to <phrase condition=\"Starter\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-" +"drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph1\"><xref linkend=\"diskdrake\"/></phrase><phrase " +"condition=\"Discovery\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph3\">the " +"<citetitle xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ct1\">Managing Your " +"Partitions</citetitle> section in the <citetitle>Starter Guide</citetitle></" +"phrase><phrase condition=\"QSP\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-" +"ph4\">the <citetitle xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ct2\">Managing " +"Your Partitions</citetitle> section in the <citetitle>Starter Guide</" +"citetitle></phrase>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - It's Done!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-exitInstall.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-exitInstall-im1\" revision=\"1\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:13 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:225 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:779 +msgid "boot" +msgstr "завантаження" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:14 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:780 +msgid "dual-boot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>There you are. The installation is " +"now complete and your <application>GNU/Linux</application> system is ready " +"to be used. Just click on <guibutton>Reboot</guibutton> to restart the " +"system. Don't forget to remove the installation media (<acronym>CD-ROM</" +"acronym> or floppy). The first thing you should see after your computer has " +"finished doing its hardware tests is the bootloader menu, which allows you " +"to choose between the <acronym>OS</acronym>es your system can boot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:23 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Advanced Options" +msgstr "Додаткові параметри" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:26 +msgid "The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button shows more buttons to:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:32 +#, fuzzy +msgid "floppy" +msgstr "гнучкий диск" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:33 +#, fuzzy +msgid "auto-install" +msgstr "Автовстановлення" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Generate auto-install " +"floppy</guibutton>: enables you to create an installation floppy disk which " +"will automatically perform a whole installation, similar to the one just " +"finished, without the help of an operator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Note that two different options are available after clicking on that button:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:45 en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:52 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:73 en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:13 +#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:15 +msgid "installation" +msgstr "Встановлення" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:45 +#, fuzzy +msgid "replay" +msgstr "&Повторити гру" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:44 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Replay</guibutton>. " +"This is a partially automated installation. The partitioning step is the " +"only interactive procedure." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:53 +#, fuzzy +msgid "automated" +msgstr "Автоматично" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:51 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Automated</guibutton>. " +"Fully automated installation: <emphasis>the hard disk is completely " +"rewritten, all data is lost</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:62 +msgid "" +"This feature is very handy when installing on a number of similar machines. " +"See the <link xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" xlink:href=" +"\"http://www.mandrakelinux.com/drakx/auto_inst.html\">Auto install</link> " +"section on our web site for more information." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:73 +msgid "save package selection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:75 +msgid "" +"If you chose to save on a floppy, you will need a <acronym>FAT</acronym>-" +"formatted floppy. To create one under <application>GNU/Linux</application>, " +"type <command>mformat a:</command> or, as root, <command>fdformat /dev/fd0</" +"command> followed by <command>mkfs.vfat /dev/fd0</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:72 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Save package selection</" +"guibutton><placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"1\"/>: saves a list of the " +"packages selected in this installation. The following screen shows you the " +"possible media to use to save the package list onto: you might need to fill " +"some parameters when you click on the <guilabel>Next</guilabel> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:87 +msgid "" +"To use this selection of packages with another installation, perform the " +"installation as usual up to the point of the package selection, and choose " +"to select individual packages, without worrying about the current package " +"selection. Use the floppy icon and select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> " +"option. Then choose the medium which contains the package list. Finally " +"click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>: the list of packages you loaded will be " +"selected and be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Choose Partitions to Be Formatted" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:9 +msgid "" +"This step is available only if you chose to reuse existing " +"<application>Linux</application> partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-formatPartitions.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:21 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:473 +#, fuzzy +msgid "formatting" +msgstr "форматування" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>If you chose to reuse some legacy " +"<application>GNU/Linux</application> partitions, you may wish to reformat " +"some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please select those " +"partitions as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:28 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:483 +msgid "pre-existing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Please note that it's not necessary to reformat all <placeholder type=" +"\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>pre-existing partitions. You must reformat the " +"partitions containing the operating system (such as <literal>/</literal>, " +"<literal>/usr</literal> or <literal>/var</literal>) but not the partitions " +"containing data you wish to keep (typically <literal>/home</literal>)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Please be careful when selecting partitions. After the formatting is " +"completed, <emphasis>all data on the selected partitions will be deleted</" +"emphasis> and you won't be able to recover it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:40 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> when you're ready to format the " +"partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you want to choose other " +"partitions for your new <application>Mageia</application> operating system " +"installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:52 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:502 +#, fuzzy +msgid "bad blocks" +msgstr "пошкоджені блоки" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> if you wish to select partitions " +"which will be checked for <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>bad " +"blocks on the disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Installing Updates from the Internet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-installUpdates.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-installUpdates-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:13 en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:14 +#, fuzzy +msgid "updates" +msgstr "оновлює" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:12 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" " +"id=\"1\"/>By the time you install <application>Mageia</application>, it's " +"likely that some packages will have been updated since the initial release. " +"Bugs may have been fixed, security issues resolved, etc. To allow you to " +"benefit from these updates, you're now able to download them from the " +"Internet. Select <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> if you have a working Internet " +"connection and you want to install any updated packages now, or " +"<guilabel>No</guilabel> if you prefer to install updated packages later." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:24 +msgid "" +"Choosing <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> will display a list of web locations from " +"which updates can be retrieved. You should choose one near to you. A tree " +"containing package selections will appear: review the selection, and press " +"<guibutton>Install</guibutton> to retrieve and install the selected " +"package(s), or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-intro.xml:3 +msgid "About the Installer Help Manual" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-intro.xml:7 +msgid "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." +msgstr "" +"Всі сторінки, описані у цьому підручнику побачити одразу неможливо. Набір " +"сторінок, які ви побачите залежить від набору обладнання у вашій системі та " +"вибраного вами варіанта встановлення." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-intro.xml:12 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link xlink:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>" +msgstr "" +"Текст та знімки вікон у цьому підручнику надаються вам відповідно до умов " +"ліцензування CC BY-SA 3.0, <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/" +"licenses/by-sa/3.0/\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>ю" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-intro.xml:15 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link xlink:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link xlink:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>" +msgstr "" +"Цей підручник було створено за допомогою <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco." +"com\">Calenco CMS</link>, розробленої компанією <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Security Level" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-miscellaneous.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-im1\" revision=\"1\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:12 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:152 +#, fuzzy +msgid "security" +msgstr "безпека" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:13 +#, fuzzy +msgid "level" +msgstr "Рівень" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:12 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>At this point, <application>DrakX</" +"application> allows you to choose your machine's security level. As a rule " +"of thumb, the security level should be set higher if the machine is to " +"contain crucial data, or if it's to be directly exposed to the Internet. The " +"trade-off is that a higher security level is generally obtained at the " +"expense of ease of use." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:20 +msgid "" +"If you don't know what to choose, keep the default option. You'll be able to " +"change it later with the <application>draksec</application> tool<phrase " +"condition=\"not-in-QSPlus\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakxid-miscellaneous-ph1\"> " +"(see <xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>)</phrase>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Fill the <guilabel>Security Administrator</guilabel> field with the e-mail " +"address of the person responsible for security. Security-related messages " +"will be sent to that address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Checking Miscellaneous Parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:6 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Summary" +msgstr "Резюме" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-summary.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-misc-params-im1\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:16 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:29 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:38 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:57 +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:68 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:74 +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:95 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:118 +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:134 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:153 +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:161 +msgid "configuration" +msgstr "Налаштування" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>As a review, <application>DrakX</" +"application> will present a summary of information it has gathered about " +"your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you may " +"have some or all of the following entries. Each entry is made up of the " +"hardware item to be configured, followed by a quick summary of the current " +"configuration. Click on the corresponding <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> " +"button to make any changes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:28 +#, fuzzy +msgid "time zone" +msgstr "Часовий пояс" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:28 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>: <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>by " +"default, <application>DrakX</application> deduces your time zone based on " +"the country you have chosen. You can click on the <guibutton>Configure</" +"guibutton> button here if this is not correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:37 +#, fuzzy +msgid "country" +msgstr "країна" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:37 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Country / Region</" +"guilabel>: check the current country selection. If you're not in the country " +"selected by <application>DrakX</application>, click on the " +"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button and choose another. If your country " +"isn't in the list shown, click on the <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> " +"button to get a complete country list." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>: if you wish to change your bootloader " +"configuration, click this button. This should be reserved to advanced users. " +"Refer to the printed documentation or the in-line help about bootloader " +"configuration in the <application>Mageia Control Center</application>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:57 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:223 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:225 +msgid "services" +msgstr "Служби" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:56 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Services</guilabel>: " +"with this entry you can fine tune which services will be run on your " +"machine. If you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good idea to " +"review this setup." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:67 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:324 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:16 en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:18 +msgid "keyboard" +msgstr "Клавіатура" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:67 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>: " +"check the current keyboard map configuration and change it if necessary." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:73 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:275 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:297 en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:12 +#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:49 +msgid "mouse" +msgstr "Миша" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:73 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>: verify " +"the current mouse configuration and click on the button to change it if " +"necessary." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:94 +#, fuzzy +msgid "sound card" +msgstr "<guilabel>Звукова плата</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:94 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>: " +"if a sound card is detected on your system, it will be displayed here. If " +"you notice the sound card isn't the one actually present on your system, you " +"can click on the button and choose a different driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:117 +#, fuzzy +msgid "graphical interface" +msgstr "Графічний інтерфейс" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:116 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Graphical Interface</" +"guilabel>: by default, <application>DrakX</application> configures your " +"graphical interface with a resolution that best matches your video card and " +"monitor combination. If that doesn't suit you, or <application>DrakX</" +"application> could not automatically configure it (<guilabel>not configured</" +"guilabel> is displayed), click on <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> to " +"reconfigure your graphical interface. You can click on <guibutton>Help</" +"guibutton> from within the configuration wizard to benefit from full in-line " +"help." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:133 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:143 +#, fuzzy +msgid "network" +msgstr "Мережа" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:132 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <guilabel>Network</guilabel>: if " +"you wish to configure your Internet or local network access, you can do so " +"from here. Refer to the printed documentation or use the <application>Mageia " +"Control Center</application> after the installation has finished to benefit " +"from full in-line help." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:144 +#, fuzzy +msgid "proxy" +msgstr "проксі-сервер" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:143 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>: " +"allows you to configure <acronym>HTTP</acronym> and <acronym>FTP</acronym> " +"proxy addresses if the machine you're installing on is to be located behind " +"a proxy server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:151 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Security Level</" +"guilabel>: this entry allows you to redefine the security level<phrase " +"condition=\"Starter\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-misc-params-ph1\"> as set in a " +"previous step (see <xref linkend=\"drakxidmiscellaneous\"/>)</phrase>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:160 +#, fuzzy +msgid "firewall" +msgstr "Захисний шлюз" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:160 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>: if " +"you plan to connect your machine to the Internet, it's a good idea to " +"protect yourself from intrusions by setting up a firewall. Consult <phrase " +"condition=\"Discovery\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph5\">the " +"corresponding chapter of the <citetitle>Starter Guide</citetitle></" +"phrase><phrase condition=\"Startonly\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-" +"ph6\" revision=\"2\"><xref linkend=\"tinyfirewall\"/></phrase><phrase " +"condition=\"only-in-ML-Full-Manual\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph7\" " +"revision=\"2\"><xref linkend=\"tinyfirewall\"/></phrase> for details about " +"firewall settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:174 +msgid "Time Zone Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:179 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-configureTimezoneGMT." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-misc-params-im2\" revision=\"2\" " +"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:184 +msgid "" +"This dialog appears after selecting a new time zone in the time zones list. " +"After you've chosen the location nearest to your time zone, two more options " +"are shown." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:188 +msgid "" +"<application>GNU/Linux</application> manages time in <acronym>GMT</acronym> " +"(Greenwich Mean Time) and translates it to local time according to the time " +"zone you selected. If the clock on your motherboard is set to local time, " +"you may deactivate this by deselecting <guilabel>Hardware clock set to GMT</" +"guilabel>, which will let <application>GNU/Linux</application> know that the " +"system clock and the hardware clock are in the same time zone. This is " +"useful when the machine also hosts another operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:197 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Automatic time synchronization</guilabel> option will " +"automatically regulate the system clock by connecting to a remote time " +"server on the Internet. For this feature to work, you must have a working " +"Internet connection. We recommend that you choose a time server located near " +"you or the generic <guilabel>World Wide</guilabel> entry which will select " +"the best server for you. This option actually installs a time server which " +"can be used by other machines on your local network as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:212 +msgid "Selecting Available Services at Boot Time" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:218 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-configureServices.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-misc-params-im5\" revision=\"2\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:223 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=" +"\"1\"/>This dialog is used to select which services you wish to start at " +"boot time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:229 +msgid "" +"<application>DrakX</application> will list all services available on the " +"current installation. Review each of them carefully and uncheck those which " +"aren't needed at boot time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:235 +msgid "" +"A short explanatory text will be displayed about a service when it is " +"selected. However, if you're not sure whether a service is useful or not, it " +"is safer to leave the default behavior." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:242 +msgid "" +"At this stage, be very careful if you intend to use your machine as a " +"server: you probably don't want to start any services which you don't need. " +"Please remember that some services can be dangerous if they're enabled on a " +"server. In general, select only those services you <emphasis>really</" +"emphasis> need." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:3 +msgid "Installation with DrakX" +msgstr "Встановлення за допомогою DrakX" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:9 +msgid "Deprecated - Introduction to the MandrakeSecurity Installer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:14 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <application>DrakX</application> " +"is <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>'s installation program. Its " +"ease of use has been enhanced with a graphical user interface, allowing you " +"to move forward and backward through the installation and prompting you when " +"required. With <application>DrakX</application>, it doesn't matter whether " +"you're a new user to <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> or an old " +"pro – <application>DrakX</application>'s job is to give you a smooth " +"installation and an easy transition into <application>Mandrakesecurity</" +"application>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><figure><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:25 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Very First Installation Welcome Screen" +msgstr "Найперше вітальне вікно програми для встановлення" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:28 +msgid "" +" <imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"../dx-MNF-welcome.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im1\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:34 +msgid "" +"When you begin, the first screen that comes up will present some information " +"and give you installation options. (<xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"/>). Doing " +"nothing will simply begin the installation in normal or <quote>linux</quote> " +"mode. The next few paragraphs will go over some options and parameters that " +"you can pass to the install program if you run into problems." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:42 +msgid "" +"Pressing <keycap>F1</keycap> will open a help screen. Here are some useful " +"options to choose from:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:49 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:60 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:70 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:72 +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:96 +msgid "installation options" +msgstr "ПАРАМЕТРИ ВСТАНОВЛЕННЯ" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:50 +msgid "vgalo" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:49 +msgid "" +"<literal>vgalo</literal>: <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>if you " +"tried a default installation and did not see the graphical interface as " +"shown below in <xref linkend=\"drakxid-selectLanguage\"/>, you can try to " +"run the installation in low resolution mode. This happens with certain types " +"of graphics cards, so with <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> we " +"give you a number of options to work around problems with older hardware. " +"To try the installation in low resolution mode, type <userinput>vgalo</" +"userinput> at the prompt." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:61 +#, fuzzy +msgid "text" +msgstr "текст" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:60 +msgid "" +"<literal>text</literal>: <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>if your " +"video card is very old and graphical installation does not work at all, you " +"can always choose the text mode installation. Because all video cards can " +"display text, this is the <quote>installation of last resort</quote>. Don't " +"worry though – it's not likely that you'll need to use the text install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:71 +#, fuzzy +msgid "expert" +msgstr "Експерт" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:73 +#, fuzzy +msgid "linux" +msgstr "linux" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><screen> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:83 +#, no-wrap +msgid "boot: vgalo expert" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:70 +msgid "" +"<literal>expert</literal>: <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/" +"><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"1\"/>in some rare cases, your PC may " +"appear to freeze or lock-up during the hardware detection phase. If that " +"happens, then adding the word <literal>expert</literal> as a parameter will " +"tell the install program to bypass hardware detection. Because " +"<application>DrakX</application> will not scan for hardware, you will need " +"to manually specify hardware parameters later in the installation. The " +"<literal>expert</literal> parameter can be added to the previous modes, so " +"you may end up specifying <placeholder type=\"screen\" id=\"2\"/> to perform " +"a low resolution graphical install without <application>DrakX</application> " +"performing a hardware scan." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:88 +msgid "" +"Selecting the <literal>expert</literal> mode will ask you for more details " +"about the installation process, letting you perform a more customized " +"installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:97 +#, fuzzy +msgid "kernel options" +msgstr "Параметри ядра" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:104 en/uninstall-linux.xml:46 +#, fuzzy +msgid "commands" +msgstr "Команди" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:104 +msgid "mem= xxxM" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><screen> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:110 +#, no-wrap +msgid "boot: linux mem=256M" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:95 +msgid "" +"<literal>kernel options</literal>: <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/" +">Kernel options usually aren't required for most machines. There are a few " +"cases of motherboards incorrectly reporting the amount of memory installed " +"due to bugs in the design or in the BIOS. If you need to manually specify " +"the amount of DRAM installed in your PC, use the <placeholder type=" +"\"indexterm\" id=\"1\"/> <command>mem= xxxM</command> parameter. For " +"example, to start the installation in normal mode with a computer having 256 " +"<acronym>MB</acronym> of memory, your command line would look like this: " +"<placeholder type=\"screen\" id=\"2\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:114 +msgid "" +"Now that we've gone over what <emphasis>might</emphasis> go wrong, let's " +"move on to the actual installation process. When the installer starts, " +"you'll see a nice graphical interface ( <xref linkend=\"selectLanguage-fig\"/" +"> ). On the left will be the various installation steps. Depending on the " +"installation's progress level, some stages may or may not be available. If " +"a particular stage is available it will be highlighted when you move the " +"mouse pointer over it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:123 +msgid "" +"The colors of the buttons on the left side of the screen let you quickly see " +"what's going on with the installation:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:129 +msgid "red: this installation phase has not yet been carried out" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:133 +msgid "orange: the installation stage that is currently being processed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:137 +msgid "" +"green: this installation stage has already been configured. However, nothing " +"stops you from going back to a stage that has already been completed if you " +"need to reconfigure something." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:144 +msgid "" +"This guide assumes that you are performing a standard, step-by-step " +"installation, as described below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:152 +msgid "Choosing Your Language" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:155 en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:6 +msgid "The first step is to choose your preferred language." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:158 en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:9 +msgid "Choosing the Default Language" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:161 +msgid "" +" <imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-selectLanguage." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im2\" revision=\"1\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:167 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:187 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:18 en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:21 +msgid "language" +msgstr "Мова:" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:167 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> Your choice of preferred language " +"will affect the language of the documentation, the installer and the system " +"in general." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:171 +msgid "" +"Clicking on the <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button will allow you to " +"select other languages to be installed on your workstation, thereby " +"installing the language-specific files for system documentation and " +"applications. For example, if you will host users from Spain on your " +"machine, select English as the default language in the tree view and " +"<guilabel>Spanish|Spain</guilabel> in the Advanced section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:180 +msgid "" +"Note that you're not limited to choosing a single additional language. Once " +"you have selected additional locales, click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> " +"button to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><note><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:187 +#, fuzzy +msgid "setting" +msgstr "Параметр" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:186 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Not all languages listed here are " +"supported in the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> Web interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:195 +msgid "License Terms of the Distribution" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:199 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-license.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im3\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:204 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Before continuing, you should " +"carefully read the terms of the license. It covers the entire " +"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> distribution, and if you do not " +"agree with all the terms in it you should click on the <guibutton>Refuse </" +"guibutton> button. This will immediately terminate the installation. " +"Clicking on the <guibutton>Accept</guibutton> button will continue the " +"installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:217 +msgid "Disk Detection and Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:221 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-setupSCSI.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im4\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:227 +#, fuzzy +msgid "IDE" +msgstr "IDE" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:227 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:259 +msgid "detection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:229 +msgid "PCI SCSI" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:230 +#, fuzzy +msgid "SCSI" +msgstr "SCSI" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:226 +msgid "" +"<application>DrakX</application> will first detect any <placeholder type=" +"\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> IDE devices present in your computer. It will also " +"scan for one or more <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"1\"/><placeholder " +"type=\"indexterm\" id=\"2\"/> PCI SCSI cards on your system. If a SCSI card " +"is found, <application>DrakX</application> will automatically install the " +"appropriate driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:234 +msgid "" +"Because hardware detection is not foolproof, <application>DrakX</" +"application> will ask you if you have a PCI SCSI installed. Clicking " +"<guibutton>Yes</guibutton> will display a list of SCSI cards to choose from. " +"Click <guibutton>No</guibutton> if you know that you have no SCSI hardware " +"in your machine. If you're not sure, you can check the list of hardware " +"detected in your machine by selecting <guilabel>See hardware info </" +"guilabel> and clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Examine the list of " +"hardware and then click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to return to " +"the SCSI interface question." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:245 +msgid "" +"If you had to manually specify your PCI SCSI adapter, <application>DrakX</" +"application> will ask if you want to configure options for it. You should " +"allow <application>DrakX</application> to probe the hardware for the card-" +"specific options which are needed to initialize the adapter. Most of the " +"time, <application>DrakX</application> will get through this step without " +"any issues." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:252 +msgid "" +"If <application>DrakX</application> is not able to probe for the options to " +"automatically determine which parameters need to be passed to the hardware, " +"you'll need to manually configure the driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:258 +#, fuzzy +msgid "hard disk" +msgstr "Жорсткий диск" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:265 +msgid "Configuring your Mouse" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:270 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-selectMouse.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im5\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:275 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> Usually, <application>DrakX</" +"application> has no problems detecting the number of buttons on your mouse. " +"If it does, it assumes you have a two-button mouse and will configure it for " +"third-button emulation. The third-button mouse button of a two-button mouse " +"can be <quote>pressed </quote> by simultaneously clicking the left and right " +"mouse buttons. <application>DrakX</application> will automatically know " +"whether your mouse uses a <acronym>PS/2</acronym>, serial or <acronym>USB</" +"acronym> interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:285 +msgid "" +"If for some reason you wish to specify a different type of mouse, select it " +"from the provided list." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:288 +msgid "" +"If you choose a mouse other than the default, a test screen will be " +"displayed. Use the buttons and wheel to verify that the settings are correct " +"and that the mouse is working correctly. If the mouse is not working well, " +"press the space bar or <keycap> Return</keycap> key to <guibutton>Cancel</" +"guibutton> the test and to go back to the list of choices." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><note><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:298 +#, fuzzy +msgid "wheel" +msgstr "коліщатко" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:297 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Wheel mice are occasionally not " +"detected automatically, so you will need to select your mouse from a list. " +"Be sure to select the one corresponding to the port that your mouse is " +"attached to. After selecting a mouse and pressing the <guibutton>OK</" +"guibutton> button, a mouse image is displayed on-screen. Scroll the mouse " +"wheel to ensure that it is activated correctly. Once you see the on-screen " +"scroll wheel moving as you scroll your mouse wheel, test the buttons and " +"check that the mouse pointer moves on-screen as you move your mouse." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:313 +msgid "Configuring the Keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:318 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-selectKeyboard.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im6\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:323 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Depending on the default language " +"you chose in <xref linkend=\"drakxid-selectLanguage\"/>, <application>DrakX</" +"application> will automatically select a particular type of keyboard " +"configuration. However, you might not have a keyboard that corresponds " +"exactly to your language: for example, if you are an English speaking Swiss " +"person, you may have a Swiss keyboard. Or if you speak English but are " +"located in Québec, you may find yourself in the same situation where your " +"native language and keyboard do not match. In either case, this installation " +"step will allow you to select an appropriate keyboard from a list." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:336 +msgid "" +"Click on the <guibutton revision=\"1\">More</guibutton> button to be " +"presented with the complete list of supported keyboards." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:342 +msgid "Selecting the Mount Points" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:346 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-doPartitionDisks." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im7\" revision=\"1\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:352 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>At this point, you need to decide " +"where you want to install the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> " +"operating system on your hard drive. If your hard drive is empty or if an " +"existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to " +"partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard drive consists of " +"logically dividing it to create the space needed to install your new " +"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:361 +msgid "" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard drive is usually irreversible and " +"can lead to lost data if there is an existing operating system already " +"installed on the drive, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful if " +"you are an inexperienced user. Fortunately, <application>DrakX</application> " +"includes a wizard which simplifies this process. Before continuing with this " +"step, read through the rest of this section and above all, take your time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:372 +msgid "" +"If your hard drive has already been partitioned, either from a previous " +"installation of <application>GNU/Linux</application> or by another " +"partitioning tool, select the appropriate partitions that you want to " +"install your Linux system into." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:377 +msgid "" +"If partitions haven't been configured, you will need to create them using " +"the wizard. Depending on your hard drive configuration, several options are " +"available:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:381 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Use free space</guibutton>: this option will perform an automatic " +"partitioning of your blank drive(s). If you use this option there will be " +"no further prompts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:386 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Use existing partition</guibutton>: the wizard has detected one " +"or more existing Linux partitions on your hard drive. If you want to use " +"them, choose this option. You will then be asked to choose the mount points " +"associated with each of the partitions. The legacy mount points are selected " +"by default, and for the most part it's a good idea to keep them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:395 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Use the free space on the Windows partition</guibutton>: if " +"<application>Microsoft</application><superscript>®</superscript> " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application><superscript>©</superscript> is installed on your hard drive and " +"takes all the space available on it, you have to create free space for Linux " +"data. To do so, you can delete your <application>Microsoft</application> " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and " +"data (see <quote> Erase entire disk</quote> or <quote>Expert mode</quote> " +"solutions) or resize your <application>Microsoft</application> " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> FAT " +"partition. Resizing can be performed without the loss of any data, " +"<emphasis>provided you previously defragment the " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and " +"that it uses the FAT format. Backing up your data is strongly recommended.</" +"emphasis>. Using this option is recommended if you want to use both " +"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> and <application>Microsoft</" +"application> <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> " +"on the same computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:412 +msgid "" +"Before choosing this option, please understand that after this procedure, " +"the size of your <application>Microsoft</application> " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition " +"will be smaller then when you started. You will have less free space under " +"<application>Microsoft</application> <application>Windows<superscript>®</" +"superscript></application> to store your data or to install new software." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:420 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Erase entire disk</guibutton>: if you want to delete all data and " +"all partitions present on your hard drive and replace them with your new " +"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> system, choose this option. Be " +"careful, because you will not be able to undo your choice after you confirm." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:432 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Remove Windows</guibutton>: this will simply erase everything on " +"the drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch. " +"<emphasis>All</emphasis> data on your disk will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:443 +msgid "manual formatting" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:445 +#, fuzzy +msgid "partitioning" +msgstr "поділ диска" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:445 +msgid "DiskDrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:442 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" " +"id=\"1\"/> <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"2\"/> <guibutton>Custom disk " +"partitioning</guibutton>: choose this option if you want to manually " +"partition your hard drive. Be careful –– it is a powerful but dangerous " +"choice and you can very easily lose all your data. That's why this option is " +"really only recommended if you have done something like this before and have " +"some experience. For more instructions on how to use the " +"<application>DiskDrake</application> utility, refer to the <link xmlns:xlink=" +"\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" xlink:href=\"http://www.mandrakelinux.com/" +"en/doc/82/en/user.html/diskdrake.html\">online documentation for " +"<application>DiskDrake</application></link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:461 +msgid "Choose Partitions to Be Formatted" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:467 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-formatPartitions." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im8\" revision=\"1\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:472 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Any partitions that have been " +"newly defined must be formatted for use (formatting means creating a file " +"system)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:477 +msgid "" +"At this time, you may wish to reformat some already existing partitions to " +"erase any data they contain. If you wish to do that, please select those " +"partitions as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:481 +msgid "" +"Please note that it is not necessary to reformat all <placeholder type=" +"\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>pre-existing partitions. You must reformat the " +"partitions containing the operating system (such as <literal>/</literal>, " +"<literal>/usr</literal> or <literal>/var</literal>) but you do not have to " +"reformat partitions containing data that you wish to keep (typically " +"<literal>/home</literal>)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:490 +msgid "" +"Please be careful when selecting partitions. After formatting, all data on " +"the selected partitions will be deleted and you will not be able to recover " +"it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:494 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when you are ready to format partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:497 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> if you want to choose another " +"partition for your new <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> operating " +"system installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:501 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> if you wish to select partitions " +"that will be checked for <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>bad " +"blocks on the disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:508 +msgid "Actual Packages Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:511 +msgid "" +"Then comes the actual system installation. The packages list is predefined " +"and cannot be changed at this time. The time required to complete the " +"installation depends on the speed of your hardware. An estimate of the " +"remaining time-to-go will be displayed on-screen to help gauge if there is " +"sufficient time to enjoy a cup of coffee." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:520 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Root Password" +msgstr "Пароль користувача root" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:525 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-setRootPassword." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im9\" revision=\"1\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:533 en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:16 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:20 +msgid "password" +msgstr "Пароль:" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:530 +msgid "" +"This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your " +"<application>GNU/Linux</application> system: you have to enter the " +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" " +"id=\"1\"/> <literal>root</literal> password. <literal>Root</literal> is the " +"system administrator and is the only one authorized to make updates, add " +"users, change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, " +"<literal>root</literal> can do everything! That is why you must choose a " +"password that is difficult to guess – <application>DrakX</application> will " +"tell you if the password that you chose is too easy. As you can see, you are " +"not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise you against. " +"<application>GNU/Linux</application> is as prone to operator error as any " +"other operating system. Since <literal>root</literal> can overcome all " +"limitations and unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly " +"accessing the partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to " +"become <literal>root</literal>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:549 +msgid "" +"The <application>msec</application> security level is set to <literal>4</" +"literal> (<quote>high</quote>) by default. The password should be a mixture " +"of alphanumeric characters and must be at least 8 characters long. Never " +"write down the <literal>root</literal> password –– it makes it too easy to " +"compromise a system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:557 +msgid "" +"One caveat –– do not make the password too long or complicated because you " +"must be able to remember it!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:561 +msgid "" +"The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it in. To reduce " +"the chance of a blind typing error you will need to enter the password " +"twice. If you do happen to make the same typing error twice, this " +"<quote>incorrect</quote> password will have to be used the first time you " +"connect." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:569 +msgid "Administrator Password" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:572 +msgid "" +"You are then asked to enter the password for the system administrator " +"(login: <literal>admin</literal>). It is differentiated from the " +"<literal>root</literal> user, for security reasons, and also because it may " +"not be the same person. It is that <literal>admin</literal> account that " +"will be required to access the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> " +"Web interface. The criterion for choosing this password are the same as for " +"the <literal>root</literal> password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:583 +msgid "Adding a User" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:588 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-addUser.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im10\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:593 +msgid "" +"All necessary users have already been added, and you shouldn't need adding " +"more users for normal <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> " +"operations. However, if you plan to use the <application>squid</application> " +"<acronym>PAM</acronym> authentication feature, you can add here the users " +"that will be authorized." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:600 +msgid "" +"The first field asks you for a real name. Of course, this is not " +"mandatory –– you can actually enter whatever you like. <application>DrakX</" +"application> will use the first word you typed in and copy it to the " +"<guimenu>User name</guimenu> field, which is the name this user will enter " +"to log onto the system. If you like, you may override the default and change " +"the username. The next step is to enter a password. From a security point of " +"view, a non-privileged (regular) user password is not as crucial as the " +"<literal>root</literal> password, but that is no reason to neglect it by " +"making it blank or too simple: after all, <emphasis>your</emphasis> files " +"could be the ones at risk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:612 +msgid "" +"You can then choose to make that user member of one or more special groups " +"that will give him special priviledges. Check the button for the priviledges " +"you want for that user." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:617 +msgid "" +"Once you click on <guimenu>Accept user</guimenu>, you can add additional " +"users. Select <guimenu>Done</guimenu> when you have finished adding users." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:631 +msgid "Configure your Local Network" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:636 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-configureNetwork." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im11\" revision=\"1\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:641 +msgid "" +"You will now set up your local network connection (<acronym>LAN</acronym>). " +"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> will attempt to autodetect " +"network devices and modems. If this detection fails, uncheck the " +"<guilabel>Use auto detection</guilabel> box." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><warning><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:648 +msgid "" +"Even though many connection types are offered here, do not configure your " +"Internet connection now. You should now limit yourself to configuring the " +"<literal>Ethernet</literal> <acronym>LAN</acronym> access, so that you can " +"later connect to the administration interface and configure other " +"connections easily through it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:656 +msgid "" +"We will not detail each configuration option – just make sure that you have " +"all the parameters, such as IP address, default gateway, DNS servers, etc. " +"from your Internet Service Provider or system administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:662 +msgid "" +"You will be able to configure all your other network interfaces (Internet, " +"<acronym>DMZ</acronym>, etc.) later on through " +"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:671 +msgid "Where Should You Place the Bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:676 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-" +"setupBootloaderBeginner.png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im12\" " +"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:681 +msgid "" +"You must indicate where you wish to place the information the bootloader " +"requires to boot to <application>GNU/Linux</application>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:684 +msgid "" +"Unless you know exactly what you are doing, choose <guibutton>First sector " +"of drive (MBR)</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:687 +msgid "" +"You are then presented the different boot entries that will be proposed at " +"system boot. You can modify them here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:693 +msgid "Boot Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:698 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-createBootdisk.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im13\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:703 +msgid "" +"The <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> " +"has a built-in rescue mode. You can access it by booting the <acronym>CD-" +"ROM</acronym>, pressing the <userinput>F1</userinput> key at boot and typing " +"<userinput>rescue</userinput> at the prompt. If your computer cannot boot " +"from the <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>, there are at least two situations where " +"having a boot floppy is critical:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:712 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:805 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:17 +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:21 en/uninstall-linux.xml:42 +msgid "bootloader" +msgstr "Завантажувач" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:715 en/uninstall-linux.xml:52 +#, fuzzy +msgid "MBR" +msgstr "MBR" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:711 +msgid "" +"when installing the <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>bootloader, " +"<application>DrakX</application> will rewrite the boot sector (<placeholder " +"type=\"indexterm\" id=\"1\"/><acronym>MBR</acronym>) of your main disk " +"(unless you are using another boot manager), to allow you to start up with " +"either <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> or " +"<application>GNU/Linux</application> (assuming you have " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on your " +"system). If at some point you need to reinstall " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>, the " +"<application>Microsoft</application> install process will rewrite the boot " +"sector and remove your ability to start <application>GNU/Linux</application>!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:724 +msgid "" +"if a problem arises and you cannot start <application>GNU/Linux</" +"application> from the hard disk, this <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=" +"\"0\"/>floppy will be the only means of starting up <application>GNU/Linux</" +"application>. It contains a fair number of system tools for restoring a " +"system that has crashed due to a power failure, an unfortunate typing error, " +"a forgotten root password, or any other reason." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:732 +msgid "" +"If you say <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>, you will be asked to insert a disk in " +"the drive. The floppy disk must be blank or have non-critical data on it – " +"<application>DrakX</application> will format the floppy and will rewrite the " +"whole disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:740 +msgid "Installing Updates from the Internet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:744 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-installUpdates.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im14\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:749 +msgid "" +"At the time you are installing <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>, " +"it is likely that some packages have been updated since the initial " +"release. Bugs may have been fixed, security issues resolved. To allow you " +"to benefit from these updates, you are now able to download them from the " +"Internet. Choose <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> if you have a working Internet " +"connection, or <guibutton>No</guibutton> if you prefer to install updated " +"packages later." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:758 +msgid "" +"Choosing <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> displays a list of places from which " +"updates can be retrieved. Choose the one nearest you. A package-selection " +"tree will appear: review the selection, and press <guibutton>Install</" +"guibutton> to retrieve and install the selected package(s), or " +"<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:769 +msgid "It's Finished!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:774 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-exitInstall.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im15\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:779 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>There you are. Installation is now " +"complete and your <application>GNU/Linux</application> system is ready to " +"use. Carefully write down the <acronym>URL</acronym> given in that dialog, " +"it's the address you'll have to use in your Web browser to access the " +"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> Web interface with " +"<literal>admin</literal> account. Now, just click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> " +"twice to reboot the system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:792 en/uninstall-linux.xml:3 +msgid "How to Uninstall Linux" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:795 +msgid "The uninstallation process consists of two steps:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:800 +msgid "" +"Delete all partitions on your hard drive and replace them by a single " +"<acronym>FAT</acronym> partition with <application>DiskDrake</application>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:806 en/uninstall-linux.xml:7 +#, fuzzy +#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:11 en/uninstall-linux.xml:44 +msgid "uninstall" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Вилучити:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:805 +msgid "" +"Uninstall the <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> bootloader " +"(generally <application>GRUB</application>) from the Master Boot Record " +"(<acronym>MBR</acronym>). To do so, boot under <application>DOS</" +"application> and run the <command>fdisk /mbr</command> command." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:810 +msgid "" +"If you have another <acronym>OS</acronym>, please consult its documentation " +"to determine how to perform the same step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para> +#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:816 +msgid "" +"Goodbye, and thank you for using <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Format Disks with DiskDrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:10 +msgid "" +"At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the " +"installation of your <application>Mandriva Linux</application> system. If " +"partitions have already been defined, either from a previous installation of " +"<application>GNU/Linux</application> or by another partitioning tool, you " +"can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard drive partitions must be " +"defined." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:18 +msgid "" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard drive. You can select the " +"disk for partitioning by clicking on <quote>hda</quote> for the first IDE " +"drive, <quote>hdb</quote> for the second, <quote>sda</quote> for the first " +"<acronym>SCSI</acronym> drive and so on." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:24 +msgid "To partition the selected hard drive, you can use these options:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Clear all</guibutton>: this option deletes all partitions on the " +"selected hard drive" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:34 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Auto allocate</guibutton>: this option enables you to " +"automatically create <acronym>ext3</acronym> and swap partitions in the free " +"space of your hard drive" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:40 +msgid "<guibutton>More</guibutton>: gives access to additional features:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:45 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Save partition table</guibutton>: saves the partition table to a " +"floppy. Useful for later partition-table recovery if necessary. It is " +"strongly recommended that you perform this step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:52 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Restore partition table</guibutton>: allows you to restore a " +"previously saved partition table from a floppy disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:58 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Rescue partition table</guibutton>: if your partition table is " +"damaged, you can try to recover it using this option. Please be careful and " +"remember that it doesn't always work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:65 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Reload partition table</guibutton>: discards all changes and " +"reloads the partition table that was originally on the hard drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:71 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Removable media auto-mounting</guilabel>: unchecking this option " +"will force users to manually mount and unmount removable media such as " +"floppies and <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>s." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:77 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Wizard</guibutton>: use this option if you wish to use a wizard " +"to partition your hard drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good " +"understanding of partitioning." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:82 +msgid "<guibutton>Undo</guibutton>: use this option to cancel your changes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:85 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Toggle between normal/expert mode</guibutton>: allows additional " +"actions on partitions (type, options, format) and gives more information " +"about the hard drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:91 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Done</guibutton>: when you are finished partitioning your hard " +"drive, this will save your changes back to disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:99 +msgid "" +"When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition size " +"by using the <keysym>Arrow</keysym> keys of your keyboard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:104 +msgid "" +"Note: you can reach any option using the keyboard. Navigate through the " +"partitions using <keycap>Tab</keycap> and the <keycap>Up/Down</keycap> " +"arrows." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:109 +msgid "When a partition is selected, you can use:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:112 +msgid "" +"<keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>c</keysym></keycombo> to create a " +"new partition (when an empty partition is selected)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:117 +msgid "" +"<keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>d</keysym></keycombo> to delete a " +"partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:121 +msgid "" +"<keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>m</keysym></keycombo> to set the " +"mount point" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:127 +msgid "" +"To get information about the different file system types available, please " +"read the <acronym>ext2FS</acronym> chapter from the <citetitle>Reference " +"Manual</citetitle>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:133 +msgid "" +"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS " +"<quote>bootstrap</quote> partition of at least 1<acronym>MB</acronym> which " +"will be used by the <application>yaboot</application> bootloader. If you opt " +"to make the partition a bit larger, say 50<acronym>MB</acronym>, you may " +"find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for " +"emergency boot situations." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:12 +msgid "Deprecated - Choose FAT Partition to Be Resized" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:19 +#, fuzzy +msgid "resize" +msgstr "зміна_розмірів" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> More than one " +"<application>Microsoft</application> partition has been detected on your " +"hard drive. Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to " +"install your new <application>Mageia</application> operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\", " +"\"Capacity\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:28 +msgid "" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard drive type\", \"hard drive number\", " +"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda1\")." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:32 +msgid "\"Hard drive type\" is \"sd\"" +msgstr "" + +#. (mentioning SCSI doesn't seem needed anymore - Marja) if it is a <acronym>SCSI</acronym> hard drive. +#. I rewrote it and added it back - MrsB +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:35 +msgid "" +"This is standard for hard drives now and has nothing to do with SD Memory " +"Cards. Hard drives were previously prefixed \"hd\" for IDE drives or \"sd\" " +"for SATA drives but they are all now prefixed with \"sd\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:40 +msgid "\"Hard drive number\" is actually a letter and always follows \"sd\":" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:43 +msgid "\"a\" means \"first hard drive\";" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:48 +msgid "\"b\" means \"second hard drive\";" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:53 +msgid "and so on..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:57 +msgid "" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard drive under " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> (the first " +"disk or partition is called \"C:\")." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Installation Class" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:6 +msgid "" +"This step is shown only if an existing <application>GNU/Linux</application> " +"partition is found on your machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-selectInstallClass.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-im1\" revision=" +"\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:16 +#, fuzzy +msgid "class" +msgstr "клас" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><application>DrakX</application> " +"now needs to know if you want to install from scratch or upgrade your " +"existing <application>Mageia</application> system:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:27 +#, fuzzy +msgid "upgrade" +msgstr "Оновити" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Upgrade</guilabel>.<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>If " +"you have an older <application>Mageia</application> operating system, this " +"option allows you to upgrade it. Your existing partitioning scheme and user " +"data won't be altered. Most of the other configuration steps remain " +"available and are similar to a standard installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Removed - simon, grenoya and marja think it is not needed: - For the most part, this +#. completely wipes out the old system. However, depending on your +#. partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of your existing data +#. (particularly <literal> +#. /home</literal> directories) from being +#. overwritten. If you wish to change how your hard drives are +#. partitioned, or to change the file system, you should use this +#. option. +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Install</guilabel>. Use this option for everything except " +"upgrading an existing Mageia installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Configuring the Keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:7 +msgid "" +"DrakX shows one or more keyboards, depending on which language(s) you have " +"chosen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-selectKeyboard.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=" +"\"1\"/>Depending on the language you chose (see <xref linkend=\"drakxid-" +"selectLanguage\"/>), <application>DrakX</application> automatically selects " +"a particular type of keyboard configuration. Verify that the selection suits " +"you or choose another keyboard layout. If you don't know which layout your " +"keyboard has, look in the specifications that came with your system, or ask " +"the computer vendor. You can also look here: <link xmlns:xlink=\"http://www." +"w3.org/1999/xlink\" xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout" +"\">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:24 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton revision=" +"\"1\">More</guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there. " +"Note that after having chosen your keyboard, you will return to the first " +"screen and it'll seem that a keyboard from this first screen was chosen. You " +"can safely ignore this and go on, the keyboard you chose from the full list " +"will now be configured!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:26 +msgid "" +"If you choose a keyboard layout based on a non-Latin alphabet, the next " +"dialog will allow you to choose the key binding which will switch the " +"keyboard between the Latin and non-Latin layouts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Additional information: You may have a keyboard which does not correspond " +"exactly to your language: for example, if you are an English-speaking Swiss " +"native, you may have a Swiss keyboard. Or if you speak English and are " +"located in Québec, you may find yourself in the same situation where your " +"native language and country-set keyboard don't match. In either case, this " +"installation step will allow you to select an appropriate keyboard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Choosing your Language" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-selectLanguage.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-im1\" revision=\"4\" " +"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>First open the tree relative to " +"the continent you are located in, and then choose the language you speak. " +"Your language choice will affect the installer, the documentation, and the " +"system in general." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Click the <guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> button near the botom of " +"the list to go to the screen to select additional languages for your " +"workstation, thereby installing the language-specific files for system " +"documentation and applications. For example, if Spanish friends are to use " +"your machine, select English as the default language in the first screen and " +"<guilabel>Español</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> " +"screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:33 +msgid "" +"You are advised to install the language of your keyboard and the language of " +"the country you live in as additional languages if they are not the same as " +"your preferred language." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:37 +msgid "" +"About <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> (unicode) support: Unicode is a character " +"encoding intended to cover all existing languages. <application>Mageia " +"Linux</application> uses <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> by default for all " +"languages" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:45 +msgid "" +"If you know UTF-8 encoding doesn't work well for your language, tick the box " +"<guilabel>Old compatibility (non-UTF) encoding</guilabel> at the top of the " +"<guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:48 +msgid "Be aware that this will then apply to all languages on your system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:53 +msgid "" +"Note that you're not limited to choosing a single additional language. You " +"may choose several, or even install them all by selecting the <guilabel>All " +"languages</guilabel> box. Selecting support for a language means " +"translations, fonts, spell checkers, etc. will also be installed for that " +"language. Make sure you select all languages which are likely to be useful " +"on the machine now, it may be difficult to configure support for languages " +"not chosen at install time at a later date." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:66 +msgid "" +"To switch between the various languages installed on your system, you can " +"launch the <command>localedrake</command> command as <literal>root</literal> " +"to change the language used by the entire system. Running the command as a " +"regular user will only change the language settings for that particular user." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:3 en/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Configuring your Mouse" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-selectMouse.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-selectMouse-im1\" revision=\"1\" width=" +"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:12 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Usually, <application>DrakX</" +"application> has no problems detecting the number of buttons on your mouse. " +"If it fails to properly recognize it, it assumes you have a two-button mouse " +"and will configure it for third-button emulation. The third-button mouse " +"button of a two-button mouse can be obtained by simultaneously clicking the " +"left and right mouse buttons. <application>DrakX</application> will " +"automatically know whether your mouse uses a <acronym>PS/2</acronym>, serial " +"or <acronym>USB</acronym> interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:22 +msgid "" +"If you have a 3-button mouse without a wheel, you can choose a " +"<guilabel>with Wheel emulation</guilabel> mouse. <application>DrakX</" +"application> will then configure your mouse so that you can simulate the " +"wheel with it: to do so, press the middle button and move your mouse pointer " +"up and down." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:29 +msgid "" +"If for some reason you wish to specify a different type of mouse, select it " +"from the list provided." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:34 +msgid "" +"You can select the <guilabel>Universal | Any PS/2 & USB mice</guilabel> " +"entry to choose a <quote>generic</quote> mouse type which will work with " +"nearly all mice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:40 +msgid "" +"If you choose a mouse other than the default one, a test screen will be " +"displayed. Use the buttons and wheel to verify that the settings are correct " +"and that the mouse is working correctly. If the mouse isn't working well, " +"press the <keycap>space</keycap> bar or <keycap>Enter</keycap> key to cancel " +"the test and you will be returned to the mouse list." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:49 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Wheel" +msgstr "Коліщатко" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:53 +msgid "" +"Occasionally wheel mice are not detected automatically, so you will need to " +"select your mouse from a list. Be sure to select the one corresponding to " +"the port that your mouse is attached to. After selecting a mouse and " +"pressing the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, a mouse image will be " +"displayed on-screen. Scroll the mouse wheel to ensure that it is correctly " +"activated. As you scroll your mouse wheel, you will see the on-screen scroll " +"wheel moving. Test the buttons and check that the mouse pointer moves on-" +"screen as you move your mouse about." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml:10 +msgid "" +"Please select the correct port. For example, the <literal>COM1</literal> " +"port under <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> is " +"named <literal>ttyS0</literal> under <application>GNU/Linux</application>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Manage system services by enabling or disabling them" +msgstr "Налаштування сервісів системи" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:3 +msgid "drakxservices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata width=\"80%\" xml:id=\"drakxservices-im1\" revision=" +"\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakxservices.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata width=\"80%\" xml:id=\"drakxservices-im1\" revision=" +"\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakxservices.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakxservices</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakxservices</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Root Password" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:8 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx-setRootPassword.png\" " +"width=\"11.5cm\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-" +"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx-setRootPassword.png\" " +"width=\"11.5cm\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-" +"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:25 +msgid "" +"This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your " +"<application>GNU/Linux</application> system: you must enter the " +"<literal>root</literal> password. <literal>Root</literal> is the system " +"administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add users, " +"change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, <literal>root</" +"literal> can do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is " +"difficult to guess: <application>DrakX</application> will tell you if the " +"password you chose is too simple. You're not forced to enter a password, but " +"we <emphasis>strongly</emphasis> encourage you to do so. <application>GNU/" +"Linux</application> is just as prone to operator error as any other " +"operating system. Since <literal>root</literal> can overcome all limitations " +"and unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the " +"partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become " +"<literal>root</literal>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:41 +msgid "" +"The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least 8 " +"characters long. Never write down <literal>root</literal>'s password — it " +"makes it far too easy to compromise your system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:46 +msgid "" +"One caveat: don't make the password too long or too complicated because you " +"must be able to remember it!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:50 +msgid "" +"The password won't be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce the " +"chance of a blind typing error you will need to enter the password twice. If " +"you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you will have to use this " +"<quote>incorrect</quote> password when you try to connect as <literal>root</" +"literal>, at least for the first time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:57 +msgid "" +"You can change the way users are authenticated on your computer by clicking " +"on the <guibutton>Authentication method</guibutton> button. The following " +"authentication methods are available:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:64 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Local file</guilabel>. Use a local file for all authentication and " +"user information. This is the default method." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:71 en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:75 +#, fuzzy +msgid "LDAP" +msgstr "LDAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:73 en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:86 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:103 +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:107 +msgid "authentication" +msgstr "Розпізнавання" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:70 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=" +"\"1\"/><guilabel>LDAP</guilabel>. Use an <acronym>LDAP</acronym> server for " +"some or all authentication needs. An <acronym>LDAP</acronym> directory " +"consolidates certain types of information within your organization." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:84 en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:88 +#, fuzzy +msgid "NIS" +msgstr "NIS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:83 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=" +"\"1\"/><guilabel>NIS</guilabel>. Authenticates users against a <acronym>NIS</" +"acronym> domain. This allows you to run a group of computers in the same " +"<acronym>NIS</acronym> domain using a common password and group file." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Smart Card</guilabel>. Uses <application>SmartCard</application> " +"hardware for providing authentication services." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:105 +msgid "PDC" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:109 +msgid "Active Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:102 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=" +"\"1\"/><guilabel>Windows Domain</guilabel>. Uses a " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> domain " +"controller to provide authentication services through <application>Active " +"Directory</application>, <application>Microsoft</application>'s " +"implementation of <acronym>LDAP</acronym>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:119 +msgid "" +"If you select a method other than <guilabel>Local file</guilabel>, you will " +"be asked to provide some parameters, which vary from one method to the " +"other. If you don't know those parameters, you should ask your network " +"administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:125 +msgid "" +"If you happen to have problems remembering passwords, or if your computer " +"will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely trust everybody " +"who uses your computer, you can choose to have <guibutton>No password</" +"guibutton>. Please bear in mind that this is an insecure option, and it is " +"not recommended." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Installing a Bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-setupBootloader.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-im1\" revision=" +"\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:18 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:25 +msgid "LILO" +msgstr "LILO" + +#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:22 +#, fuzzy +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:28 +msgid "GRUB" +msgstr "GRUB" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:31 +msgid "" +"A bootloader is a small program which is started by the computer at boot " +"time. It's responsible for starting up the whole system. Normally, the " +"bootloader installation is totally automated. <application>DrakX</" +"application> will analyze the disk boot sector and act according to what it " +"finds there:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:40 +msgid "" +"If a <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> boot " +"sector is found, it will replace it with a <application>GRUB</application>/" +"<application>LILO</application> boot sector. This way you will be able to " +"load either <application>GNU/Linux</application> or any other <acronym>OS</" +"acronym> installed on your machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:49 +msgid "" +"In any other case it will ask you where it should place the boot loader. " +"Generally, the <guilabel>First sector of the drive (MBR)</guilabel> is the " +"safest place." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:56 +msgid "" +"Choosing <guilabel>Skip</guilabel> won't install a bootloader. Use this " +"option only if you know what you're doing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:3 +msgid "Hard Disk Detection and Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<application>DrakX</application> will first attempt to detect any " +"<acronym>IDE</acronym> and <acronym>SATA</acronym> devices present in your " +"computer. It will also scan for one or more <acronym>PCI</acronym> " +"<acronym>SCSI</acronym> cards. If a <acronym>SCSI</acronym> card is found, " +"<application>DrakX</application> will attempt to install the correct driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:14 +msgid "" +"However, because hardware detection is not foolproof, <application>DrakX</" +"application> may fail to detect your <acronym>SCSI</acronym> hard drives. If " +"so, you mayl need to specify your hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:19 +msgid "" +"If you have had to specify your <acronym>PCI</acronym> <acronym>SCSI</" +"acronym> adapter(s), <application>DrakX</application> will ask if you want " +"to pass configuration options to it. Allow <application>DrakX</application> " +"to probe the hardware to determine any card-specific options needed to " +"initialize the adapter." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<application>DrakX</application> will usually complete this step without " +"issues." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:29 +msgid "" +"If <application>DrakX</application> cannot automatically determine the " +"parameters to be passed to the hardware, you'll need to manually configure " +"the driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:34 +msgid "" +"How you determine these parameters is beyond the scope of this help screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Configuring X, the Graphical Server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:8 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-configureX.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-setupX-im3\" revision=\"2\" width=\"11.5cm" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:13 +#, fuzzy +msgid "X Window System" +msgstr "Система X Window" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><application>X</application> (for " +"X Window System) is the heart of the <application>GNU/Linux</application> " +"graphical interface on which all the graphical environments " +"(<application>KDE</application>, <application>GNOME</application>, " +"<application>AfterStep</application>, <application>WindowMaker</" +"application>, etc.) bundled with <application>Mageia</application> rely on." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You will see a list of different parameters which you can change in order to " +"optimize your graphical display." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:27 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Graphic Card" +msgstr "Графічна карта" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If everything works fine, the installer should detect and configure the " +"video card installed on your machine. If the detection or configuration is " +"incorrect, you can choose the card installed on your system from a list." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:44 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Monitor" +msgstr "Монітор" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:46 +msgid "" +"If the installer fails to detect or configure your monitor properly, you can " +"choose from this list the monitor which is connected to your computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:53 +msgid "Resolution" +msgstr "Роздільна здатність" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:55 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose the resolutions and color depths available for your " +"graphics hardware. Choose the one which best suits your needs (you will be " +"able to make changes after the installation). A sample of the chosen " +"configuration will be shown in the monitor picture." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:64 +msgid "Test" +msgstr "Перевірити" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><note><para> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:68 +msgid "Depending on your hardware, this entry might not appear." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:73 +msgid "" +"The system will try to open a graphical screen at the desired resolution. If " +"you see the test message during the test and answer <guimenu>Yes</guimenu>, " +"then <application>DrakX</application> will proceed to the next step. If you " +"don't see it, it means that some part of the auto-detected configuration was " +"incorrect and the test will automatically end after a few seconds and return " +"you to the menu. Change settings until you get a correct graphical display." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><bridgehead> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:85 en/harddrake2.xml:66 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "Параметри" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:88 +msgid "" +"This step allows you to choose whether you want your machine to " +"automatically switch to a graphical interface at boot. Obviously, you may " +"want to select the <guilabel>No</guilabel> option if your machine is to act " +"as a server, or if you were not successful in getting the display configured." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Choose drive to install Linux on" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml:10 +msgid "" +"Choose the hard drive you want to erase in order to install your new " +"<application>Mageia</application> partition. Be careful, all data on this " +"drive will be lost and will not be recoverable!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml:3 +msgid "Deprecated - Confirm data deletion" +msgstr "" + +#. The arrows aren't on the button anymore -marja -> +#. -> +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml:10 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you want to delete all data and " +"partitions present on this hard drive. Be careful, after clicking on " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> you will not be able to recover any data and " +"partitions present on this hard drive, including any " +"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> data." +msgstr "" + +#. <- +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> to quit this operation without " +"losing data and partitions present on this hard drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:10 +msgid "Hardware configuration" +msgstr "Налаштування обладнання" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:12 +msgid "harddrake2" +msgstr "harddrake2" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"harddrake2.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"harddrake2-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"harddrake2.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"harddrake2-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">harddrake2</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">harddrake2</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives a general view of " +"the hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job " +"to look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command " +"<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in <code>ldetect-" +"lst</code> package." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цієї програми<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> ви " +"зможете здійснити загальний огляд обладнання вашого комп’ютера. Після " +"запуску програма виконує автоматичний пошук всіх компонентів обладнання. З " +"цією метою вона використовує програму <code>ldetect</code>, яка у своїй " +"роботі покладається на список обладнання з пакунка <code>ldetect-lst</code>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:31 +msgid "The window" +msgstr "Вікно програми" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:33 +msgid "The window is divided in two columns." +msgstr "Вікно поділено на два стовпчики." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:35 +msgid "" +"The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are " +"grouped by categories. Click on the > to expand the content of a " +"category. Each device can be selected in this column." +msgstr "" +"У лівому стовпчику буде показано список виявленого обладнання. Пристрої буде " +"згруповано за категоріями. Натисніть кнопочку >, щоб розгорнути список " +"категорії. За допомогою цього стовпчика можна вибирати пристрій зі списку." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The right column displays information about the selected device. The " +"<guimenu>Help -> Fields description</guimenu> gives some information " +"about the content of the fields." +msgstr "" +"У правому стовпчику буде показано дані щодо позначеного пристрою. За " +"допомогою пункту меню <guimenu>Довідка -> Опис полів</guimenu> можна " +"отримати докладніший опис показаних полів." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:43 +msgid "" +"According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are " +"available at the bottom of the right column:" +msgstr "" +"Відповідно до вибраного типу пристрою, у нижній частині правої панелі вікна " +"буде показано одну або дві кнопки:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to " +"parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must " +"used by experts only." +msgstr "" +"<guibutton>Встановити параметри поточного драйвера</guibutton>: за допомогою " +"цієї кнопки можна змінити параметри роботи модуля системи, пов’язаного з " +"роботою пристрою. Цією кнопкою варто користуватися лише досвідченим " +"користувачам." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:54 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can " +"configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC." +msgstr "" +"<guibutton>Запустити інструмент налаштування</guibutton>: отримати доступ до " +"засобу налаштовування пристрою. Зазвичай, доступ до цього засобу можна " +"отримати безпосередньо з Центру керування Mageia." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:68 +msgid "" +"The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to " +"enable automatic detection:" +msgstr "" +"За допомогою пунктів меню <guimenu>Параметри</guimenu> ви можете увімкнути " +"автоматичне виявлення деяких типів пристроїв:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:73 +msgid "modem" +msgstr "модемів" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:77 +msgid "Jaz devices" +msgstr "пристроїв Jaz" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:81 +msgid "Zip parallel devices" +msgstr "паралельних пристроїв Zip" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:83 +msgid "" +"By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check " +"the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will " +"be operational the next time this tool is started." +msgstr "" +"Типово, таке виявлення не виконується, оскільки воно є доволі тривалим. " +"Позначте відповідні пункти, якщо на вашому комп’ютері встановлено відповідне " +"обладнання. Виявлення буде виконано під час наступного запуску програми." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "Налаштовування розкладки клавіатури" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:7 +msgid "keyboarddrake" +msgstr "keyboarddrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"keyboarddrake.png\" xml:id=\"keyboarddrake-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"keyboarddrake.png\" xml:id=\"keyboarddrake-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">keyboarddrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:19 +msgid "" +"The keyboarddrake tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> helps you " +"configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on Mageia. " +"It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can be found " +"in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled " +"\"Configure mouse and keyboard\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:29 +msgid "Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "Розкладка клавіатури" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed " +"in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each " +"layout should be used for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:37 +msgid "Keyboard Type" +msgstr "Тип клавіатури" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:39 +msgid "" +"This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are " +"unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/localedrake.xml:10 +msgid "Manage localization for your system" +msgstr "Налаштовування локалізації системи" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/localedrake.xml:13 +msgid "localedrake" +msgstr "localedrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/localedrake.xml:17 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"localedrake.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"localedrake-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"localedrake.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"localedrake-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">localedrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна також за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести " +"команду <emphasis role=\"bold\">localedrake</emphasis> від імені " +"адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can be found in the " +"System section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled \"Manage " +"localization for your system\". It opens with a window in which you can " +"choose your language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during " +"installation." +msgstr "" +"Цим модулем<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> можна скористатися за " +"допомогою розділу «Система» Центру керування Mageia. Пункт модуля підписано " +"«Налаштувати локалізацію системи». У разі його вибору буде відкрито вікно, " +"за допомогою якого ви можете вибрати мову. Типовий список буде підібрано за " +"мовами, які було вибрано під час встановлення системи." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate " +"compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8)." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна задіяти режим " +"сумісності з застарілими кодуваннями (не-UTF8)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:34 +msgid "" +"The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected " +"language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to " +"countries not listed." +msgstr "" +"У другому вікні буде показано список країн, у яких може використовуватися " +"вказана мова. Доступ до пунктів країн, яких немає у списку, можна отримати " +"за допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Інші країни</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:38 +msgid "You have to restart your session after any modifications." +msgstr "" +"Щоб внесені вами зміни набули чинності, вам слід вийти з вашого облікового " +"запису у системі і знову увійти до нього." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/localedrake.xml:42 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "Метод вводу" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:44 +msgid "" +"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an " +"input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input " +"methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, " +"Korean, etc)." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою сторінки <guilabel>Інші країни</guilabel> ви також можете " +"вибрати метод вводу або спосіб введення (зі спадного меню під списком). За " +"допомогою способів введення можна вводити символи мов, у яких запис " +"здійснюється не за допомогою літер (китайської, японської, корейської тощо)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:48 +msgid "" +"For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so " +"users should not need to configure it manually." +msgstr "" +"Для азійських і африканських мов типовим способом введення буде вибрано " +"IBus, отже потреби у налаштовуванні цього способу введення вручну немає." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions " +"and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another " +"part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>." +msgstr "" +"Інші способи введення (SCIM, GCIN, HIME тощо) також надають подібні " +"функціональні можливості. Встановити пакунки цих способів, якщо їх немає у " +"контекстному меню, можна за допомогою іншого модуля Центру керування Mageia. " +"Див. <xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:3 +msgid "View and search system logs" +msgstr "Перегляд системного журналу" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/logdrake.xml:5 +msgid "logdrake" +msgstr "logdrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/logdrake.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"logdrake-" +"im1\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"logdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"logdrake-" +"im1\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"logdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">logdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">logdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center System tab, labelled \"<guilabel>View and search system logs</" +"guilabel>\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:22 +msgid "To do a search in the logs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to <emphasis>do " +"not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s) to search in " +"the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is possible to " +"limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the month " +"and year, and check \"<guibutton>Show only for the selected day</guibutton>" +"\". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button to see the " +"results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the file</guilabel>. It is " +"possible to save the results in the .txt format by clicking on the <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Save</emphasis> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:36 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia " +"configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools. These logs are " +"updated each time a configuration is modified." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:43 +msgid "To configure a mail alert" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and " +"the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured " +"address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:49 +msgid "" +"To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Mail Alert</" +"emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> Configure " +"the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the running " +"services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to look watch. " +"(See screenshot above)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:55 +msgid "The following services can be watched :" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:59 +msgid "Webmin Service" +msgstr "Служба Webmin" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:63 +msgid "Postfix Mail Server" +msgstr "Поштовий сервер postfix" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:67 +msgid "FTP Server" +msgstr "Сервер FTP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:71 +msgid "Apache World Wide Web Server" +msgstr "Сервер World Wide Web Apache" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:75 +msgid "SSH Server" +msgstr "Сервер SSH" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:79 +msgid "Samba Server" +msgstr "Сервер Samba" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:83 +msgid "Xinetd Service" +msgstr "Служба xinetd" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:87 +msgid "BIND Domain Name Resolve" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject> +#: en/logdrake.xml:90 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"logdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"logdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider " +"unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows " +"the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone " +"out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value " +"to 3 times the number of processors." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:103 +msgid "" +"In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the " +"person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local " +"or on the Internet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:5 +msgid "Mageia Test Document" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:8 +msgid "Testing testing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:9 +msgid "" +"This is a <application>Mageia</application> test document. This is an " +"absolute minimal format XML document. As you can see: It's not very " +"complex..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note> +#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:11 +msgid "" +"I nicked the container from an old <application>Mandriva</application> XML " +"document and have been using it to play with XML rather than alter any of " +"the main documentation files. <note userlevel=\"beginner\">" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:15 +msgid "This is an interesting note with a revision tag.." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:18 +msgid "This is the first item in a list" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:19 +msgid "This is the second item" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:3 +msgid "Software Packages Update" +msgstr "Поновлення пакунків з програмами" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:5 +msgid "MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"MageiaUpdate-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"MageiaUpdate.png\" format=\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"MageiaUpdate-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"MageiaUpdate.png\" format=\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:14 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-update</" +"emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> або <emphasis role=\"bold\">" +"drakrpm-update</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management.</" +"emphasis>¶" +msgstr "" +"Доступ до цієї програми<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> можна " +"отримати з Центру керування Mageia, сторінка " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Менеджер програм</emphasis><placeholder type=" +"\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:18 +msgid "" +"To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with rpmdrake-" +"edit-media with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you are " +"prompted to do so." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:23 +msgid "" +"As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists " +"those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by " +"default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the " +"<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:28 +msgid "" +"By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of " +"the window. The print<emphasis role=\"bold\"> ></emphasis> before a title " +"means you can click to drop down a text." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><inlinemediaobject> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:35 en/mgaapplet-config.xml:20 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"MageiaUpdate1.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"MageiaUpdate1.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:33 +msgid "" +"When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by " +"displaying this red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/" +"> . Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:5 +msgid "Boot" +msgstr "Завантаження" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-boot.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-boot-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-boot.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-boot-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:16 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot " +"steps. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:19 +msgid "Configure boot steps" +msgstr "Налаштовування послідовності завантаження" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakboot--boot\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakboot--boot\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:4 +msgid "Hardware" +msgstr "Обладнання" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:8 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-hardware.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-hardware-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-hardware.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-hardware-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:15 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your " +"hardware. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:20 +msgid "Manage your hardware" +msgstr "Налаштовування обладнання" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"harddrake2\"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure hardware</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<xref linkend=\"harddrake2\"/><emphasis>Переглянути і налаштувати обладнання<" +"/emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:27 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:34 +msgid "Configure graphics" +msgstr "Налаштовування графіки" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:36 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"drak3d\"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "Налаштувати ефекти 3D-стільниці" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:41 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:48 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Configure mouse and keyboard" +msgstr "Налаштувати мишу і клавіатуру" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:50 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:54 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"mousedrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:61 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Configure printing and scanning" +msgstr "Налаштувати друк і сканування" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:63 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"system-config-printer\"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), " +"the print job queues, ...</emphasis>" +msgstr "Налаштувати друкарки, черги друку, …" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:68 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"scannerdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:75 en/mcc-network.xml:58 +msgid "Others" +msgstr "Інше" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:77 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakups\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:3 +msgid "About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:6 +msgid "" +"The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options to choose from " +"in the left column. Each of these options gives a different set of tools " +"that can be selected in the big right panel." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:8 +msgid "" +"The eight following chapters are about those eight options and the related " +"tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:10 +msgid "" +"The titles of those pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool " +"screens." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:12 +msgid "" +"There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on " +"the \"Search\" tab in the left column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:6 en/mcc-localdisks.xml:17 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Local disks" +msgstr "Локальні диски" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mcc-localdisks-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"mcc-localdisks.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mcc-localdisks-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"mcc-localdisks.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:15 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your " +"local disks. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:18 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakdisk\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--removable\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:20 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--fileshare\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:4 en/mcc-networkservices.xml:17 +msgid "Network Services" +msgstr "Мережеві служби" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:8 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-networkservices.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-networkservices-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-networkservices.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-networkservices-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if " +"the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose " +"between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or " +"on <xref linkend=\"mcc-sharing\"/>to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:27 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:31 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:35 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:4 +msgid "Network Sharing" +msgstr "Спільний доступ" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:8 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mcc-networksharing-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"mcc-networksharing.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mcc-networksharing-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"mcc-networksharing.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:13 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and " +"directories. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:17 +msgid "Configure Windows(R) shares" +msgstr "Налаштовування доступу до ресурсів Windows" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:18 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--smb\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:19 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"draksambashare\"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and " +"directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "Налаштувати доступ до дисків і тек Windows (SMB)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:22 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Configure NFS shares" +msgstr "Налаштувати доступ по ресурсів NFS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--nfs\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:24 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknfs\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:27 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Configure WebDAV shares" +msgstr "Налаштувати доступ до WebDAV" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:28 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--dav\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:3 +msgid "Network and Internet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" " +"fileref=\"mcc-network.png\" xml:id=\"mcc-network-im1\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" " +"fileref=\"mcc-network.png\" xml:id=\"mcc-network-im1\" /> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:12 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link " +"below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:18 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Manage your network devices" +msgstr "Налаштувати мережеві пристрої" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect--del\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:36 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Personalize and Secure your network" +msgstr "Налаштувати особисті установки і безпеку мережі" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:39 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakproxy\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:43 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakgw\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:47 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetprofile\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:51 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakvpn\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:61 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:5 en/mcc-security.xml:18 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "Безпека" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-security.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-security-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:16 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a " +"link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:20 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"msecgui\"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, " +"permissions and audit</emphasis>" +msgstr "Налаштувати політику безпеки системи, права доступу і перевірку" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfirewall\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:33 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakinvictus\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:37 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakguard\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:4 en/mcc-sharing.xml:17 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Sharing" +msgstr "Спільне користування" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:8 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-sharing.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-sharing-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-sharing.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-sharing-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only " +"visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can " +"choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link " +"below or on <xref linkend=\"mcc-networkservices\"/>to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_proftpd\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_apache2\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:4 +#, fuzzy +msgid "System" +msgstr "Система" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:8 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"mcc-system.png\" xml:id=\"mcc-system-" +"im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"mcc-system.png\" xml:id=\"mcc-system-" +"im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:13 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several system and administration " +"tools. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:18 +msgid "Manage system services" +msgstr "Керування системними службами" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:20 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakauth\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:24 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakxservices\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:28 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfont\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:35 +msgid "Localization" +msgstr "Локалізація" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:37 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakclock\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:41 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"localedrake\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:48 +msgid "Administration tools" +msgstr "Інструменти адміністрування" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:50 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"logdrake\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:54 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconsole\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:58 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"userdrake\"></xref><emphasis> = Manage users on system</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "Керувати користувачами системи" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:62 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"transfugdrake\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:66 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksnapshot-config\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/MCC.xml:4 +msgid "Mageia Control Center" +msgstr "Центр керування Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC.xml:6 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" +"Текст та знімки вікон у цьому підручнику надаються вам відповідно до умов " +"ліцензування CC BY-SA 3.0, <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/" +"licenses/by-sa/3.0/\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>ю" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC.xml:9 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" +"Цей підручник було створено за допомогою <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco." +"com\">Calenco CMS</link>, розробленої компанією <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC.xml:11 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" +"Підручник було написано охочими до цього користувачами у вільний від " +"основної роботи час. Будь ласка, зверніться до <link ns6:href=\"https://wiki." +"mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">команди документування</link>, якщо " +"хочете допомогти у покращенні цього підручника." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "Configure updates frequency" +msgstr "Налаштувати частоту оновлення" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:5 +msgid "mgaapplet-config" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"mgaapplet-" +"config-im1\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"mgaapplet-config.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management</" +"emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / Updates " +"configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject" +"\" id=\"1\"/> in the system tray." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for " +"updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check. The " +"check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is out." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the pointer device (mouse, touchpad)" +msgstr "Налаштовування пристрою введення (миша, сенсорна панель)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:6 +msgid "mousedrake" +msgstr "mousedrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mousedrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref=" +"\"mousedrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mousedrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref=" +"\"mousedrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">mousedrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">mousedrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by " +"Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:23 +msgid "" +"The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse " +"and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time \"Universal / Any " +"PS/2 & USB mice\"' is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is " +"immediately taken into account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:3 +#, fuzzy +msgid "MSEC: System Security and Audit" +msgstr "MSEC: Контроль безпеки системи" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/msecgui.xml:3 +msgid "msecgui" +msgstr "msecgui" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/msecgui.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"msecgui-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center" +"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"msecgui.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"msecgui-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center" +"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"msecgui.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">msecgui</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">msecgui</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:3 +msgid "Software Management (Install and Remove Software)" +msgstr "" +"Керування програмним забезпеченням (Встановлення або вилучення програм)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:6 +msgid "rpmdrake" +msgstr "rpmdrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"rpmdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref=" +"\"rpmdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"rpmdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref=" +"\"rpmdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:18 +msgid "Introduction to rpmdrake" +msgstr "Вступ до rpmdrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">rpmdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>, also known as drakrpm, " +"is a program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the " +"graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online " +"package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official " +"servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages " +"available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only " +"certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by " +"default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed " +"packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries " +"of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names " +"included in the packages." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цього інструмента<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>, " +"також відомого за назвою drakrpm, можна " +"встановлювати, вилучати і оновлювати пакунки з програмним забезпеченням. " +"Програма є графічним інтерфейсом до URPMI. Під час кожного запуску вона " +"перевірятиме списки пакунків у інтернеті (які називаються «носіями» " +"пакунків), отримані безпосередньо з офіційних серверів Mageia, і " +"показуватиме список найсвіжіших пакунків з програмним забезпеченням для " +"вашої системи. Система фільтрування надає вам змогу переглядати списки " +"пакунків лише певного типу: ви можете переглянути список встановлених " +"пакунків (типове фільтрування) або лише доступні оновлення. Також можна " +"ознайомитися зі списком невстановлених пакунків. Ви можете знайти пакунок за " +"назвою або словом у резюме опису пакунка, а також на назвами файлів, які є " +"частиною пакунка." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:35 +msgid "" +"To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref linkend=" +"\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ." +msgstr "" +"Для належної роботи rpmdrake слід налаштувати параметри сховищ пакунків за " +"допомогою <xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:39 +msgid "The main parts of the screen" +msgstr "Основні частини вікна" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:43 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake1_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:51 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Package type filter:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Фільтрування за типом пакунка:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:53 +msgid "" +"This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first " +"time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical " +"interface. You can display either all the packages and all their " +"dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, " +"updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цього фільтра ви можете звузити список пакунків до певного " +"типу. Під час першого запуску програми для керування пакунками у списку " +"будуть лише програми з графічним інтерфейсом. Ви можете наказати програмі " +"показувати всі пакунки і всі залежності цих пакунків разом з бібліотеками " +"або наказати показувати лише групи пакунків (цілісні програмні комплекси), " +"лише оновлення або лише пакунки, портовані з новіших версій Mageia Linux." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:61 +msgid "" +"The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who " +"probably do not want command line or specialist tools. Since you're reading " +"this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge " +"of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to \"All\"." +msgstr "" +"Типовий режим фільтрування призначено для користувачів, які не мають " +"значного досвіду користування Linux або Mageia, тобто тих, кому не потрібні " +"програми, які керуються командним рядком, чи програми для спеціалістів. " +"Оскільки ви читаєте цю документацію, ви очевидно зацікавлені у розширенні " +"ваших знань щодо Mageia, отже, краще вибрати варіант «Всі»." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:70 +msgid "" +"<firstterm> <emphasis role=\"bold\">Package state filter:</emphasis> </" +"firstterm>" +msgstr "" +"<firstterm> <emphasis role=\"bold\">Фільтрування за станом пакунка:</" +"emphasis> </firstterm>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:73 +msgid "" +"This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the " +"packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and " +"not installed." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цього фільтрування ви можете наказати програмі показати лише " +"встановлені пакунки, пакунки, які ще не встановлено, або всі пакунки, " +"встановлені і невстановлені." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:79 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Search mode:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Режим пошуку:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:81 +msgid "" +"Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their " +"summaries, through their complete description or through the files included " +"in the packages." +msgstr "" +"Натисніть цю піктограму, щоб вибрати дані, у яких виконуватиметься пошук: " +"назви пакунків, резюме, повні описи або списки файлів, що містяться у " +"пакунках." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:87 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">\"Find\" box:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Поле «Знайти»:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword " +"for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for \"mplayer\" and " +"\"xine\" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'." +msgstr "" +"У цьому полі можна вказати одне або декілька ключових слів. Якщо для пошук " +"ви хочете використати декілька ключових слів, відокремте їх символом «|». " +"Наприклад, якщо ви хочете знайти пакунки для mplayer або xine, вкажіть: " +"«mplayer | xine» (без лапок)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:95 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase all:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Витерти все:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the \"Find\" " +"box ." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою натискання цієї піктограми можна вилучити всі ключові слова у " +"полі «Знайти»." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:102 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Categories list:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Список категорій:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:104 +msgid "" +"This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and " +"sub categories." +msgstr "" +"На цій панелі наведено список всіх програм і пакунків, розподілених за " +"категоріями та підкатегоріями." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:109 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Description panel:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Панель опису:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:111 +msgid "" +"This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete " +"description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It " +"can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the " +"package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer." +msgstr "" +"На цій панелі буде показано назву пакунка, резюме та короткий опис. Тут ви " +"зможете знайти багато корисних даних щодо позначеного пакунка, а також точні " +"дані щодо пакунка, включених до нього файлів та список змін у пакунку, " +"створений супровідниками пакунка." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:121 +msgid "The status column" +msgstr "Стовпчик стану" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:123 +msgid "" +"Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by " +"category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A " +"list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium " +"is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is " +"installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or " +"uncheck the box before the package name and click on <guibutton>Apply</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"Після належного визначення параметрів фільтрування ви можете шукати " +"програмне забезпечення або за категоріями (у області 6 на рисунку) або за " +"назвою, резюме, описом тощо, за допомогою області 4. Список пакунків, які " +"відповідають вашому запиту на вказаних вами носіях пакунків, буде показано з " +"позначками стану (встановлено, не встановлено, оновлення). Щоб змінити цей " +"стан, просто позначте або зніміть позначку з пункту перед назвою пакунка у " +"списку і натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:139 +msgid "Icon" +msgstr "Піктограма" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:141 +msgid "Legend" +msgstr "Умовне позначення" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:148 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake2_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:153 +msgid "This package is already installed" +msgstr "Цей пакунок вже встановлено" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:158 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake3.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake3_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:163 +msgid "This package will be installed" +msgstr "Цей пакунок буде встановлено" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:168 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake4.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake4_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:173 +msgid "This package cannot be modified" +msgstr "Стан цього пакунка змінювати не можна" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:178 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake5.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake5_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:183 +msgid "This package is an update" +msgstr "Цей пакунок є оновленням" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:188 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake6.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake6_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:193 +msgid "This package will be uninstalled" +msgstr "Цей пакунок буде вилучено" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:131 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"table\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "<placeholder type=\"table\" id=\"0\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:199 +msgid "Examples in the screenshot above:" +msgstr "Приклади на наведеному вище знімку:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:203 +msgid "" +"If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status " +"icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking " +"on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"Якщо зняти позначку з пункту digikam (значок з зеленою стрілкою означає, що " +"цей пакунок встановлено), піктограма стану стане червоною із зображенням " +"стрілки вгору. Пакунок буде вилучено одразу після натискання кнопки " +"<guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:211 +msgid "" +"If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange " +"with a down arrow status icon will appear and and it will be installed when " +"clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"Якщо позначити пункт qdigidoc (пакунок не встановлено, як можна бачити зі " +"стовпчика стану), у стовпчику стану з’явиться помаранчева піктограма стану " +"зі стрілкою вниз. Пакунок буде встановлено одразу після натискання кнопки " +"<guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:219 +msgid "The dependencies" +msgstr "Залежності" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:223 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake7.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake7_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:229 +msgid "" +"Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They " +"are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an " +"information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected " +"dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It " +"may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed " +"library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a " +"button to get more information and another button to choose which package to " +"install." +msgstr "" +"Для належної роботи деяких пакунків доведеться встановити інші пакунки, які " +"називають залежностями. Ці пакунки містять бібліотеки або додаткові " +"інструменти. Якщо вам трапиться такий пакунок, rpmdrake покаже інформаційне " +"вікно, за допомогою якого ви зможете погодитися зі встановленням " +"залежностей, скасувати встановлення або отримати додаткові дані (див. вище). " +"Також ви зможете вибрати потрібний вам пакунок, якщо залежності можна " +"вдовольнити у декілька способів. rpmdrake просто покаже вам вікно зі списком " +"варіантів задоволення залежностей і кнопками отримання додаткових даних та " +"вибору пакунка, який слід встановити." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/sample-page-icons.xml:3 en/sample-page-simple.xml:10 +msgid "Simple sample page" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/sample-page-icons.xml:7 +msgid "Paragraph with <emphasis>note</emphasis> icon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/sample-page-icons.xml:12 +msgid "Paragraph with <emphasis>tip</emphasis> icon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/sample-page-icons.xml:17 +msgid "Paragraph with <emphasis>warning</emphasis> icon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/sample-page-icons.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>If you want to use other icons, make sure you import some cc-by-sa " +"ones first.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml:6 +msgid "Sample page with itemized list" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml:11 +msgid "" +"If you want to copy this list to your page, don't forget to adjust the page " +"names and paragraph numbers in the code" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml:15 +msgid "First item on the list" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml:20 +msgid "Second item on the list" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml:25 +msgid "Etc." +msgstr "Та інше" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/sample-page-picture.xml:8 +msgid "Sample page with picture" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/sample-page-picture.xml:21 +msgid "" +"Look at the xml code of this page to see how the picture below was inserted" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/sample-page-picture.xml:30 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:9 +msgid "Sample page with several sections" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:11 +msgid "This is the first section" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:12 +msgid "This section is nested in a section that covers the whole page" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:20 +msgid "This is the second section" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:21 +msgid "" +"In html you can link to it by adding #second-section to the link to this page" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:25 +msgid "This is the third section" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:27 +msgid "" +"And this section will be shown when going to <code>/sample-page-" +"sections#third-section</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/sample-page-simple.xml:12 +msgid "" +"TEST3: Again writing a line to test whether version number is increased on " +"saving this file" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/sample-page-simple.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can use this page to make another simple page, but if you do so, don't " +"forget to not only change the name of this file, but to change the page name " +"in the code of this page, too" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/sample-page-simple.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Everywhere where you see <code>sample-page-simple</code> in the code, you " +"should change that into your page name" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/sample-page-simple.xml:19 +msgid "" +"If you want to make more paragraphs, copy one and change its number in the " +"code, for instance <code>pa3</code> to <code>pa4</code> and then change the " +"content. It is possible to put a paragraph between existing ones by adding a " +"letter to the number, e.g. <code>pa2a</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:10 +msgid "Set up scanner" +msgstr "Налаштовування сканера" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:11 +msgid "scannerdrake" +msgstr "scannerdrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:18 +msgid "Installation" +msgstr "Встановлення" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing " +"<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">scannerdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure " +"a single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. " +"It also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a " +"remote computer or to access remote scanners." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:29 +msgid "" +"When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following " +"message:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>\"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:35 +msgid "<emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?\"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install <code>scanner-" +"gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:43 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see " +"the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, " +"<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:55 +msgid "" +"In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner " +"sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref linkend=" +"\"scannersharing\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:59 +msgid "" +"However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its " +"cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new " +"scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a " +"scanner manually</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the " +"list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:68 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake2.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im2\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake2.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im2\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:76 +msgid "" +"If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click <emphasis>Cancel</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:79 +msgid "" +"Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link xlink:href=" +"\"http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html\">SANE: Supported " +"Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://forums." +"mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:87 +msgid "Choose port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake3.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im3\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake3.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im3\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available ports</" +"emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that case, " +"select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:102 +msgid "" +"After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen " +"similar to the one below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:104 +msgid "" +"If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref linkend=" +"\"scannerextrasteps\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:107 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake4.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im4\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake4.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im4\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:117 +msgid "Scannersharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:121 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake5.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im5\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake5.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im5\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be " +"accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also " +"decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on " +"this machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:133 +msgid "" +"Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or " +"deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on " +"this computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:137 +msgid "" +"Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted " +"from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:142 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake6.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im6\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake6.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im6\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:149 +msgid "Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:152 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake7.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im7\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake7.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im7\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:159 +msgid "" +"Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote " +"machines." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:163 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake8.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im8\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake8.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im8\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:170 +msgid "\"All remote machines\" are allowed to access the local scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:174 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake9.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im9\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake9.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im9\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:181 +msgid "" +"If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool " +"offers to do it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:184 +msgid "At the end, the tool will alter these files:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:186 +msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:188 +msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:190 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive " +"\"net\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:193 +msgid "" +"It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and <emphasis>xinetd</" +"emphasis> to be started on boot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:199 en/system-config-printer.xml:278 +msgid "Specifics" +msgstr "Специфічні поради" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:205 +msgid "Hewlett-Packard" +msgstr "Hewlett-Packard" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:207 +msgid "" +"Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> " +"(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow " +"you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device Manager</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:214 +msgid "Epson" +msgstr "Epson" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:216 +msgid "" +"Drivers are available from <link xlink:href=\"http://download.ebz.epson.net/" +"dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this page</link>. When indicated, you must " +"install the <emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then " +"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the " +"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict " +"with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be " +"ignored." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:231 +msgid "Extra installation steps" +msgstr "Додаткові кроки зі встановлення" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:234 +msgid "" +"It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref " +"linkend=\"choosescannerport\"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra " +"steps to correctly configure your scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:239 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded " +"each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, " +"after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the " +"firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you " +"downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:241 +msgid "" +"When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at " +"each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:246 +msgid "" +"Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the <emphasis>/etc/sane.d/" +"\"name_of_your_SANE_backend\".conf file.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:250 +msgid "" +"Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know " +"what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://" +"forums.mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/software-management.xml:5 en/software-management.xml:15 +msgid "Software Management" +msgstr "Керування програмами" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/software-management.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"software-management-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"software-management.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"software-management-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"software-management.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools for software management. " +"Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:17 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:20 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"MageiaUpdate\"></xref><emphasis> = Update your system</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "Поновити систему" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"mgaapplet-config\"></xref>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"mgaapplet-config\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:26 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media " +"sources for install and update</emphasis>" +msgstr "Налаштувати джерела встановлення і поновлення" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:8 +msgid "Install and configure a printer" +msgstr "Встановлення і налаштовування принтера" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:11 +msgid "system-config-printer" +msgstr "system-config-printer" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"system-" +"config-printer-im1\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"system-config-printer.png\"/> " +"</imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"system-" +"config-printer-im1\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"system-config-printer.png\"/> " +"</imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link " +"ns2:title=\"CUPS\" ns2:href=\"http://localhost:631\">configuration " +"interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia " +"offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer " +"which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu " +"and openSUSE." +msgstr "" +"Завданнями з друку у Mageia керує сервер, який називається CUPS. У сервера є " +"власний <link ns2:title=\"CUPS\" ns2:href=\"http://localhost:631\">інтерфейс " +"налаштовування</link>, доступ до якого здійснюється за допомогою програми " +"для перегляду сторінок інтернету. Втім, у Mageia передбачено і власний " +"інструмент для встановлення і налаштовування драйверів принтерів, який " +"називається system-config-printer і використовується також у інших " +"дистрибутивах, зокрема Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu та openSUSE." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:30 +msgid "" +"You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the " +"installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way." +msgstr "" +"Вам варто увімкнути доступ до сховищ пакунків, які не є вільними, (non-free) " +"до того, як ви продовжите встановлення, оскільки пакунки деяких з драйверів " +"зберігаються лише у цьому сховищі." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:37 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>system-" +"config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked for." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis>system-config-printer</emphasis>. Для роботи з " +"програмою доведеться вказати пароль адміністративного користувача (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:34 +msgid "" +"Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> " +"section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure " +"printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/" +">." +msgstr "" +"Керувати встановленням драйверів до принтерів можна за допомогою розділу " +"<guilabel>Обладнання</guilabel> Центру керування Mageia. Вам просто слід " +"вибрати пункт <guilabel>Налаштувати друк і сканування</guilabel><placeholder " +"type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:42 +msgid "MCC will ask for the installation two packages:" +msgstr "MCC попросить у вас дозволу щодо встановлення двох пакунків:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:45 +msgid "task-printing-server" +msgstr "task-printing-server" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:47 +msgid "task-printing-hp" +msgstr "task-printing-hp" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:50 +msgid "" +"It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of " +"dependencies are needed." +msgstr "" +"Вам слід погодитися на встановлення цих пакунків, щоб продовжити роботу з " +"програмою. За залежностями може бути встановлено до 230 МБ даних." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:53 +msgid "" +"To add a printer, choose the \"Add\" printer button. The system will try to " +"detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a " +"printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a " +"printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line. The window " +"will also attempt to configure a network printer." +msgstr "" +"Щоб додати принтер, натисніть кнопку <guilabel>Додати</guilabel>. Система " +"спробує виявити всі доступні принтери і порти. На знімку показано пункт " +"принтера, з’єднаного за допомогою USB. Якщо принтер буде виявлено, його буде " +"показано у першому рядку списку. За допомогою цього ж вікна можна " +"налаштувати мережевий принтер." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:61 +msgid "Automatically detected printer" +msgstr "Принтер було виявлено автоматично" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:63 +msgid "" +"This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the " +"name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click \"Next" +"\". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be " +"automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known " +"drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the " +"next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend=\"terminate\"/>" +msgstr "" +"Зазвичай, це стосується принтерів, з’єднаних з комп’ютером за допомогою " +"кабелю USB. Програма автоматично визначає назву принтера і показує її. " +"Виберіть принтер і натисніть кнопку <guilabel>Далі</guilabel>. Якщо з " +"принтером пов’язано відомий системі драйвер, його буде встановлено " +"автоматично. Якщо можна скористатися одним з декількох драйверів або або " +"системі не вдасться визначити найкращий драйвер, буде показано вікно з " +"проханням вибрати драйвер, пояснення до якого наведено у наступному розділі. " +"Продовжіть читання з розділу <xref linkend=\"terminate\"/>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:72 +msgid "No automatically detected printer" +msgstr "Принтер не вдалося виявити автоматично" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:75 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"printer3.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"printer3.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:80 +msgid "" +"When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window " +"to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following " +"options." +msgstr "" +"Після вибору порту система завантажить список драйверів і покаже вікно для " +"вибору драйвера. Ви зможете вибрати один з наведених нижче варіантів." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:86 +msgid "Select printer from database" +msgstr "вибрати принтер з бази даних" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:92 +msgid "provide PPD file" +msgstr "надати PPD-файл" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:98 +msgid "search for a driver to download" +msgstr "пошукати драйвер для звантаження" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:102 +msgid "" +"By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer " +"first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one " +"driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have " +"encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one " +"which know to work." +msgstr "" +"Якщо буде вибрано варіант з пошуком у базі даних, програма спочатку " +"запропонує вам вибрати назви компанії-виробника принтера, а потім назву " +"пристрою та драйвер, пов’язаний з роботою цього пристрою. Якщо можна буде " +"скористатися декількома драйверами, варто вибрати з них рекомендований. Якщо " +"у вас виникають якісь проблеми з роботою рекомендованого драйвера, виберіть " +"той з драйверів, який працює найкраще." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:110 +msgid "Complete the installation process" +msgstr "Завершення процедури встановлення" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:112 +msgid "" +"After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will " +"allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is " +"the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of " +"available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After " +"this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available " +"printers." +msgstr "" +"Після вибору драйвера буде відкрито вікно введення даних, які допоможуть " +"системі позначити і розпізнати принтер. У першому рядку слід ввести назву " +"пристрою, яку буде показано у програмах у списку доступних принтерів. Після " +"введення даних засіб встановлення драйвера запропонує надрукувати тестову " +"сторінку. Щойно буде закрито сторінку тестового друку, запис принтера буде " +"додано до списку доступних принтерів, ним можна буде користуватися." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:121 +msgid "Network printer" +msgstr "Мережний принтер" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:123 +msgid "" +"Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or " +"wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to " +"another workstation that serves as printserver." +msgstr "" +"Мережні принтери — це принтери, які безпосередньо з’єднано з дротовою або " +"бездротовою мережею, сервером друку або іншою робочою станцією, яка працює у " +"режимі сервера друку." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed " +"IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same " +"as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed " +"one." +msgstr "" +"Часто, варто налаштувати сервер DHCP на автоматичну прив’язку IP-адреси до " +"MAC-принтера. Звичайно ж, якщо ця адреса є фіксованою, вона має збігатися з " +"IP-адресою принтера, на яку налаштовано сервер друку." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:134 +msgid "" +"The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or " +"printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a " +"configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label " +"on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a " +"Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it " +"as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters " +"after \"HWaddr\"." +msgstr "" +"MAC-адреса принтера — це серійний номер, який надається принтеру, серверу " +"друку або комп’ютеру, з яким з’єднано принтер, і яку можна визначити за " +"допомогою тестової сторінки, надрукованої самим принтером або наклейки на " +"принтері або сервері друку. Якщо ваш принтер спільного користування з’єднано " +"з системою Mageia, ви можете виконати від імені користувача root " +"(адміністратора) команду <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis>, щоб " +"визначити цю MAC-адресу. MAC-адресою є послідовність цифр і літер після слова " +"«HWaddr»." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:142 +msgid "" +"You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to " +"your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, " +"you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find " +"Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu " +"and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it " +"says \"host\"." +msgstr "" +"Додати ваш мережний принтер можна так: виберіть протокол, який " +"використовується принтером для обміну даними мережею з вашим комп’ютером. " +"Якщо ви не знаєте, який протокол слід вибрати, ви можете спробувати " +"скористатися пунктом <guilabel>Мережний принтер</guilabel> - <guilabel>Знайти " +"мережний принтер</guilabel> у меню <guilabel>Пристрої</guilabel> і вказати " +"IP-адресу принтера у полі праворуч, де вказано «вузол»." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:149 +msgid "" +"If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a " +"protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the " +"list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list." +msgstr "" +"Якщо програмі вдасться виявити ваш принтер або сервер друку, вона запропонує " +"вам визначені параметри протоколу та черги друку. Втім, ви можете вибрати " +"потрібний вам варіант зі списку, розташованого нижче, або вказати належну " +"назву черги друку, якщо відповідного пункту немає у списку." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:154 +msgid "" +"Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find " +"which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names." +msgstr "" +"Для визначення переліку протоколів, підтримку яких передбачено у сервері " +"друку, та відповідних назв черг друку зверніться до документації з сервера " +"друку, яким ви користуєтеся." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:160 +msgid "Network printing protocols" +msgstr "Протоколи друку мережею" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:162 +msgid "" +"One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as " +"JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network " +"via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is " +"known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers " +"which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the IP-" +"address is that of the router. Note that the tool \"Hp Device manager\" can " +"manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like <emphasis>hp:/" +"net/<name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed IP-adress is " +"not required." +msgstr "" +"Однією з сучасних методик роботи з принтерами є розроблена Hewlett-Packard " +"технологія під назвою JetDirect. За її допомогою можна здійснювати доступ до " +"принтера, безпосередньо з’єднаного з мережею за допомогою порту Ethernet. " +"Вам слід буде вказати IP-адресу, яка використовується принтером у мережі. Ця " +"технологія використовується також у деяких ADSL-маршрутизаторах, у яких " +"передбачено порт USB для під’єднання принтера. Якщо ви користуєтеся таким " +"маршрутизатором, слід вказати його IP-адресу. Зауважте, що програма «Hp " +"Device manager» може працювати з динамічно визначеною IP-адресою, визначаючи " +"адресу файла пристрою як <emphasis>hp:/net/<назва_принтера></emphasis> " +". Для такого динамічного визначення фіксована IP-адреса не потрібна." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:172 +msgid "" +"Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the " +"protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change " +"the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be " +"changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is " +"the same as above." +msgstr "" +"Виберіть пункт <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> у списку " +"протоколів і вкажіть адресу у полі <guilabel>Вузол:</guilabel>. Не змінюйте " +"вміст поля <guilabel>Номер порту</guilabel>, якщо не певні, що це слід " +"зробити. Після вибору протоколу виконайте вибір драйвера відповідно до вже " +"описаної процедури." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:179 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"printer5.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"printer5-uk.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:184 +msgid "The other protocols are:" +msgstr "Серед інших можливих протоколів такі:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:188 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can " +"be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer " +"connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by " +"some ADSL-routers." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Протокол друку інтернетом (ipp)</emphasis>: принтер, доступ до " +"якого здійснюється у мережі TCP/IP за допомогою протоколу IPP. Наприклад, " +"принтер, з’єднаний з робочою станцією, де використовується CUPS. Цей " +"протокол може також використовуватися деякими маршрутизаторами ADSL." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:197 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, " +"but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol. The port has to be " +"defined. By default, the port 631 is used." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Протокол друку інтернетом (https)</emphasis>: те саме, що і ipp, " +"але з використанням передавання даних HTTP з захистом TLS. Слід вказати порт. " +"Типовим номером порту є 631." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:205 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but " +"with TLS secured protocol." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Протокол друку інтренетом (ipps)</emphasis>: те саме, що і ipp, але " +"із захистом TLS." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:212 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be " +"accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer " +"connected to a station using LPD." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Вузол або принтер LPD/LPR</emphasis>: принтер, доступ до якого " +"здійснюється у мережі TCP/IP за допомогою протоколу LPD. Наприклад, принтер, " +"з’єднаний з робочою станцією, на якій використовується LPD." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:220 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a " +"station running Windows or a SMB server and shared." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Принтер Windows через SAMBA</emphasis>: принтер у спільному " +"користуванні, з’єднаний з робочою станцією під керуванням Windows або " +"сервером SMB." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:226 +msgid "" +"The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form " +"the URI:" +msgstr "" +"Крім того, адресу URI можна додати безпосередньо. Ось декілька прикладів " +"форматування адреси URI:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:231 +msgid "Appsocket" +msgstr "Appsocket" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:233 +msgid "<uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri>" +msgstr "<uri>socket://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:порт</uri>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:237 +msgid "Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)" +msgstr "Протокол друку Інтернетом (IPP)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:239 +msgid "<uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>" +msgstr "<uri>ipp://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:номер-порту/ресурс</uri>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:241 +msgid "<uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>" +msgstr "<uri>http://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:номер-порту/ресурс</uri>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:245 +msgid "Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol" +msgstr "Протокол фонової служби лінійного принтера (LPD)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:247 +msgid "<uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri>" +msgstr "<uri>lpd://користувач@ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла/черга</uri>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:251 +msgid "" +"Additional information can be found in the <link ns2:href=\"http://www.cups." +"org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html\">CUPS documentation.</link>" +msgstr "" +"Додаткові відомості можна знайти у <link ns2:href=\"http://www.cups.org/" +"documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html\">документації до CUPS</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:256 +msgid "Device Properties" +msgstr "Властивості пристрою" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:258 +msgid "" +"You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to " +"parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your " +"system, but you can specify a different one with the <guimenu>Server</" +"guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, another window which " +"gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters of the server, " +"following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem>" +msgstr "" +"Ви можете переглянути і змінити параметри роботи пристрою. За допомогою меню " +"можна отримати доступ до панелі налаштовування сервера CUPS. Типово, сервер " +"CUPS запускається вашою операційною системою, але ви можете вибрати інший " +"варіант за допомогою пункту меню <guimenu>Сервер</guimenu> → " +"<guimenuitem>З’єднатись...</guimenuitem>. Інше вікно налаштовування " +"параметрів сервера можна відкрити за допомогою пункту меню <guimenu>Сервер</" +"guimenu> → <guimenuitem>Параметри</guimenuitem>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:268 +msgid "Troubleshoot" +msgstr "Діагностика проблем" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:270 +msgid "" +"You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by " +"inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>" +msgstr "" +"Дані щодо помилок, які могли трапитися під час друку, можна знайти у файлі " +"<filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:273 +msgid "" +"You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the <guimenu>Help</" +"guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu." +msgstr "" +"Крім того, ви можете скористатися інструментом для діагностування і " +"вирішення проблем. Доступ до нього можна отримати за допомогою пункту меню " +"<guimenu>Довідка</guimenu> → <guilabel>Усунення проблем з друком</guilabel>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:280 +msgid "" +"It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in " +"Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link ns2:" +"href=\"http://openprinting.org/printers/\">openprinting</link> site to check " +"if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package is " +"already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, redo " +"the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report the " +"problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this tool " +"and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer works " +"or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other up-to-date " +"drivers or for more recent devices." +msgstr "" +"Драйверів, потрібних для роботи певних принтерів, немає у сховищах пакунків " +"Mageia через ліцензійні проблеми або ці драйвери є непрацездатними. Якщо ви " +"не можете знайти потрібного драйвера скористайтеся сторінкою системи <link " +"ns2:href=\"http://openprinting.org/printers/\">openprinting</link>, щоб " +"переконатися, чи існує драйвер взагалі. Якщо виявиться, що драйвер існує, " +"перевірте, чи немає пакунка з цим драйвером у сховищах Mageia. Якщо такий " +"пакунок буде виявлено, встановіть його вручну. Після встановлення драйвера " +"повторіть процедуру встановлення і налаштовування принтера. Про проблеми " +"повідомляйте за допомогою системи стеження за вадами дистрибутива або " +"форуму. Також можна повідомляти про побажання щодо роботи програм " +"налаштовування та про те, чи працює принтер після встановлення. Нижче " +"наведено декілька адрес, за якими можна знайти найновіші версії драйверів " +"або драйвери до найновіших пристроїв." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:292 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Brother printers</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Принтери Brother</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:294 +msgid "" +"<link ns2:href=\"http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/" +"en/download_prn.html\">This page</link> give a list of drivers provided by " +"Brother. Search the driver for your device, download the rpm(s) and install." +msgstr "" +"На <link ns2:href=\"http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/" +"linux/en/download_prn.html\">цій сторінці</link> можна знайти список " +"драйверів, які надаються Brother. Знайдіть драйвер до вашого пристрою, " +"звантажте пакунки rpm з ним і встановіть ці пакунки." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:298 +msgid "" +"You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility." +msgstr "" +"Драйвери Brother слід встановити до запуску програми для налаштовування " +"системи друку." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:301 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one devices</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Принтери та багатофункціональні пристрої " +"Hewlett-Packard</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:304 +msgid "" +"These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the " +"detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information " +"<link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html\">here</" +"link>. The tool \"HP Device Manager\" is available in the <guilabel>System</" +"guilabel> menu. Also view <link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-" +"web/install/manual/hp_setup.html\">configuration</link> for the management " +"of the printer." +msgstr "" +"Для цих пристроїв використовуються програми з комплекту hplip. Цей комплект " +"програм буде автоматично встановлено після вибору принтера. Докладніші " +"відомості щодо комплекту програм можна знайти <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html\">тут</link>. Програму «HP Device " +"Manager» (Керування пристроями HP) можна буде знайти у меню системи. Довідку " +"щодо налаштовування принтера можна знайти <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/install/manual/hp_setup.html\">тут</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:311 +msgid "" +"A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner " +"features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't " +"allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate). In this " +"case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the " +"picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device. Afterwards, " +"open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory " +"card which is appeared in the /media folder." +msgstr "" +"Багатофункціональні пристрої HP потребують встановлення драйвера принтера, " +"щоб працювати і у режимі сканера. Зауважте, що іноді у інтерфейсі програми " +"для сканування не передбачено можливостей зі сканування плівок або слайдів " +"(не працює модуль для слайдів). У цьому випадку можна скористатися для " +"сканування автономним режимом зі збереженням зображення на картку пам’яті або " +"на флеш-пристрій USB, вставлений до багатофункціонального пристрою. Після " +"сканування отримані зображення можна перенести з носія даних до сховища " +"вашого улюбленого програмного забезпечення для роботи з зображеннями." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:319 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Samsung colour printer</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Кольорові принтери Samsung</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:321 +msgid "" +"For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/\">this site provides drivers</link> for the QPDL " +"protocol." +msgstr "" +"Драйвери для окремих кольорових принтерів Samsung і Xerox, що працюють за " +"допомогою протоколу QPDL, можна <link ns2:href=\"http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/" +"\">знайти тут</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:324 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Принтери і сканери Epson</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:326 +msgid "" +"Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this search page</" +"link>. For the scanner part, you must install the \"iscan-data\" package " +"first, then \"iscan\" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also be " +"available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages " +"according to your architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:332 +msgid "" +"It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a " +"conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:336 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Canon printers</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Принтери Canon</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:338 +msgid "" +"For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint " +"<link ns2:href=\"http://www.turboprint.info/\">available here </link>." +msgstr "" +"Якщо ви працюєте з принтерами Canon, вам може стати у пригоді програма, яка " +"називається turboprint. Відповідний (тестовий) пакунок можна отримати <link " +"ns2:href=\"http://www.turboprint.info/\">тут</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:9 +msgid "Import Windows(TM) documents and settings" +msgstr "Імпортування документів і параметрів Windows(TM)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:12 +msgid "transfugdrake" +msgstr "transfugdrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"transfugdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref=" +"\"transfugdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"transfugdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref=" +"\"transfugdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">transfugdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора " +"(root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center " +"labelled <guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings " +"from a <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark " +"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark class=\"registered" +"\">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> installation on the same " +"computer as the Mageia installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake " +"immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:37 +msgid "" +"After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some " +"explanation about the tool and import options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:40 +msgid "" +"As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of " +"<trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:44 +msgid "" +"When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to " +"choose accounts in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> and " +"Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account " +"than yours own." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:56 +msgid "" +"Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of " +"transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark> user account names with special symbols can be displayed " +"incorrectly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:67 +msgid "" +"Some <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> applications " +"(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For " +"example, NVidia drivers in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark>are updated using <emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not " +"use such accounts for the import purposes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:74 +msgid "" +"When you finished with the accounts selection press <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import " +"documents:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:79 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:84 +msgid "" +"Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark> data from <emphasis>My Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</" +"emphasis> and <emphasis>My Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to " +"skip import by selecting the appropriate item in this window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"When you finished with the document import method choosing press " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method " +"to import bookmarks:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:94 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake3.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake3.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:99 +msgid "" +"Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and " +"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia " +"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:103 +msgid "" +"Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> " +"button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:112 +msgid "The next page allows you to import desktop background:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:115 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake4.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake4.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:123 +msgid "" +"The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the " +"<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:127 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake5.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake5.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:10 +msgid "Mandrakelinux" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:6 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" " +"id=\"1\"/> If for any reason you want to uninstall <application>Mageia</" +"application>, you can do so. The process of uninstalling " +"<application>Mageia</application> is done in two steps:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Removing partitions on your hard drive will inevitably result in the loss of " +"all data stored on those partitions. Please make sure you've backed up all " +"of the data you want to keep <emphasis>before</emphasis> proceeding." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Delete all partitions related to <application>Mageia</application> on your " +"hard drive (usually partitions hosting <acronym>ext3</acronym> file systems " +"and the <systemitem>Swap</systemitem> partition) and — optionally — replace " +"them with a single partition using <application>DiskDrake</" +"application><phrase condition=\"Starter\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-" +"ph1\" revision=\"1\"> (see <xref linkend=\"diskdrake\" />)</phrase>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary> +#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:48 +msgid "lilo" +msgstr "lilo" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary> +#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:50 +msgid "Master Boot Record" +msgstr "Головний завантажувальний запис (MBR)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Remove<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm" +"\" id=\"1\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"2\"/><placeholder type=" +"\"indexterm\" id=\"3\"/> the bootloader, <application>LILO</application> in " +"this example, from the Master Boot Record (<acronym>MBR</acronym>). To do " +"so, execute <command>lilo -U</command> in a console, as <literal>root</" +"literal>. Doing this will not only uninstall <application>LILO</application> " +"but will also restore the previous master boot record, if any." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:59 +msgid "" +"If you have a different boot loader, please refer to its documentation to " +"determine how to regenerate the master boot record." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/userdrake.xml:11 +msgid "Users and Groups" +msgstr "Користувачі і групи" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/userdrake.xml:13 +msgid "userdrake" +msgstr "userdrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/userdrake.xml:17 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"userdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref=" +"\"userdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"userdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref=" +"\"userdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">userdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">userdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center " +"labelled \"Manage users on system\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this " +"means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings " +"(ID, shell, ...)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in " +"the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the " +"<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:35 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton>" +msgstr "&Додати користувача..." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:37 +msgid "This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/userdrake.xml:40 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"userdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"userdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"The field <emphasis role=\"bold\">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the " +"entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything " +"or nothing as well!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:49 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login</emphasis> is the only required field." +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Поле «Знайти»:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:52 +msgid "" +"Setting a <emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis> is highly recommended. " +"There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the password is weak, " +"too short or is too similar to the login name. You should use figures, lower " +"and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The shield will turn " +"orange and then green as the password strength improves." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:59 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure " +"you entered what you intended to." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that " +"allows you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options " +"are Bash, Dash and Sh." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:66 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if " +"checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new " +"user as the only member (this may be edited)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:70 +msgid "" +"The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately " +"after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:73 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">2 Add Group</emphasis>" +msgstr "Додати групу" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:75 +msgid "" +"You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific " +"group ID." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:78 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Режим пошуку:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:80 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given " +"for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:83 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Account Info</emphasis>:" +msgstr "Інформація про користувачів" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/userdrake.xml:86 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"userdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"userdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:91 +msgid "" +"The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account. " +"Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary " +"accounts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:95 +msgid "" +"The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long " +"as the account is locked." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:98 +msgid "It is also possible to change the icon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:100 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an " +"expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his " +"password periodically." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/userdrake.xml:105 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"userdrake3.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake3_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:110 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups " +"that the user is a member of." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:114 +msgid "" +"If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be " +"effective until his/her next login." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:118 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Режим пошуку:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the " +"group name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:123 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the " +"users who are members of the group" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:126 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">5 Delete</emphasis>" +msgstr "Вилучити" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Delete</" +"emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to ask if home " +"directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group has been " +"created for the user, it will be deleted as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:133 +msgid "It is possible to delete a group which is not empty." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:136 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">6 Refresh</emphasis>" +msgstr "Оновити" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:138 +msgid "" +"The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to " +"refresh the display." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:141 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">7 Guest Account</emphasis>" +msgstr "Обліковий запис для &гостей:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:143 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is " +"intended to give somebody temporary access to the system with total " +"security. Login is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to " +"make modifications to the system from this account. The personal directories " +"are deleted at the end of the session. This account is enabled by default, " +"to disable it, click in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest " +"account</guimenu>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the graphical server" +msgstr "Налаштовування графічного сервера" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:5 +msgid "XFdrake" +msgstr "XFdrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:9 +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"XFdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center" +"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"XFdrake.png\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"rpmdrake-im1\" width=\"800\" revision=" +"\"1\" fileref=\"rpmdrake_uk.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" depth=" +"\"600\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:17 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>XFdrake</" +"emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> as root. Mind the " +"capital letters." +msgstr "" +"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">XFdrake</emphasis> від імені звичайного користувача " +"або команду <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root). " +"Зверніть увагу на регістр використаних у командах літер." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the " +"graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>. <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=" +"\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" +"Доступ до цієї програми можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, сторінка " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Обладнання</emphasis>. Достатньо вибрати на цій " +"сторінці пункт <emphasis><guilabel>Налаштувати графічний сервер</guilabel></" +"emphasis>. <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:23 +msgid "The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цих кнопок можна налаштувати параметри графічної підсистеми." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:25 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphic card</emphasis>:" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Графічна карта</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server " +"configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example " +"one with a proprietary driver." +msgstr "" +"Тут показано виявлений програмою тип графічної картки та відповідний " +"драйвер. Натисніть кнопку, щоб змінити драйвер на інший, наприклад драйвер з " +"закритим кодом від виробника." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by " +"manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical " +"order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> " +"Xorg</guilabel>." +msgstr "" +"Доступні драйвери впорядковано у списку <guilabel>Виробник</guilabel> за " +"виробником за абеткою, а потім за моделлю за абеткою. Вільні драйвери " +"впорядковано за абеткою у списку <guilabel>Xorg</guilabel>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:37 +msgid "" +"In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most " +"graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while " +"in your Desktop Environment." +msgstr "" +"Якщо у вас виникнуть проблеми, ви можете скористатися варіантом " +"<emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis>, який працює для більшості карток і надасть " +"вам змогу знайти і встановити належний драйвер, працюючи у вашому " +"стільничному середовищі." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - " +"<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing " +"Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates." +msgstr "" +"Якщо навіть Vesa не працюватиме, виберіть варіант <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</" +"guilabel> - <guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, який використовується під " +"час встановлення Mageia, ален не надає змоги змінювати роздільну здатність " +"або частоту оновлення зображення." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:39 +msgid "" +"</note>If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you " +"want to use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for " +"example)." +msgstr "" +"</note>Якщо ви раніше вибрали вільний драйвер, система може запропонувати " +"вам скористатися замість нього закритим драйвером, який має ширші можливості " +"(наприклад, може використовувати можливості апаратного прискорення під час " +"показу просторових об’єктів)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:45 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Монітор:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:47 +msgid "" +"In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and " +"you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor " +"isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the " +"<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features." +msgstr "" +"Поряд з цим пунктом буде показано визначений системою монітор. Натисніть " +"кнопку, щоб змінити визначену назву на іншу. Якщо потрібного вам пункту " +"немає у списку <guilabel>Виробник</guilabel>, ви можете вибрати аналогічний " +"монітор у списку <guilabel>Загальний</guilabel>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:54 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Роздільна здатність:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:56 +msgid "" +"This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the " +"colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:" +msgstr "" +"За допомогою цієї кнопки можна вибрати роздільну здатність (кількість " +"пікселів) та глибину кольорів (кількість кольорів у показаному зображенні). " +"У відповідь на її натискання буде показано таке вікно:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><mediaobject> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:60 +#, fuzzy +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"XFdrake1.png\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake1_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:59 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>The image of the monitor in the " +"middle gives a preview with the chosen configuration." +msgstr "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>На зображенні монітора " +"посередині вікна буде показано попередній перегляд поточних налаштувань." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:66 +msgid "" +"The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another " +"one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card " +"and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to " +"set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or " +"select an uncomfortable setting." +msgstr "" +"На цій кнопці буде показано поточну роздільну здатність. Натисніть її, щоб " +"змінити роздільну здатність. У списку буде показано можливі варіанти, що " +"відповідають можливостям графічної картки та монітора. Ви можете вибрати " +"пункт <guilabel>Інші</guilabel>, щоб вказати іншу роздільну здатність, але " +"варто зважати на те, що довільне визначення параметрів роздільної здатності " +"може призвести до пошкодження монітора або порушення комфортності роботи." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:72 +msgid "" +"The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for " +"another one." +msgstr "" +"На другій кнопці буде показано поточну глибину кольорів. Натисніть кнопку, " +"щоб змінити глибину кольорів на іншу." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:76 +msgid "" +"Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and " +"restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect." +msgstr "" +"Залежно від вибраної роздільної здатності, може знадобитися вихід з " +"графічного середовища і наступний вхід до нього для того, щоб змінені " +"налаштовування набули чинності." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Перевірити:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking " +"on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the " +"graphical environment doesn't work." +msgstr "" +"Щойно налаштовування буде завершено, рекомендуємо вам перевірити їх до " +"натискання кнопки <guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>, оскільки простіше негайно " +"змінити значення параметрів, ніж отримати непрацездатне графічне середовище." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:90 +msgid "" +"In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a " +"text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use " +"XFdrake's text version." +msgstr "" +"Якщо після налаштовування працездатність графічного середовище буде " +"порушено, натисніть комбінацію клавіш Alt+Ctrl+F2, щоб відкрити текстову " +"консоль, увійдіть до системи від імені адміністратора (root) і віддайте " +"команду XFdrake (перші дві літери мають бути великими), щоб скористатися " +"текстовою версією XFdrake." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:93 +msgid "" +"</note>If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't " +"want to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything " +"is right, click on <guibutton role=\"bold\">OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"</note>Якщо визначені параметри не спрацюють, просто дочекайтеся завершення " +"перевірки, щоб повернутися до працездатних значень параметрів. Якщо значення " +"спрацюють, але ви все одно хочете їх змінити, натисніть кнопку " +"<guibutton>Ні</guibutton>. Якщо ж отримані результати вас задовольнять, " +"натисніть кнопку <guibutton role=\"bold\">Гаразд</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:97 +msgid "Options:" +msgstr "Параметри:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:99 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable Ctrl-Alt-" +"Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to restart X " +"server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys." +msgstr "" +"У розділі <guilabel>Загальні параметри</guilabel> ви можете налаштувати " +"систему на перезапуск графічного сервера за допомогою комбінації клавіш Ctrl" +"+Alt+Backspace." + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:103 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable " +"three specific features depending on the graphic card." +msgstr "" +"За допомогою розділу <guilabel>Параметри графічної картки</guilabel> можна " +"увімкнути або вимкнути три специфічних можливості, що залежать від типу " +"графічної картки." + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:107 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, " +"<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon booting</" +"emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it may be " +"unchecked for a server." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Графічний інтерфейс при завантаженні</guilabel>: здебільшого варто " +"залишити варіант <emphasis>Автоматично стартувати графічну оболонку (Xorg) " +"при завантаженні</emphasis>, щоб система завантажувалася у графічному " +"режимі. Втім, ви можете зняти позначку, якщо завантаження має бути виконано " +"без використання графічного сервера." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:112 +msgid "" +"After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask " +"you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the " +"previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect " +"and reconnect to activate the new configuration." +msgstr "" +"У відповідь на натискання кнопки <guibutton>Вийти</guibutton> програма " +"запропонує вам підтвердити вихід. Ви можете скасувати внесені зміни і " +"зберегти попередні налаштування або підтвердити їх внесення. Якщо зміни буде " +"підтверджено, вам доведеться вийти з облікового запису і знову увійти до " +"нього, щоб задіяти внесені зміни." + +#~ msgid "It is often very wise to set this filter to All" +#~ msgstr "Часто варто встановити для цього фільтра значення «Всі»" diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/MCC.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/MCC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc7ca0ab --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/MCC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:id="MCC"> + + <info> + <title>Центр керування Mageia</title> + <cover> + <para>Текст та знімки вікон у цьому підручнику надаються вам відповідно до умов +ліцензування CC BY-SA 3.0, <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>ю + </para> + <para>Цей підручник було створено за допомогою <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link>, розробленої компанією +<link ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>Підручник було написано охочими до цього користувачами у вільний від +основної роботи час. Будь ласка, зверніться до <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">команди +документування</link>, якщо хочете допомогти у покращенні цього підручника.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + +<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include> + +</article> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/MageiaUpdate.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/MageiaUpdate.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3afb3f6d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/MageiaUpdate.xml @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="MageiaUpdate"> + <info> + <title xml:id="MageiaUpdate-ti1">Поновлення пакунків з програмами</title> + + <subtitle>MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="MageiaUpdate-im1" +align="center" fileref="MageiaUpdate.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/XFdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/XFdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..69a866c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/XFdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="XFdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="XFdrake-ti1">Налаштовування графічного сервера</title> + + <subtitle>XFdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="XFdrake-im1" revision="1" align="center" +format="PNG" fileref="XFdrake.png" /> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Доступ до цієї програми можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, сторінка +<emphasis role="bold">Обладнання</emphasis>. Достатньо вибрати на цій +сторінці пункт <emphasis><guilabel>Налаштувати графічний +сервер</guilabel></emphasis>. <footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">XFdrake</emphasis> від імені звичайного користувача +або команду <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root). Зверніть увагу на регістр використаних у командах літер.</para> + </footnote></para> + + <para/> + + <para>За допомогою цих кнопок можна налаштувати параметри графічної підсистеми.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Графічна карта</emphasis></para> + + <para>Тут показано виявлений програмою тип графічної картки та відповідний +драйвер. Натисніть кнопку, щоб змінити драйвер на інший, наприклад драйвер з +закритим кодом від виробника.</para> + + <para>Доступні драйвери впорядковано у списку <guilabel>Виробник</guilabel> за +виробником за абеткою, а потім за моделлю за абеткою. Вільні драйвери +впорядковано за абеткою у списку <guilabel>Xorg</guilabel>.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>Якщо у вас виникнуть проблеми, ви можете скористатися варіантом +<emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis>, який працює для більшості карток і надасть +вам змогу знайти і встановити належний драйвер, працюючи у вашому +стільничному середовищі.</para> +<para> Якщо навіть Vesa не працюватиме, виберіть варіант +<emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - <guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, +який використовується під час встановлення Mageia, ален не надає змоги +змінювати роздільну здатність або частоту оновлення зображення.</para> + </note>Якщо ви раніше вибрали вільний драйвер, система може запропонувати +вам скористатися замість нього закритим драйвером, який має ширші можливості +(наприклад, може використовувати можливості апаратного прискорення під час +показу просторових об’єктів).</para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Монітор:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Поряд з цим пунктом буде показано визначений системою монітор. Натисніть +кнопку, щоб змінити визначену назву на іншу. Якщо потрібного вам пункту +немає у списку <guilabel>Виробник</guilabel>, ви можете вибрати аналогічний +монітор у списку <guilabel>Загальний</guilabel>.</para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Роздільна здатність:</emphasis></para> + + <para>За допомогою цієї кнопки можна вибрати роздільну здатність (кількість +пікселів) та глибину кольорів (кількість кольорів у показаному +зображенні). У відповідь на її натискання буде показано таке вікно:</para> + + <para><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="XFdrake1.png" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>На зображенні монітора посередині +вікна буде показано попередній перегляд поточних налаштувань. </para> + + <para>На цій кнопці буде показано поточну роздільну здатність. Натисніть її, щоб +змінити роздільну здатність. У списку буде показано можливі варіанти, що +відповідають можливостям графічної картки та монітора. Ви можете вибрати +пункт <guilabel>Інші</guilabel>, щоб вказати іншу роздільну здатність, але +варто зважати на те, що довільне визначення параметрів роздільної здатності +може призвести до пошкодження монітора або порушення комфортності роботи.</para> + + <para>На другій кнопці буде показано поточну глибину кольорів. Натисніть кнопку, +щоб змінити глибину кольорів на іншу.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>Залежно від вибраної роздільної здатності, може знадобитися вихід з +графічного середовища і наступний вхід до нього для того, щоб змінені +налаштовування набули чинності. + </para> + </note></para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Перевірити:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Щойно налаштовування буде завершено, рекомендуємо вам перевірити їх до +натискання кнопки <guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>, оскільки простіше негайно +змінити значення параметрів, ніж отримати непрацездатне графічне середовище.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>Якщо після налаштовування працездатність графічного середовище буде +порушено, натисніть комбінацію клавіш Alt+Ctrl+F2, щоб відкрити текстову +консоль, увійдіть до системи від імені адміністратора (root) і віддайте +команду XFdrake (перші дві літери мають бути великими), щоб скористатися +текстовою версією XFdrake. </para> + </note>Якщо визначені параметри не спрацюють, просто дочекайтеся завершення +перевірки, щоб повернутися до працездатних значень параметрів. Якщо значення +спрацюють, але ви все одно хочете їх змінити, натисніть кнопку +<guibutton>Ні</guibutton>. Якщо ж отримані результати вас задовольнять, +натисніть кнопку <guibutton role="bold">Гаразд</guibutton>.</para> + +<orderedlist><title>Параметри:</title> + <listitem> + <para>У розділі <guilabel>Загальні параметри</guilabel> ви можете налаштувати +систему на перезапуск графічного сервера за допомогою комбінації клавіш +Ctrl+Alt+Backspace.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>За допомогою розділу <guilabel>Параметри графічної картки</guilabel> можна +увімкнути або вимкнути три специфічних можливості, що залежать від типу +графічної картки.</para> +</listitem> +<listitem> + <para><guilabel>Графічний інтерфейс при завантаженні</guilabel>: здебільшого варто +залишити варіант <emphasis>Автоматично стартувати графічну оболонку (Xorg) +при завантаженні</emphasis>, щоб система завантажувалася у графічному +режимі. Втім, ви можете зняти позначку, якщо завантаження має бути виконано +без використання графічного сервера.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + + <para>У відповідь на натискання кнопки <guibutton>Вийти</guibutton> програма +запропонує вам підтвердити вихід. Ви можете скасувати внесені зміни і +зберегти попередні налаштування або підтвердити їх внесення. Якщо зміни буде +підтверджено, вам доведеться вийти з облікового запису і знову увійти до +нього, щоб задіяти внесені зміни.</para> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--dav.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--dav.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5289c6c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--dav.xml @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="diskdrake--dav" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--dav-ti1">Доступ до дисків і каталогів WebDAV спільного використання</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --dav</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--dav1.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--dav-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure +WebDAV shares</guilabel>.</para> + + <section> + <title>Вступ</title> + + <para><link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV">WebDAV</link> is a +protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it +appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a +WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV +server.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Creating a new entry</title> + + <para>The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if +any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new +entry. Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen.</para> + + <para>Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions. Continue +with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking +<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the +<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct +it, if needed.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount +point.</para> + + <para>In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other +options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the +access.</para> + + <para>After you accepted the configuration with the radio button +<guibutton>Done</guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and you new +mount point is listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you are +asked to save or not the modifications in +<emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this option if you want that the +remote directory is available at each boot. If your configuration is for +one-time usage, do not save it.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--fileshare.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--fileshare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e63c3069 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--fileshare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-ti1">Налаштування доступу до розділів жорсткого диска</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --fileshare</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--fileshare.png" revision="1" +xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-im1" align="center" format="PNG" /> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This simple tool<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> від імені +адміністратора (root).</para></footnote> allows you, the +administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home +subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have +computers running either Linux or Windows operating system.</para> + + <para>Доступ до цього модуля можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, вкладка +«Локальні диски», пункт «Налаштувати доступ до розділів жорсткого диска».</para> + + <para>Спочатку вам слід дати відповідь на питання: «<guilabel>Чи хотіли б ви +дозволити користувачам надавати доступ до деяких з їхніх тек?</guilabel>» +Позначте пункт <guibutton>Без спільного доступу</guibutton>, якщо доступ +слід заборонити всім користувачам, пункт <guibutton>Дозволити всім +користувачам</guibutton>, якщо доступ слід дозволити всім, і +<guibutton>Спеціальний</guibutton>, якщо слід деяким користувачам заборонити +доступ, а деяким надати. У останньому випадку, користувачі, які матимуть +доступ до надання каталогів у спільне користування, мають належати до групи +fileshare, яку буде автоматично створено системою. Додаткове питання щодо +цього буде задано програмою на наступних кроках налаштовування.</para> + + <para>Після натискання кнопки <guilabel>Гаразд</guilabel> з’явиться друга сторінка +налаштувань, за допомогою якої ви зможете вибрати тип спільних ресурсів, +<guibutton>NFS</guibutton> або <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. Виберіть варіант +<guibutton>NFS</guibutton>, якщо єдиною операційною системою у локальній +мережі є Linux. Якщо ж у мережі є комп’ютери під керуванням Windows, +виберіть пункт <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. Щойно вибір буде зроблено, +натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>. Якщо це потрібно, система +виконає встановлення необхідних для роботи з новими налаштуваннями пакунків.</para> + + <para>Якщо не було вибрано варіант «Спеціальний», на цьому налаштовування буде +завершено. Якщо ж ви вибрали варіант «Спеціальний», з’явиться додаткова +сторінка, на якій програма попросить вас відкрити вікно програми +Userdrake. За допомогою Userdrake ви зможете додати користувачів, яким буде +дозволено надавати каталоги у спільне користування, до групи fileshare. На +вкладці «Користувачі» натисніть пункт користувача, якого слід додати до цієї +групи, потім натисніть кнопку <guimenuitem>Виправити</guimenuitem>, на +вкладці «Групи». Позначте пункт групи fileshare і натисніть кнопку +<guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>. Докладніший опис програми Userdrake можна +знайти на <link ns2:href="userdrake.xml">цій сторінці</link>.</para> + + <para/> + + <note> + <para>Щоб внесені вами зміни набули чинності, після додавання нового користувача +до групи fileshare, слід від’єднати комп’ютер від локальної мережі, а потім +встановити з’єднання повторно.</para> + </note> + + <para>Після цієї операції кожен з учасників групи fileshare зможе просто позначити +у програмі для керування файлами свого графічного середовища пункт каталогу, +дані з якого слід надати у спільне користування, і скористатися можливостями +з надання спільного доступу цієї програми (такі можливості передбачено не у +всіх програмах).</para> + +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--nfs.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--nfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8076fa18 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--nfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-ti1">Налаштування спільного доступу до дисків і тек NFS</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --nfs</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-im1" +align="center" fileref="diskdrake--nfs.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <para>.</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Вступ</title> + + <para>За допомогою цієї програми<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> ви можете +оголосити деякі з каталогів спільного користування доступними всім +користувачам комп’ютера. Використаний для цього протокол — NFS, протокол, що +використовується у більшості систем Linux або Unix. Такі спільні каталоги +стануть доступними для користувачів одразу після завантаження +системи. Доступ до спільних каталогів можна здійснювати безпосередньо з +робочого сеансу користувача за допомогою програм для керування файлами.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Процедура</title> + + <para>Натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Пошук серверів</guibutton>, щоб отримати список +серверів, які надають каталоги у спільне користування.</para> + + <para>Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the +shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para> + + <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs2.png"> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Стане доступною кнопка <guibutton>Точка монтування</guibutton>, за допомогою +якої ви зможете вказати точку монтування для каталогу.</para> + + <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs3.png"> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Після вибору точки монтування ви можете наказати системі змонтувати +каталог. Ви також можете перевірити або змінити параметри монтування за +допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Параметри</guibutton>. Після монтування каталогу +його можна демонтувати за допомогою тієї самої кнопки.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Після підтвердження налаштувань натисканням кнопки +<guibutton>Зроблено</guibutton> система попросить вас відповісти на питання +щодо того, чи бажаєте ви зберегти внесені зміни до /etc/fstab. Внесення змін +до цього файла зробить каталог доступним одразу після завантаження системи, +якщо локальна мережа є доступною. Після цього доступ до нового каталогу +можна буде здійснювати за допомогою програми для керування файлами вашої +системи, наприклад Dolphin.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs6.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--removable.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--removable.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87b55d01 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--removable.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="diskdrake--removable" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--removable-ti1">Програма для запису КД/DVD</title><subtitle>diskdrake --removable</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="diskdrake--removable-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="diskdrake--removable.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance. </para> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> від імені +адміністратора (root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--smb.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--smb.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7285faec --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--smb.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="diskdrake--smb" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--smb-ti1">Налаштування спільного доступу до дисків і тек Windows (SMB)</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --smb</subtitle> + + </info> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Вступ</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> allows you to declare which +shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The +protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) +systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared +directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with +tools such as file browsers.</para> + + <para>До запуску цієї програми варто визначити назви доступних серверів, наприклад +за допомогою <xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Процедура</title> + + <para>Натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Пошук серверів</guibutton>, щоб отримати список +серверів, які надають каталоги у спільне користування.</para> + + <para>Натисніть пункт з назвою сервера, а потім кнопку «>» перед цією назвою, +щоб переглянути список спільних каталогів. Позначте пункт каталогу, до якого +ви хочете отримати доступ.</para> + + <para>Стане доступною кнопка <guibutton>Точка монтування</guibutton>, за допомогою +якої ви зможете вказати точку монтування для каталогу.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Після вибору точки монтування ви можете наказати системі змонтувати каталог +за допомогою кнопки <guimenu>Монтувати</guimenu>. Ви також можете перевірити +або змінити параметри монтування за допомогою кнопки +<guibutton>Параметри</guibutton>.</para> + + <para>За допомогою вікна параметрів ви можете вказати ім’я користувача і пароль, +яким мають користуватися ті, хто хоче з’єднатися з сервером SMB. Після +монтування каталогу його можна демонтувати за допомогою тієї самої кнопки.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Після підтвердження налаштувань натисканням кнопки +<guibutton>Зроблено</guibutton> система попросить вас відповісти на питання +щодо того, чи бажаєте ви зберегти внесені зміни до /etc/fstab. Внесення змін +до цього файла зробить каталог доступним одразу після завантаження системи, +якщо локальна мережа є доступною. Після цього доступ до нового каталогу +можна буде здійснювати за допомогою програми для керування файлами вашої +системи, наприклад Dolphin.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drak3d.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drak3d.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1283b9e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drak3d.xml @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drak3d" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drak3d-ti1">Ефекти 3D-стільниці</title> + + <subtitle>drak3d</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im1" revision="1" align="center" +fileref="drak3d.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>Вступ</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drak3d</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> lets you manage the 3D +desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by +default.</para> + </section> + + <section annotations="center"> + <title>Початкові зауваження</title> + + <para>Щоб скористатися цим інструментом, вам слід встановити пакунок glxinfo. Якщо +цей пакунок ще не було встановлено, система попросить вас встановити його до +того, як запустить drak3d.</para> + + <para>After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window. Here you +can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or +<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a +composite/window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special +effects for your desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn +it on.</para> + + <para>If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of +Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be +installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the +<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button to continue.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im3" +fileref="drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Щойно буде встановлено відповідні пакунки, ви побачите позначений пункт +Compiz Fusion у меню drak3d. Втім, для користування новими ефектами слід +вийти з облікового запису користувача і знову увійти до нього.</para> + + <para>Після повторного входу до системи буде задіяно Compiz Fusion. Налаштувати +Compiz Fusion можна за допомогою програми ccsm (CompizConfig Settings +Manager).</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Вирішення проблем</title> + + <section> + <title>Після входу до системи не видно стільниці</title> + + <para>Якщо після вмикання Compiz Fusion і спроби увійти до облікового запису, ви +нічого не побачите, перезавантажте операційну систему, щоб повернутися до +вікна входу до системи. У цьому вікні натисніть кнопку «Стільниця» і +виберіть drak3d.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" format="PNG"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Після входу до системи, якщо ваш обліковий запис є адміністративним, система +попросить вас ввести пароль до вашого облікового запису. Якщо ж ваш +обліковий запис не є адміністративним, скористайтеся обліковим записом +адміністратора. Після входу до адміністративного облікового запису ви +зможете скасувати зміни у системі, які призвели до її непрацездатності.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakauth.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakauth.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0b7266bf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakauth.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakauth" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakauth-ti1">Authentication</title> + + <subtitle>drakauth</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakauth.png" format="PNG" +revision="1" xml:id="drakauth-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakauth</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para></footnote> enables you to modify the +manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net.</para> + + <para>By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your +computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so +and give information about that.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot--boot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot--boot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ca83778c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot--boot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakboot--boot"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakboot--boot-ti1">Set up boot system</title> + + <subtitle>drakboot --boot</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakboot--boot.png" +align="center" xml:id="drakboot--boot-im1" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>this tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakboot --boot</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> allows you to configure the +boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default boot, +etc.)</para> + + <para>It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up +boot system".</para> + + <warning> + <para>Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing. Changing +some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !</para> + </warning> + + <para>In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible to +choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub or Lilo, and +with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question of taste, there are +no other consequences. You can also set the <guibutton>Boot +device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you are an expert. The +boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any modification can +prevent you machine from booting.</para> + + <para>In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set +the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in +seconds. During this delay, grub or Lilo will display the list of available +operating systems, prompting you to make your choice, if no selection is +made, the bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses.</para> + + <para>In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is +possible to set a password.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton></para> + + <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the +power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was +the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI +compatible.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton></para> + + <para>SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for +multicore processors.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual +processor and enable SMP.</para> + </note> + + <para><guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local +APIC:</guibutton></para> + + <para>APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two +components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O +APIC. This one routes the interrupts it receives them from peripheral buses +to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful +for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC +system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message +"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local +APIC.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Clean /tmp at each boot:</guibutton></para> + + <para>If checked, this option will empty the /tmp directory at each boot, +preventing it from become too big and clearing the trackings that don't need +to be kept.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakboot1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen, you can see the list of all the +available entries at boot time. The default one is asterisked. To change the +order of the menu entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the +selected item. If you click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or +<guibutton>Modify </guibutton>buttons, a new window appears to add a new +entry in the Grub menu or to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar +with Lilo or Grub to be able to use these tools.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakboot2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want +to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command "title". For +example: Mageia3.</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches +the Grub command "kernel". For example /boot/vmlinuz.</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the +kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command "root". For example (hd0,1).</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to +the kernel at boot time.</para> + + <para>If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this +entry by default.</para> + + <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to +chose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> +file and a Network profile in the drop-down lists. (Complements needed)</para> + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakboot --boot</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c9cfebb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakboot"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakboot-ti1">Set up autologin to automatically log in</title> + + <subtitle>drakboot</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakboot-im1" +fileref="drakboot.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakboot</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> allows you to automatically +login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without asking for any +password. It's called autologin. This is generally a good idea when there +is only one user like to be using the machine.</para> + + <para>It is found under the <emphasis role="bold">Boot</emphasis> tab in the +Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up autologin to automatically log in".</para> + + <para>The interface buttons are pretty obvious:</para> + + <para>Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system +starts</guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the +boot. If not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be +possible to launch the graphic interface manually.</para> + + <para>If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either +<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to +continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check +<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if +needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default +username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakclock.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakclock.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e7901c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakclock.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakclock"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakclock-ti1">Керування параметрами дати і часу</title> + + <subtitle>drakclock</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakclock.png" xml:id="drakclock-im1" +revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakclock</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> is found under the tab System +in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>"Manage date and +time"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a +right click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray.</para> + + <para>Це дуже проста програма.</para> + + <para>У верхній лівій частині розташовано панель <emphasis +role="bold">календаря</emphasis>. На наведеному вище знімку вікна показано +дату: «квітень» (у верхньому лівому куті), 2013 (у верхньому правому куті), +6 число (синім кольором), неділя. Вибрати місяць (або рік) можна натисканням +маленьких стрілочок з боків від напису «квітень» (або «2013»). День можна +вибрати натисканням відповідного пункту у календарі.</para> + + <para>У нижній лівій частині вікна розташовано панель синхронізації <emphasis +role="bold">Протокол Network Time</emphasis>. Ви можете підтримувати завжди +точні покази годинника за допомогою синхронізації часу з сервером. Позначте +пункт <guilabel>Увімкнути протокол Network Time</guilabel> і виберіть +найближчий до вашого розташування сервер.</para> + + <para>У правій частині вікна розташовано панель <emphasis +role="bold">годинника</emphasis>. Якщо увімкнено NTP, зміна показаний на ній +даних не має сенсу. У трьох полях годинника показано значення годин, хвилин +та секунд (17, 8 і 13 на знімку вікна). Скористайтеся невеличкими +стрілочками, щоб встановити на годиннику належне значення часу. Формат +показу часу змінити не можна. Для зміни формату показу скористайтеся +відповідною програмою з вашого стільничного середовища.</para> + + <para>Нарешті, у правій нижній частині вікна можна вибрати часовий пояс. Для цього +слід натиснути кнопку <guibutton>Змінити часовий пояс</guibutton> і вибрати +відповідний пункт з наданого списку.</para> + + <note> + <para>Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they +will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation +settings.</para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect--del.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect--del.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43ee6238 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect--del.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakconnect--del" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakconnect--del-ti1">Remove a connection</title><subtitle>drakconnect --del</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakconnect--del-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect--del.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here, you can delete a network interface<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakconnect --del</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para></footnote>.</para> + <para>Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then +click <emphasis>next</emphasis>.</para> + <para>You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted +successfully.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f57e9333 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect.xml @@ -0,0 +1,820 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakconnect"> + <info annotations="simonnzg listened to Aicha by Khaled & Faudel whilst editing this document."> + <title xml:id="drakconnect-ti1">Налаштовування нового мережевого інтерфейсу (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)</title> + + <subtitle>drakconnect</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakconnect-im1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>Вступ</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakconnect</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> allows to configure much of +local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from +your access provider or your network administrator.</para> + + <para>Виберіть тип з’єднання, яке слід налаштувати. Тип визначається використаним +вами обладнанням та параметрами роботи компанії-надавача послуг.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Нове дротове з’єднання (Ethernet)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>У першому вікні буде показано список доступних інтерфейсів. Виберіть той з +них, який слід налаштувати.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>На цьому кроці можна визначитися зі способом отримання комп’ютером +IP-адреси: автоматично або вручну.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Автоматична IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Ethernet/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме +комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано +вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати +адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо +назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, +<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано +сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з +адреси DHCP</emphasis>. Можливість визначення назви вузла передбачено не на +всіх серверах DHCP. Якщо ви налаштовуєте ваш комп’ютер на отримання +IP-адреси з домашнього маршрутизатора ADSL, навряд чи слід позначати цей +пункт.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakconnect5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна додатково вказати +такі параметри:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Домен пошуку (не можна вказати, якщо адреса надається сервером DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Клієнт DHCP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Затримку DHCP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Отримати сервери YP з DHCP (типово позначено): вкажіть сервер NIS</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Отримати сервери NTPD з DHCP (визначає сервер синхронізації часу)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP потрібна назва вузла. Позначайте цей пункт, лише якщо сервер DHCP +вимагає від своїх клієнтів вказувати назву вузла до призначення +IP-адреси. Цей пункт може не працювати на деяких серверах DHCP.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Після підтвердження внесених змін наступні кроки налаштовування може бути +виконано у загальний для всіх типів з’єднання спосіб: <xref +linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Налаштування вручну</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Ethernet/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме +комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано +вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати +адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо +назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, +<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>.</para> + + <para>У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат: +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А дані щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна +отримати з сайта вашого постачальника послуг.</para> + + <para>За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен +пошуку</emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої +частини, до крапки. Наприклад, якщо ваш комп’ютер має назву «comp1», а його +повна назва у домені — «comp1.domivka.net», доменом пошуку має бути +«domivka.net». Якщо вам точно не відомо, чи слід вказувати якийсь домен +пошуку, його можна просто не вказувати. Знову ж таки, цей пункт не потрібен +для налаштування домашнього ADSL.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakconnect30.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Нове супутникове з’єднання (DVB)</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Нове кабельне з’єднання за допомогою модема</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>У першому вікні буде показано список доступних інтерфейсів. Виберіть той з +них, який слід налаштувати.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>На цьому кроці можна визначитися зі способом отримання комп’ютером +IP-адреси: автоматично або вручну.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Вам слід вказати спосіб розпізнавання (автентифікації):</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Немає</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>BPALogin (потрібен для Telstra). У цьому випадку вам слід вказати ім’я +користувача і пароль.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Автоматична IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Кабельний/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, +отримуватиме комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде +вказано вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде +вказати адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла +комп’ютера. Якщо назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, +<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано +сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з +адреси DHCP</emphasis>. Можливість визначення назви вузла передбачено не на +всіх серверах DHCP. Якщо ви налаштовуєте ваш комп’ютер на отримання +IP-адреси з домашнього маршрутизатора ADSL, навряд чи слід позначати цей +пункт.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна додатково вказати +такі параметри:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Домен пошуку (не можна вказати, якщо адреса надається сервером DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Клієнт DHCP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Затримку DHCP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Отримати сервери YP з DHCP (типово позначено): вкажіть сервер NIS</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Отримати сервери NTPD з DHCP (визначає сервер синхронізації часу)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP потрібна назва вузла. Позначайте цей пункт, лише якщо сервер DHCP +вимагає від своїх клієнтів вказувати назву вузла до призначення +IP-адреси. Цей пункт може не працювати на деяких серверах DHCP.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Після підтвердження внесених змін наступні кроки налаштовування може бути +виконано у загальний для всіх типів з’єднання спосіб: <xref +linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Налаштування вручну</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Кабельний/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, +отримуватиме комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде +вказано вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде +вказати адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла +комп’ютера. Якщо назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, +<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>.</para> + + <para>У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат: +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А дані щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна +отримати з сайта вашого постачальника послуг.</para> + + <para>За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен +пошуку</emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої +частини, до крапки. Наприклад, якщо ваш комп’ютер має назву «comp1», а його +повна назва у домені — «comp1.domivka.net», доменом пошуку має бути +«domivka.net». Якщо вам точно не відомо, чи слід вказувати якийсь домен +пошуку, його можна просто не вказувати. Знову ж таки, цей пункт не потрібен +для налаштування домашнього з’єднання.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakconnect32.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Нове DSL-з’єднання</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Якщо програмою буде виявлено інтерфейси мережі, вона запропонує вибрати один +з них і налаштувати його.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Програма запропонує список компаній, які буде розподілено за +країнами. Виберіть вашу компанію. Якщо її пункту немає у списку, виберіть +пункт <guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть параметри, надані +вам постачальником послуг.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Виберіть один з доступних протоколів:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Протокол динамічної конфігурації клієнта (DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Налаштування TCP/IP вручну</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PPP через ADSL (PPPoA)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PPP через Ethernet (PPoE)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Протокол тунелю точка-до-точки (PPTP)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Параметри доступу</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Рахунок користувача (ім'я користувача)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Пароль рахунка</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>(Додатково) Віртуальний шлях ID (VPI)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>(Додатково) Віртуальний коловий ID (VCI)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Нове ISDN-з’єднання</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Програма-майстер попросить вас вказати пристрій для налаштовування:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Вибір вручну (Внутрішня плата ISDN)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Зовнішній модем ISDN</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Програма запропонує вам список обладнання, розподіленого за категоріями та +виробниками. Виберіть вашу картку.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Виберіть один з доступних протоколів:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Протокол для всього іншого світу, окрім Європи (DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Європейський протокол (EDSS1)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Програма запропонує список компаній, які буде розподілено за +країнами. Виберіть вашу компанію. Якщо її пункту немає у списку, виберіть +пункт <guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть параметри, надані +вам постачальником послуг. Після цього програма попросить вас вказати такі +дані:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Назва зв'язку</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Номер телефону</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>ID користувача</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Пароль рахунка</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Метод автентифікації</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Після цього виберіть спосіб отримання IP-адреси: автоматично чи вручну. У +другому випадку вкажіть IP-адресу і маску підмережі.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>На наступному кроці слід вибрати спосіб отримання адрес серверів DNS: +автоматично чи вручну. У випадку визначення вручну вам слід вказати такі +дані:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Назва домену</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Перший і другий сервер DNS</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Вкажіть, чи слід визначати назву вузла на основі IP-адреси. Цей пункт слід +позначати, лише якщо вам відомо, що постачальником послуг передбачено таке +визначення.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>На наступному кроці слід вибрати спосіб, у який комп’ютер отримуватиме +адресу шлюзу, автоматично чи вручну. Якщо ви виберете спосіб отримання +вручну, вам доведеться вказати IP-адресу.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Нове бездротове з’єднання (WiFi)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>На першій сторінці буде показано список доступних інтерфейсів та пункт для +драйвера Windows (ndiswrapper). Виберіть інтерфейс, який ви хочете +налаштувати. Скористайтеся пунктом ndiswrapper, лише якщо інші способи +налаштовування не призведуть до бажаних результатів.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>На цьому кроці ви зможете вибрати потрібну вам точку доступу зі списку +точок, які було виявлено карткою.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Специфічний параметр для карток бездротового зв’язку:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakconnect31.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Режим роботи:</para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Керується</term> + + <listitem> + <para>Для отримання доступу до точки доступу (найпоширеніший випадок).</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Ad-Hoc</term> + + <listitem> + <para>Для налаштовування безпосереднього з’єднання між комп’ютерами.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Мережне ім'я (ESSID)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Режим шифрування, залежить від параметрів налаштування вашої точки доступу.</para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>WPA/WPA2</term> + + <listitem> + <para>Варто використовувати саме цей режим шифрування, якщо його підтримку +передбачено з боку вашого обладнання.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>WEP</term> + + <listitem> + <para>На застарілому обладнанні можливе використання лише цього способу +шифрування.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Ключ шифрування</para> + + <para>Зазвичай надається разом з обладнанням, яке працює як точка доступу.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>На цьому кроці можна вибрати між автоматичним призначенням IP-адреси та +визначенням її вручну.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Автоматична IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме +комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано +вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати +адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо +назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, +<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано +сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з +адреси DHCP</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна додатково вказати +такі параметри:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Домен пошуку (не можна вказати, якщо адреса надається сервером DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Клієнт DHCP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Затримку DHCP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Отримати сервери YP з DHCP (типово позначено): вкажіть сервери NIS</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Отримати сервери NTPD з DHCP (визначає сервер синхронізації часу)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP потрібна назва вузла. Позначайте цей пункт, лише якщо сервер DHCP +вимагає від своїх клієнтів вказувати назву вузла до призначення +IP-адреси. Цей пункт може не працювати на деяких серверах DHCP.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Після підтвердження налаштувань, визначених цим кроком, програма перейде до +кроку, який є спільним для всіх налаштовувань з’єднань: <xref +linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Налаштування вручну</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід вказати сервери DNS. Тут також +можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо назву вузла не буде вказано, +типово буде призначено назву <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>.</para> + + <para>У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат: +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А дані щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна +отримати з сайта вашого постачальника послуг.</para> + + <para>За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен +пошуку</emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої +частини, до крапки.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Нове з’єдднання GPRS/Edge/3G</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Якщо програмою буде виявлено інтерфейси бездротової мережі, вона запропонує +вибрати один з них і налаштувати його.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Програма попросить вас вказати PIN-код. Не вказуйте, якщо PIN не потрібен.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Програма запропонує список компаній, які буде розподілено за +країнами. Виберіть вашу компанію. Якщо її пункту немає у списку, виберіть +пункт <guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть параметри, надані +вам постачальником послуг.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Вкажіть параметри доступу</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Назва точки доступу</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Рахунок користувача (ім'я користувача)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Пароль рахунка</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Нове з’єднання комутованого доступу до мережі з Bluetooth</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Нове аналогове телефонне з’єднання за допомогою модема (POTS)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Програма-майстер попросить вас вказати пристрій для налаштовування:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Вибір вручну</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Виявлене обладнання, якщо обладнання вдасться виявити.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Список запропонованих портів. Виберіть потрібний вам порт.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Якщо цей пакунок ще не встановлено, програма запропонує встановити пакунок +<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Вам буде запропоновано список постачальників послуг, поділений за +країнами. Виберіть у ньому пункт вашого постачальника. Якщо відповідного +пункту у списку не виявиться, виберіть пункт <guilabel>Не +показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть значення параметрів, надані вашим +постачальником послуг. Після цього програма попросить вас вказати параметри +додзвону:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Назва з’єднання</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Номер телефону</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Ідентифікатор користувача</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Пароль</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Розпізнавання</emphasis>, виберіть один з таких варіантів:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>PAP/CHAP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>На основі скрипту</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PAP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>На основі термінала</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>CHAP</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakconnect-end"> + <title>Завершення налаштовування</title> + + <para>На наступному кроці ви можете вказати такі параметри:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Дозволити користувачам керувати з’єднанням</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>З’єднуватися під час завантаження</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Увімкнути облік потоку даних</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Дозволити керування інтерфейсом за допомогою Network +Manager</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>У випадку бездротового з’єднання буде показано додатковий пункт +<emphasis>Дозволити роумінг точки доступу</emphasis>. За допомогою цього +пункту можна надати комп’ютеру змогу автоматично перемикатися між точками +доступу відповідно до потужності сигналу.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> ви можете вказати:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Метрику (типово 10)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>MTU</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Увімкнення мережі «вгарячу»</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Увімкнути тунелювання з IPv6 до IPv4</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>На останньому кроці можна визначити, чи буде виконано спробу з’єднатися +негайно.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakconnect9.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconsole.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconsole.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8563c017 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconsole.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakconsole"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakconsole-ti1">Відкриття консолі від імені адміністратора</title> + + <subtitle>drakconsole</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakconsole-im1" fileref="drakconsole.png" +revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakconsole</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> gives you access to a console +which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more +information about that.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakdisk.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakdisk.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..068da86f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakdisk.xml @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakdisk"> + + + + + <info> + <!-- + lebarhon 2012-08-30 Added some comments. Imho, the option button needs explanations --> +<!--marja 2012-09-02 changed title to visible title for this tool in MCC --> +<title xml:id="drakdisk-ti1">Керування розділами диска</title> + + <subtitle>drakdisk або diskdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskBackup-im1" revision="1" +fileref="drakdiskBackup.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <warning> + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakdisk</emphasis> або <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> is very powerful, a tiny +error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a +partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll +see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on +<emphasis>Exit</emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue.</para> + </warning> + + <para>Якщо у вашій системі декілька жорстких дисків, ви можете перемкнутися на +потрібний вам жорсткий диск вибором відповідної вкладки (sda, sdb, sdc +тощо).</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakdisk-im1" +fileref="drakdisk.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Ви можете вибрати одну з багатьох дій, за допомогою яких ви можете +скоригувати розподіл вашого диска відповідно до ваших потреб. Витирання +всього жорсткого диска, поділ та об’єднання розділів, зміна розмірів +розділів або файлової системи розділів, форматування або перегляд вмісту +розділу: все це можна зробити за допомогою цієї програми. Кнопку +<emphasis><guibutton>Очистити все</guibutton></emphasis> у нижній частині +вікна призначено для витирання всього диска. Доступ до інших кнопок дій, +розташованих праворуч, можна отримати після натискання розділу на картинці +диска.</para> + + <para>If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot +choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition +must be unmounted first.</para> + + <para>Зміну розмірів розділу можна виконувати лише за рахунок правої межі розділу.</para> + + <para>Щоб змінити тип розділу (наприклад, з ext3 на ext4), вам слід вилучити +розділ, а потім повторно створити його з новим значенням типу. Якщо буде +позначено порожню частину диска, у вікні програми з’явиться кнопка +<guibutton role="bold">Створити</guibutton>.</para> + + <para>Ви можете вибрати точку монтування, якої не існує. Якщо буде здійснено такий +вибір, відповідну точку монтування буде створено.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskMountedPartition-im1" revision="1" +fileref="drakdiskMountedPartition.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Натискання кнопки <emphasis><guibutton>Перемкнути в режим +експерта</guibutton></emphasis> надасть вам доступ до додаткових дій, +зокрема визначення мітки розділу, як це показано на наведеному нижче знімку.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakdiskExpertUnmounted-im1" +align="center" fileref="drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" format="PNG"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakedm.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakedm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d101245 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakedm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakedm" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + + + <!--2012-09-03 marja: changed title to the title of this screen in MCC --> +<title xml:id="drakedm-ti1">Налаштування програми для керування сеансами</title> + + <subtitle>drakedm</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakedm-im1" revision="1" align="center" +format="PNG" fileref="drakedm.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa1">Here<footnote> + <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa3">Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakedm</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> you can choose which display +manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available +on your system will be shown.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa2">Більшість користувачів помітять лише те, що зміниться вікно входу до +системи. Втім, різні менеджери реєстрації мають також і різні +можливості. LXDM є найневибагливішим і найпростішим, KDM і GDM мають значно +ширші можливості.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfirewall.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfirewall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b0f44e60 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfirewall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakfirewall" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakfirewall-ti1">Set up your personal firewall</title> + + <subtitle>drakfirewall</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakfirewall.png" +align="center" xml:id="drakfirewall-im1" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakfirewall</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> is found under the Security +tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up your personal +firewall". it is the same tool in the first tab of "Configure system +security, permissions and audit"</para> + + <para>A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming +connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the +first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection +attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - +<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable +the firewall, and only check the needed services.</para> + + <para>It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on +<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field +<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these +examples :</para> + + <para>80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol</para> + + <para>24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol</para> + + <para>The listed ports should be separated by a space.</para> + + <para>If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is +checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) +it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even +recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet.</para> + </note> + + <para>The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature +allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box +<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second +box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure +somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards +corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot +below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be +warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports.</para> + + <para>These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the +Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary +packages are downloaded.</para> + + <tip> + <para>If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network & +Internet, icon Set up a new network interface.</para> + </tip> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfloppy-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfloppy-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d06ae8d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfloppy-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakfloppy"> + <info> + <title revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-ti1">DrakFloppy: Creating a Boot Disk</title> + + <abstract> + <para xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-it1"> + <primary>boot disk</primary> + + <secondary>creating</secondary> + </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakfloppy-it2"> + <primary>applications</primary> + + <secondary>DrakFloppy</secondary> + </indexterm><inlinemediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="../drakfloppy-icon.png" +width="2cm" format="PNG"></imagedata> </imageobject></inlinemediaobject>If you did not create +a boot disk when you installed your system, this tool allows you to do +so. This is also a rescue disk which allows you to perform maintenance tasks +on your system in case of failure.</para> + </abstract> + </info> + + <section condition="basic"> + <info> + <title revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-ti3">Using DrakFloppy</title> + </info> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa6">If you want to create a <quote>default</quote> boot disk, that is, one that +is based on your current kernel, all you have to do is insert a floppy disk +in the appropriate floppy drive, select that drive from the +<guilabel>Device</guilabel> pull-down list and press the +<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button. A dialog will pop up and remind you that a +diskette must be inserted in the drive. Accept it to create the disk.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa7">If you want to customize your boot disk, you will have to hit the +<guibutton>Preferences</guibutton> button and a window will pop up (see +<xref linkend="drakfloppy-custom-disk"></xref>).</para> + + <figure floatstyle="normal" xml:id="drakfloppy-custom-disk"> +<info> + <title xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-ti4">Making a Custom Boot Disk</title> + </info> <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="2" fileref="drakfloppy-custom-disk.png" +align="center" width="11.5cm" format="PNG" +xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa8">The window has two sections: one containing check boxes with options for +<command>mkinitrd</command>, and another one with the modules +<quote>tree</quote>. Select the modules you need to be added to the +floppy. In this example, we want to use the <acronym>IDE</acronym> tape +module and pre-load it. Use the <guibutton>Remove a module</guibutton> +button to remove the currently selected module. When you are done +customizing the boot disk press the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, return +to <application>drakfloppy</application>'s window and then proceed as +indicated above to create the disk.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfont.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfont.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2f78da43 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfont.xml @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakfont"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakfont-ti1">Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts</title> + + <subtitle>drakfont</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakfont-im1" +fileref="drakfont.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakfont</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis> tab. It +allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen +above shows:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>the installed font names, styles and sizes.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>a preview of the selected font.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>some buttons explained here later.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Отримати шрифти з Windows: <emphasis/></emphasis></para> + + <para>This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You +must have Microsoft Windows installed.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Параметри:</emphasis></para> + + <para>It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly) able +to use the fonts.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Вилучити:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place. Be +careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the +documents that use them.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Імпортувати:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The +supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the +<emphasis role="bold">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis +role="bold">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the +fonts to install, click on <emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis> when +done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts.</para> + + <para>If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont +main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakguard.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakguard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f77f7d04 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakguard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakguard"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakguard-ti1">Parental Controls</title> + + <subtitle>drakguard</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakguard.png" revision="1" +xml:id="drakguard-im1" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakguard</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental +Control</guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the +drakguard package (not installed by default).</para> + + <section> + <title>Presentation</title> + + <para>Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to +restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three +useful capabilities:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by +controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can +only execute what you accept them to execute.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through +blacklists/whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the +website. To achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental +control blocker DansGuardian.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Configuring Parental controls</title> + + <para><warning> + <para>If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, +Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on +your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel +feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named +users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by +an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this +prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will +then suggest you reboot.</para> + </warning><guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental +control is enable and the Block programm tab</para> + + <para><guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the +websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all +the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab.</para> + + <para><guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have +their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the +right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are +not inconvenienced. Select an user in the left hand side and click +on<guibutton> Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user. Select an +user in the right hand side and click on<guibutton> Remove</guibutton> to +remove him/her from the allowed users.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Time control: </guibutton>If checked, internet access is allowed +with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and +<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time +window.<guibutton/></para> + + <section> + <title>Blacklist/Whitelist tab</title> + + <para>Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Block Programs Tab</title> + + <para><guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to +restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the +applications you wish to block.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand +side will not be subject to acl blocking.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakgw.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakgw.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e6e0fd3d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakgw.xml @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakgw" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakgw-ti1">Share the Internet connection with other local machines</title> + + <subtitle>drakgw</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakgw.png" format="PNG" +revision="1" xml:id="drakgw-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-principles"> + <title>Principles</title> + + <para><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakgw-net.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>This is useful when you have a +computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local +network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to +other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the +gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card +must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to +the Internet (2).</para> + + <para>The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are +set up, as documented in <xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-wizard"> + <title>Gateway wizard</title> + + <para>The wizard<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakgw</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> offers successive steps +which are shown below:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this +and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard +automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that +what is proposed is correct.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes +one, check that this is correct.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask +and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual +configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>bind</code> is installed. Otherwise, you have to +specify the address of a DNS server.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure +it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, +with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the +proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to +printers and to share them.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para>You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-configure"> + <title>Configure the client</title> + + <para>If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to +specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address +automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting +to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is +using.</para> + + <para>If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular +specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the +gateway.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-stop"> + <title>Stop connection sharing</title> + + <para>If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch +the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the +sharing.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakhosts.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakhosts.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1eb9f13 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakhosts.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakhosts" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakhosts-ti1">Hosts definitions</title> + + <subtitle>drakhosts</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakhosts.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="drakhosts-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed +IP-addresses, this tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakhosts</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> allows to +specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name +instead of the IP-address.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Додати</guibutton></para> + + <para>With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window +to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an +alias which can be used in the same way that the name is.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Змінити</guibutton></para> + + <para>You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the +same window.</para> + + <para/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakinvictus.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakinvictus.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..41c2e31a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakinvictus.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakinvictus" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakinvictus-ti1">Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall</title><subtitle>drakinvictus</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakinvictus-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakinvictus.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakinvictus</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetcenter.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetcenter.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a418016 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetcenter.xml @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draknetcenter" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-31 +Write some text means i can't do it :( +What must we say about networks out of wired (Ethernet) and wireless (WI fi) like GPRS, bluetooth ? I can't write anything. +--> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="draknetcenter-ti1">Network Center</title> + + <subtitle>draknetcenter</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="draknetcenter.png" +align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="draknetcenter-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">draknetcenter</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> is found under the Network +& Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Network Center"</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Вступ</title> + + <para>When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks +configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, +etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending +on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its +settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a +network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, +ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab.</para> + + <para>In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the +first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"/> +</imageobject></inlinemediaobject> (this one is not connected<inlinemediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"/> +</imageobject></inlinemediaobject> ) and the second section shows wireless +networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterWireless-off.png"/> +</imageobject></inlinemediaobject> and this one <inlinemediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterWireless-on.png"/> +</imageobject></inlinemediaobject>if connected. For the other network types, +the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not +connected.</para> + + <para>In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected +networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal +strengh</guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and +the <guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then +either on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> +or <guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network +to another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings +window (see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption +key in particular).</para> + + <para>Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Monitor button</title> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the +PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is +available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray +-> Monitor Network</guimenu>.</para> + + <para>There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the +local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which +gives details about connection status.</para> + + <note> + <para>At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic +accounting</guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Configure button</title> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">A - For a wired network</emphasis></para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>It is possible to change all the settings given during network +creation. Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> +<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual +configuration may give better results.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks +like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the +<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are +available from your providers website.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count +the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in +the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may +have to reconnect to the network.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow interface to be controlled by Network +Manager:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">B - For a wireless network</emphasis></para> + + <para>Only the item not already seen above are explained.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Режим роботи:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access +point, there is an <emphasis role="bold">ESSID</emphasis> detected. Select +<guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select +<emphasis role="bold">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as the +access point, your network card needs to support this mode.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis></para> + + <para>If it is a private network, you need to know this settings.</para> + + <para><guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a +passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA +personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used +in private networks.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:</para> + + <para>Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access +point while remaining connected to the network.</para> + + <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter6.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Advanced Settings button</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter7.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetprofile.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetprofile.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..34f4ace8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetprofile.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draknetprofile" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draknetprofile-ti1">Manage different network profiles</title><subtitle>draknetprofile</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="draknetprofile-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draknetprofile.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">draknetprofile</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknfs.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b519e071 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="draknfs" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draknfs-ti1">Share drives and directories using NFS</title> + + <subtitle>draknfs</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs.png" format="PNG" +revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Prerequisites</title> + + <para>When the wizard<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">draknfs</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> is launched for the +first time, it may display the following message:</para> + + <blockquote> + <para>The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?</para> + </blockquote> + + <para>After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Main window</title> + + <para>A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list +is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a +configuration tool.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Modify entry</title> + + <para>The configuration tool is labeled "Modify entry". It may be also launched +with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are +available.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs4.png" format="PNG" +revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im4"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>NFS Directory</title> + + <para>Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The +<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose +it.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Host access</title> + + <para>Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared +directory.</para> + + <para>NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:</para> + + <para><emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name +recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address</para> + + <para><emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group.</para> + + <para><emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard +characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the +domain cs.foo.edu.</para> + + <para><emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all +hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either +`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>User ID Mapping</title> + + <para><emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid +0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client +cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on +the server itself.</para> + + <para><emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root +squashing. This option is mainly useful for diskless clients +(no_root_squash).</para> + + <para><emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids +to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP +directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID +mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting.</para> + + <para><emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of +the anonymous account.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Advanced options</title> + + <para><emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests +originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option +is on by default.</para> + + <para><emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read +and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any +request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by +using this option.</para> + + <para><emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from +violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made +by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive).</para> + + <para><emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can +help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See +exports(5) man page for more details.</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Menu entries</title> + + <para>So far the list is has at least one entry.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs5.png" format="PNG" +revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im5"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>File|Write conf</title> + + <para>Save the current configuration.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>NFS Server|Restart</title> + + <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>NFS Server|Reload</title> + + <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakproxy.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakproxy.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..474a5a42 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakproxy.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakproxy" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakproxy-ti1">Proxy</title> + + <subtitle>drakproxy</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakproxy.png" format="PNG" +revision="1" xml:id="drakproxy-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use +this tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakproxy</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> to configure it. Your net +administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify +some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception.</para> + + <para>From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a +proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts as +an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other +servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, +such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a +different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to +simplify and control their complexity.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-edit-media.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-edit-media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7eca406 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-edit-media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-ti1">Налаштувати джерело</title> + + <subtitle>drakrpm-edit-media</subtitle> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- 2013-01-06 marja - added Qilaq's and spturtle's corrections --> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-im1" +fileref="drakrpm-edit-media.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para><important> + <para>Одразу після встановлення системи слід додати записи джерел програмного +забезпечення (їх також називають сховищами, носіями даних, дзеркалами). Це +означає, що вам слід вибрати джерела програмного забезпечення, які буде +використано для встановлення і оновлення пакунків та програм (див. кнопку +<guilabel>Додати</guilabel>, описану нижче).</para> + </important><note> + <para>Ваша система може працювати на 32-бітовій апаратній архітектурі, яка +називається у дистрибутиві i586, або 64-бітовій архітектурі, яка має назву +x86_64. Вам слід вибрати сховища, які відповідають вашій системі та сховища +для пакунків, які не залежать від архітектури (їх ще називають noarch).</para> + </note></para> + + <para>Доступ до цієї програми можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, сторінка +<emphasis role="bold">Менеджер програм</emphasis><footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote>.</para> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-columns">Стовпчики</title> + + <bridgehead>Стовпчик «Доступний»:</bridgehead> + + <para>The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with +some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable.</para> + + <bridgehead>Стовпчик «Поновлення»:</bridgehead> + + <para>Якщо джерело буде використано для оновлення пакунків, його слід позначити у +цьому стовпчику. Має бути позначено лише джерела зі словом «Update» +(оновлення) у назві. З міркувань безпеки значення у цьому стовпчику не можна +змінювати за допомогою цієї програми. Вам доведеться відкрити консоль і від +імені адміністратора (root) віддати команду <emphasis +role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media --expert</emphasis>.</para> + + <bridgehead>Стовпчик «Джерело»:</bridgehead> + + <para>Тут буде показано назву джерела. Офіційні сховища Mageia для остаточних +випусків містять принаймні такі елементи:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs available +supported by Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs which +are not free</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there might +be patent claims in some countries.</para> + + <para>Кожен запис джерела містить 4 підрозділи:</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the this +version of Mageia was released.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since release +due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium enabled, +even with a very slow internet connection.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions +backported from Cauldron (the next version under development).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests +of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the +corrections.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-right-button">Кнопки на панелі праворуч</title> + + <para><guibutton>Вилучити:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Щоб вилучити джерело, наведіть на його пункт вказівник миші і клацніть лівою +кнопкою, потім натисніть цю кнопку. Іноді варто вилучити пункт носія, який +було використано для встановлення системи (компакт-диск або DVD) оскільки +всі пакунки з цього носія можна встановити з офіційного джерела основних +пакунків (Core) відповідного випуску.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Виправити:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Надає вам змогу вносити зміни до параметрів позначеного запису джерела +(адресу, програму для звантаження і параметри проксі-сервера).</para> + + <para><guibutton>Додати:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Кнопка для додавання офіційних сховищ з інтернету. У офіційних сховищах +містяться лише надійні і добре перевірені пакунки. Після натискання кнопки +<guibutton>Додати</guibutton> програма відкриє контекстне вікно, за +допомогою якого ви зможете вибрати набір джерел для встановлення: «Тільки +джерела з поновленнями» або «Повний набір джерел». Перший варіант є +мінімалістичним, другий — найкориснішим.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Кнопки зі стрілками вгору і вниз:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Ці кнопки призначено для впорядковування списку. Під час пошуків пакунків +програмою Drakrpm виконується завантаження списку сховищ у показаному +порядку, пакунок встановлюється зі сховища, яке стоятиме вище у списку (якщо +номер випуску пакунка є однаковим в усіх сховищах; якщо номер буде різним, +програма встановить пакунок з найсвіжішого випуску). Отже, якщо можна, +розташовуйте сховища з найшвидшим доступом на початку списку.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-menu">Меню програми</title> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu></para> + + <para>У відповідь на вибір цього пункту буде відкрито вікно зі списком +джерел. Виберіть ті з них, дані яких слід оновити, і натисніть кнопку +<guibutton>Оновити</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu></para> + + <para>Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's +too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the +actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them +out. Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose +between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the +<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by +clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakrpmEditMedia2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very +close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available +mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu></para> + + <para>Ви можете виконати встановлення з нового джерела (наприклад, зі стороннього +сховища спільноти), яке не підтримується офіційно спільнотою Mageia. У +відповідь на вибір цього пункту меню буде показано нове вікно:</para> + + <para><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>Виберіть тип джерела, вкажіть +коротку назву, яка добре описує відповідне сховище, і додайте адресу (або +шлях до джерела, залежно від його типу).</para> + + <para><guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu></para> + + <para>За допомогою цього пункту меню ви можете визначити, коли слід +<guilabel>Перевіряти пакунки, які встановлюються</guilabel> (завжди або +ніколи), визначити програму для отримання пакунків (curl, wget або aria2) і +вказати правила отримання даних щодо пакунків (на запит (типовий варіант), +тільки поновлення, завжди або ніколи).</para> + + <para><guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu></para> + + <para>З метою забезпечення кращої безпеки для розпізнавання джерела +використовуються цифрові ключі. Для кожного з джерел можна дозволити або +заборонити використання ключа. У вікні, яке буде відкрито, виберіть джерело +і натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Додати</guibutton>, щоб уможливити +використання нового ключа, або позначте пункт ключа і натисніть кнопку +<guibutton>Вилучити</guibutton>, щоб заборонити його використання.</para> + + <para><warning> + <para>Будьте обережними, як і з усіма іншими питаннями, пов’язаними з безпекою.</para> + </warning><guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu></para> + + <para>Якщо для доступу до інтернету з вашого комп’ютера слід користуватися +проксі-сервером, ви можете вказати параметри його роботи. Вам слід вказати +<guibutton>Назву проксі</guibutton> і, якщо потрібно, вказати +<guilabel>Користувача</guilabel> і <guilabel>Пароль</guilabel>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-update.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-update.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..320d5c9b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-update.xml @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakrpm-update" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-update-ti1">Software Packages Update (OLD)</title><subtitle>drakrpm-update</subtitle> + </info> + + + + <para>DON'T USE THIS FILE, USE MageiaUpdate.xml INSTEAD!</para> + + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksambashare.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksambashare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f356c963 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksambashare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,207 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="draksambashare" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksambashare-ti1">Share directories and drives with Samba</title> + + <subtitle>draksambashare</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Вступ</title> + + <para>Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some +resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure +the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is +also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the +resources of the Samba server.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Preparation</title> + + <para>To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP +address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with +<xref linkend="draknetcenter-ti1"/></para> + + <para>, or at the DHCP server which identifies the station with its MAC-address +and give it always the same address. The firewall has also to allow the +incoming requests to the Samba server.</para> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Wizard - Standalone server</title> + + <para>At the first run, the tools <footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">draksambashare</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> checks if +needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are not +yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare0.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare0-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already +selected.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare1.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare1-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the +access to the shared resources.</para> + + <para>The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on +the network.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare2.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare2-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the security mode:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the +resource</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for +each share</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP +addess or host name.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare3.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare3-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be +described in the Windows workstations.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare4.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im4"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare5.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im5"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the +configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in +<code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare6.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im6"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Wizard - Primary domain controller</title> + + <para><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draksambashare13.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>If the "Primary domain controller" +option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is to support or +not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are then the same +as for standalone server, except you can choose also the security mode:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and +group accounts in a central, shared, account repository. The centralized +account repository is shared between (security) controllers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Declare a directory to share</title> + + <para>With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare15.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im7"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the +<guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether +the directory is visible to the public, writable or browseable. The share +name can not be modified.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare16.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im8"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Menu entries</title> + + <para>When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used.</para> + + <formalpara> + <title>File|Write conf</title> + + <para>Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba server|Configure</title> + + <para>The wizard can be run again with this command.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba server|Restart</title> + + <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba Server|Reload</title> + + <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files.</para> + </formalpara> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Printers share</title> + + <para>Samba also allows you to share printers.</para> + + <para><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draksambashare17.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Samba users</title> + + <para>In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared +resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref +linkend="userdrake-ti1"/><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draksambashare18.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksec.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksec.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..90bab9c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksec.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="draksec"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksec-ti1">Configure authentication for Mageia tools</title> + + <subtitle>draksec</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="draksec-im1" revision="1" align="center" +format="PNG" fileref="draksec.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">draksec</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para> + + <para>It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks +usually done by the administrator.</para> + + <para>Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in +the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a +drop down list gives the choice between:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>No password: The tool is launched without asking any password.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Root password: the root password is asked before the tool launching</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The default values depend of the chosen security level. See in the same MCC +tab, the tool "Configure system security, permissions and audit".</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksnapshot-config.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksnapshot-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f6f2dd55 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksnapshot-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="draksnapshot-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksnapshot-config-ti1">Snapshots</title><subtitle>draksnapshot-config</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="draksnapshot-config-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draksnapshot-config.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>If you see the screen above when starting this tool, please close it. This +crash has been reported many times. </para> + + <para>You can read more about the problem in this bug report: <link +xlink:href="https://bugs.mageia.org/show_bug.cgi?id=3032">bug 3032</link></para> + + + <para>We shall replace the screenshot with a correct one of the tool, and fill +this page with instructions about how to use it, when the bug is fixed.</para> + + <!-- <para> +Write some text.</para> + <para>Write some text.</para> --> +<para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">draksnapshot-config</emphasis> від імені +адміністратора (root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksound.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksound.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c2584b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksound.xml @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draksound" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksound-ti1">Налаштовування звуку</title> + + <subtitle>draksound</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="draksound-im1" +fileref="draksound.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">draksound</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.¶</para> + + <para>Draksound deals with the sound configuration, including the driver choice, +PulseAudio options and trouble shooting. It will help you if you experience +sound problems or if you change the sound card.</para> + + <para>The drop down list called <guilabel>Driver</guilabel> allows you to select a +driver from all the ones available on the computer that match the sound +card.</para> + + <note> + <para>Most of the time, it is possible to choose a driver using the OSS or ALSA +API. OSS is the oldest and very basic, we recommend to choose ALSA when +possible for its enhanced features.</para> + </note> + + <para><guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound +inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting +sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio +volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences.</para> + + <para>PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it +enabled.</para> + + <para><guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It +is also recommended to leave it enabled.</para> + + <para>The button <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> display a new windows with three +buttons :</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Draksound1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The first button gives total freedom of choice. You have to know what you +are doing.</para> + + <para>The second one is obvious and the last one gives assistance with fixing any +problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this before asking +the community for help.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakups.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..13fe5abe --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakups" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakups-ti1">Set up a UPS for power monitoring</title><subtitle>drakups</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakups-im1" revision="1" align="center" +format="PNG" fileref="drakups.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakups</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakvpn.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakvpn.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..db35f02b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakvpn.xml @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakvpn"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakvpn-ti1">Configure VPN Connection to secure network access</title> + + <subtitle>drakvpn</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakvpn-im1" align="center" +fileref="drakvpn1.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>Вступ</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakvpn</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> allows to configure secure +access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local +workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the +configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is +already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the +network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file .</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Налаштування</title> + + <para>First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which +protocol is used for your virtual private network.</para> + + <para>Then give your connection a name.</para> + + <para>At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>For Cisco VPN</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakvpn3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the +first time the tools is used.</para> + + <para><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakvpn7.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>Select the files that you received +from the network administrator.</para> + + <para>Advanced parameters:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakvpn8.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN +connection.</para> + + <para>This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network +connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect +to this VPN.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_apache2.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_apache2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5831f2f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_apache2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_apache2" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-ti1">Configure webserver</title><subtitle>drakwizard apache2</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_apache2.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_bind.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_bind.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e567bb02 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_bind.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_bind" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_bind-ti1">Налаштовування DNS</title><subtitle>drakwizard bind</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_bind-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_bind.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard bind</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_dhcp.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_dhcp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..589a1660 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_dhcp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-ti1">Налаштовування DHCP</title><subtitle>drakwizard dhcp</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_dhcp.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_ntp.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_ntp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..db630bff --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_ntp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-ti1">Налаштовування часу</title><subtitle>drakwizard ntp</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_ntp.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_proftpd.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_proftpd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f29e8610 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_proftpd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-ti1">Налаштовування FTP</title><subtitle>drakwizard proftpd</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_proftpd.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_squid.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_squid.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff52604a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_squid.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_squid" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_squid-ti1">Налаштовування проксі-сервера</title><subtitle>drakwizard squid</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_squid.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard squid</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_sshd.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_sshd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d6919dbc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_sshd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_sshd" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-ti1">Налаштовування фонової служби OpenSSH</title><subtitle>drakwizard sshd</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_sshd.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0fcaf5ca --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml @@ -0,0 +1,729 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<chapter xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakx-MNF" ><info><title xml:id="drakx-title">Встановлення за допомогою DrakX</title></info> + + + + + + <section><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti1">Deprecated - Introduction to the MandrakeSecurity Installer</title></info> + + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa1"> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it31"> + <primary>DrakX</primary> </indexterm> <application>DrakX</application> is +<application>Mandrakesecurity</application>'s installation program. Its +ease of use has been enhanced with a graphical user interface, allowing you +to move forward and backward through the installation and prompting you when +required. With <application>DrakX</application>, it doesn't matter whether +you're a new user to <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> or an old +pro – <application>DrakX</application>'s job is to give you a smooth +installation and an easy transition into +<application>Mandrakesecurity</application>.</para> + + + <figure xml:id="dx-welcome"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti2">Very First Installation Welcome Screen</title></info> <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="../dx-MNF-welcome.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject></figure> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa2" revision="2">When you begin, the first screen that comes up will present some information +and give you installation options. (<xref linkend="dx-welcome"/>). Doing +nothing will simply begin the installation in normal or <quote>linux</quote> +mode. The next few paragraphs will go over some options and parameters that +you can pass to the install program if you run into problems.</para> + + <para condition="expert" xml:id="drakx-pa3a" revision="2">Pressing <keycap>F1</keycap> will open a help screen. Here are some useful +options to choose from:</para> + + + <itemizedlist condition="expert" xml:id="dx-help-options" revision="1"> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa3" revision="2"><literal>vgalo</literal>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it32"> <primary>installation options</primary><secondary>vgalo</secondary> </indexterm>if you tried +a default installation and did not see the graphical interface as shown +below in <xref linkend="drakxid-selectLanguage"/>, you can try to run the +installation in low resolution mode. This happens with certain types of +graphics cards, so with <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> we give +you a number of options to work around problems with older hardware. To try +the installation in low resolution mode, type <userinput>vgalo</userinput> +at the prompt.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa4"><literal>text</literal>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it33"> <primary>installation options</primary><secondary>text</secondary> </indexterm>if your video +card is very old and graphical installation does not work at all, you can +always choose the text mode installation. Because all video cards can +display text, this is the <quote>installation of last resort</quote>. Don't +worry though – it's not likely that you'll need to use the text install.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa5" revision="1"><literal>expert</literal>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it34"> <primary>installation options</primary><secondary>expert</secondary> + </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it35"><primary>installation options </primary><secondary>linux</secondary></indexterm>in some rare cases, your PC +may appear to freeze or lock-up during the hardware detection phase. If +that happens, then adding the word <literal>expert</literal> as a parameter +will tell the install program to bypass hardware detection. Because +<application>DrakX</application> will not scan for hardware, you will need +to manually specify hardware parameters later in the installation. The +<literal>expert</literal> parameter can be added to the previous modes, so +you may end up specifying <screen xml:id="drakx-scRK">boot: vgalo expert</screen> to perform a +low resolution graphical install without <application>DrakX</application> +performing a hardware scan.</para> + <note> + <para xml:id="drakx-pa5a">Selecting the <literal>expert</literal> mode will ask you for more details +about the installation process, letting you perform a more customized +installation.</para> + </note> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa6"><literal>kernel options</literal>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it36"><primary>installation options</primary><secondary>kernel options</secondary></indexterm>Kernel options usually aren't required for most machines. There are +a few cases of motherboards incorrectly reporting the amount of memory +installed due to bugs in the design or in the BIOS. If you need to manually +specify the amount of DRAM installed in your PC, use the <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it37"> + <primary>commands</primary> <secondary>mem= xxxM</secondary> + </indexterm> <command>mem= xxxM</command> parameter. For +example, to start the installation in normal mode with a computer having 256 +<acronym>MB</acronym> of memory, your command line would look like this: +<screen xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-sc1">boot: linux mem=256M</screen></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa7" revision="1">Now that we've gone over what <emphasis>might</emphasis> go wrong, let's +move on to the actual installation process. When the installer starts, +you'll see a nice graphical interface ( <xref linkend="selectLanguage-fig"/> +). On the left will be the various installation steps. Depending on the +installation's progress level, some stages may or may not be available. If +a particular stage is available it will be highlighted when you move the +mouse pointer over it.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa8">The colors of the buttons on the left side of the screen let you quickly see +what's going on with the installation:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa9">red: this installation phase has not yet been carried out</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa10">orange: the installation stage that is currently being processed</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa11">green: this installation stage has already been configured. However, nothing +stops you from going back to a stage that has already been completed if you +need to reconfigure something.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa12" revision="1">This guide assumes that you are performing a standard, step-by-step +installation, as described below.</para> + + + </section> + + + <section xml:id="drakxid-selectLanguage"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti3">Choosing Your Language</title></info> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa13">The first step is to choose your preferred language.</para> + + <figure xml:id="selectLanguage-fig" revision="2"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti4">Choosing the Default Language</title></info> <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx-MNF-selectLanguage.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im2" +revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa14"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it38"><primary>language</primary></indexterm> Your choice of preferred language +will affect the language of the documentation, the installer and the system +in general.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa15">Clicking on the <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button will allow you to +select other languages to be installed on your workstation, thereby +installing the language-specific files for system documentation and +applications. For example, if you will host users from Spain on your +machine, select English as the default language in the tree view and +<guilabel>Spanish|Spain</guilabel> in the Advanced section.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa16">Note that you're not limited to choosing a single additional language. Once +you have selected additional locales, click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> +button to continue.</para> + + <note> + <para xml:id="drakx-pa18a" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it8a"> + <primary>language</primary> <secondary>setting</secondary> + </indexterm>Not all languages listed here are +supported in the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> Web interface.</para> + </note> + + </section> + + + <section xml:id="drakxid-acceptLicense"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti5">License Terms of the Distribution</title></info> + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-license.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im3" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa17"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it39"><primary>ліцензія</primary></indexterm>Before continuing, you should +carefully read the terms of the license. It covers the entire +<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> distribution, and if you do not +agree with all the terms in it you should click on the <guibutton>Refuse +</guibutton> button. This will immediately terminate the installation. +Clicking on the <guibutton>Accept</guibutton> button will continue the +installation.</para> + + </section> + + + + <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-setupSCSI"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti6">Disk Detection and Configuration</title></info> + + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-setupSCSI.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im4" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa18"><application>DrakX</application> will first detect any <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it40"><primary>IDE</primary><secondary>detection + </secondary> </indexterm> IDE devices present in your computer. It will also +scan for one or more <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it41"><primary>PCI SCSI</primary> + </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it42"><primary>SCSI</primary></indexterm> PCI SCSI cards on your system. If a SCSI card is +found, <application>DrakX</application> will automatically install the +appropriate driver.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa19">Because hardware detection is not foolproof, +<application>DrakX</application> will ask you if you have a PCI SCSI +installed. Clicking <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> will display a list of SCSI +cards to choose from. Click <guibutton>No</guibutton> if you know that you +have no SCSI hardware in your machine. If you're not sure, you can check the +list of hardware detected in your machine by selecting <guilabel>See +hardware info </guilabel> and clicking the +<guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Examine the list of hardware and then click on +the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to return to the SCSI interface +question.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa20">If you had to manually specify your PCI SCSI adapter, +<application>DrakX</application> will ask if you want to configure options +for it. You should allow <application>DrakX</application> to probe the +hardware for the card-specific options which are needed to initialize the +adapter. Most of the time, <application>DrakX</application> will get through +this step without any issues.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa21" revision="1">If <application>DrakX</application> is not able to probe for the options to +automatically determine which parameters need to be passed to the hardware, +you'll need to manually configure the driver.</para> + + <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it43"> + <primary>hard disk</primary> + <secondary>detection</secondary> + </indexterm> + + + </section> + + <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectMouse"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti7">Configuring your Mouse</title></info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-selectMouse.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im5" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa22" revision="11"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it44"><primary>mouse</primary> </indexterm> Usually, +<application>DrakX</application> has no problems detecting the number of +buttons on your mouse. If it does, it assumes you have a two-button mouse +and will configure it for third-button emulation. The third-button mouse +button of a two-button mouse can be <quote>pressed </quote> by +simultaneously clicking the left and right mouse +buttons. <application>DrakX</application> will automatically know whether +your mouse uses a <acronym>PS/2</acronym>, serial or <acronym>USB</acronym> +interface.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa23">If for some reason you wish to specify a different type of mouse, select it +from the provided list.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa24" revision="10">If you choose a mouse other than the default, a test screen will be +displayed. Use the buttons and wheel to verify that the settings are correct +and that the mouse is working correctly. If the mouse is not working well, +press the space bar or <keycap> Return</keycap> key to +<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> the test and to go back to the list of +choices.</para> + + <note> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa25" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it45"><primary>mouse</primary> + <secondary>wheel</secondary> </indexterm>Wheel mice are occasionally not +detected automatically, so you will need to select your mouse from a +list. Be sure to select the one corresponding to the port that your mouse is +attached to. After selecting a mouse and pressing the +<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, a mouse image is displayed +on-screen. Scroll the mouse wheel to ensure that it is activated +correctly. Once you see the on-screen scroll wheel moving as you scroll your +mouse wheel, test the buttons and check that the mouse pointer moves +on-screen as you move your mouse.</para> + </note> + + </section> + + <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectKeyboard"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti8">Configuring the Keyboard</title></info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-selectKeyboard.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im6" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa26" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it46"> + <primary>keyboard</primary></indexterm>Depending on the default language you +chose in <xref linkend="drakxid-selectLanguage"/>, +<application>DrakX</application> will automatically select a particular type +of keyboard configuration. However, you might not have a keyboard that +corresponds exactly to your language: for example, if you are an English +speaking Swiss person, you may have a Swiss keyboard. Or if you speak +English but are located in Québec, you may find yourself in the same +situation where your native language and keyboard do not match. In either +case, this installation step will allow you to select an appropriate +keyboard from a list.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa27">Click on the <guibutton revision="1">More</guibutton> button to be presented +with the complete list of supported keyboards.</para> + + </section> + + + <section xml:id="drakxid-doPartitionDisks"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti9">Selecting the Mount Points</title></info> + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx-MNF-doPartitionDisks.png" format="PNG" +xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im7" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa28"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it47"><primary>mount points</primary></indexterm>At this point, you need to decide +where you want to install the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> +operating system on your hard drive. If your hard drive is empty or if an +existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to +partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard drive consists of +logically dividing it to create the space needed to install your new +<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> system.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa29" revision="2">Because the process of partitioning a hard drive is usually irreversible and +can lead to lost data if there is an existing operating system already +installed on the drive, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful if +you are an inexperienced user. Fortunately, <application>DrakX</application> +includes a wizard which simplifies this process. Before continuing with this +step, read through the rest of this section and above all, take your time.</para> + + <para condition="expert" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa30" revision="5"/> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa31">If your hard drive has already been partitioned, either from a previous +installation of <application>GNU/Linux</application> or by another +partitioning tool, select the appropriate partitions that you want to +install your Linux system into.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa32">If partitions haven't been configured, you will need to create them using +the wizard. Depending on your hard drive configuration, several options are +available:<itemizedlist revision="2"> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa33"><guibutton>Use free space</guibutton>: this option will perform an automatic +partitioning of your blank drive(s). If you use this option there will be +no further prompts. </para></listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa34" revision="1"><guibutton>Use existing partition</guibutton>: the wizard has detected one +or more existing Linux partitions on your hard drive. If you want to use +them, choose this option. You will then be asked to choose the mount points +associated with each of the partitions. The legacy mount points are selected +by default, and for the most part it's a good idea to keep them.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa35" revision="12"><guibutton>Use the free space on the Windows partition</guibutton>: if +<application>Microsoft</application><superscript>®</superscript> +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application><superscript>©</superscript> +is installed on your hard drive and takes all the space available on it, you +have to create free space for Linux data. To do so, you can delete your +<application>Microsoft</application> +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and +data (see <quote> Erase entire disk</quote> or <quote>Expert mode</quote> +solutions) or resize your <application>Microsoft</application> +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> FAT +partition. Resizing can be performed without the loss of any data, +<emphasis>provided you previously defragment the +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and +that it uses the FAT format. Backing up your data is strongly +recommended.</emphasis>. Using this option is recommended if you want to use +both <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> and +<application>Microsoft</application> +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on the same +computer.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa36">Before choosing this option, please understand that after this procedure, +the size of your <application>Microsoft</application> +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition +will be smaller then when you started. You will have less free space under +<application>Microsoft</application> +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> to store your +data or to install new software.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa37"><guibutton>Erase entire disk</guibutton>: if you want to delete all data and +all partitions present on your hard drive and replace them with your new +<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> system, choose this option. Be +careful, because you will not be able to undo your choice after you confirm.</para> + <warning> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa38">If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will +be deleted. + </para></warning> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa39"><guibutton>Remove Windows</guibutton>: this will simply erase everything on +the drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from +scratch. <emphasis>All</emphasis> data on your disk will be lost.</para> + <warning> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa40">If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will +be lost.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa41" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it48"><primary>partitions</primary> + <secondary>manual formatting</secondary></indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it49"> + <primary>partitioning</primary> </indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it50"><primary>DiskDrake</primary></indexterm> <guibutton>Custom disk +partitioning</guibutton>: choose this option if you want to manually +partition your hard drive. Be careful –– it is a powerful but dangerous +choice and you can very easily lose all your data. That's why this option is +really only recommended if you have done something like this before and have +some experience. For more instructions on how to use the +<application>DiskDrake</application> utility, refer to the <link +xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xlink:href="http://www.mandrakelinux.com/en/doc/82/en/user.html/diskdrake.html">online +documentation for <application>DiskDrake</application></link>.</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + + </section> + + <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-formatPartitions"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti10">Choose Partitions to Be Formatted</title></info> + + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx-MNF-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" +xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im8" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa42"> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it51"><primary>partitions</primary> + <secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>Any partitions that have been newly +defined must be formatted for use (formatting means creating a file system).</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa43">At this time, you may wish to reformat some already existing partitions to +erase any data they contain. If you wish to do that, please select those +partitions as well.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa44">Please note that it is not necessary to reformat all <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it52"><primary>partitions</primary> + <secondary>pre-existing</secondary></indexterm>pre-existing partitions. You must reformat the +partitions containing the operating system (such as <literal>/</literal>, +<literal>/usr</literal> or <literal>/var</literal>) but you do not have to +reformat partitions containing data that you wish to keep (typically +<literal>/home</literal>).</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa45">Please be careful when selecting partitions. After formatting, all data on +the selected partitions will be deleted and you will not be able to recover +it.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa46">Click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when you are ready to format partitions.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa47">Click on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> if you want to choose another +partition for your new <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> operating +system installation.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa48">Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> if you wish to select partitions +that will be checked for <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it53"><primary>partitions</primary><secondary>bad blocks</secondary></indexterm>bad blocks on +the disk.</para> + + </section> + + + <section xml:id="drakxid-installPackages"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti11">Actual Packages Installation</title></info> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa49" revision="2">Then comes the actual system installation. The packages list is predefined +and cannot be changed at this time. The time required to complete the +installation depends on the speed of your hardware. An estimate of the +remaining time-to-go will be displayed on-screen to help gauge if there is +sufficient time to enjoy a cup of coffee.</para> + + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakxid-setRootPassword"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti12">Root Password</title></info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-setRootPassword.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im9" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa50">This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your +<application>GNU/Linux</application> system: you have to enter the +<indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it54"><primary>root</primary> + <secondary>password</secondary></indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it55"><primary>password</primary> + <secondary>root</secondary></indexterm> <literal>root</literal> password. <literal>Root</literal> is the +system administrator and is the only one authorized to make updates, add +users, change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, +<literal>root</literal> can do everything! That is why you must choose a +password that is difficult to guess – <application>DrakX</application> will +tell you if the password that you chose is too easy. As you can see, you are +not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise you against. +<application>GNU/Linux</application> is as prone to operator error as any +other operating system. Since <literal>root</literal> can overcome all +limitations and unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly +accessing the partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to +become <literal>root</literal>.</para> + + <note> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa51" revision="1">The <application>msec</application> security level is set to +<literal>4</literal> (<quote>high</quote>) by default. The password should +be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and must be at least 8 characters +long. Never write down the <literal>root</literal> password –– it makes it +too easy to compromise a system.</para> + </note> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa52">One caveat –– do not make the password too long or complicated because you +must be able to remember it!</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa53">The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it in. To reduce +the chance of a blind typing error you will need to enter the password +twice. If you do happen to make the same typing error twice, this +<quote>incorrect</quote> password will have to be used the first time you +connect.</para> + + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakxid-setAdminPassword"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti13">Administrator Password</title></info> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa54">You are then asked to enter the password for the system administrator +(login: <literal>admin</literal>). It is differentiated from the +<literal>root</literal> user, for security reasons, and also because it may +not be the same person. It is that <literal>admin</literal> account that +will be required to access the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> +Web interface. The criterion for choosing this password are the same as for +the <literal>root</literal> password.</para> + + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakxid-addUser"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti14">Adding a User</title></info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-addUser.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im10" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa55" revision="2">All necessary users have already been added, and you shouldn't need adding +more users for normal <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> +operations. However, if you plan to use the <application>squid</application> +<acronym>PAM</acronym> authentication feature, you can add here the users +that will be authorized.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa56">The first field asks you for a real name. Of course, this is not +mandatory –– you can actually enter whatever you +like. <application>DrakX</application> will use the first word you typed in +and copy it to the <guimenu>User name</guimenu> field, which is the name +this user will enter to log onto the system. If you like, you may override +the default and change the username. The next step is to enter a +password. From a security point of view, a non-privileged (regular) user +password is not as crucial as the <literal>root</literal> password, but that +is no reason to neglect it by making it blank or too simple: after all, +<emphasis>your</emphasis> files could be the ones at risk.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa57" revision="2">You can then choose to make that user member of one or more special groups +that will give him special priviledges. Check the button for the priviledges +you want for that user.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa58" revision="1">Once you click on <guimenu>Accept user</guimenu>, you can add additional +users. Select <guimenu>Done</guimenu> when you have finished adding users.</para> + + <tip> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa59">Clicking the <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button allows you to change the +default <literal>shell</literal> for that user +(<application>bash</application> by default).</para> + </tip> + + </section> + + <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-configureNetwork"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti15">Configure your Local Network</title></info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx-MNF-configureNetwork.png" format="PNG" +xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im11" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa60" revision="1">You will now set up your local network connection (<acronym>LAN</acronym>). +<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> will attempt to autodetect +network devices and modems. If this detection fails, uncheck the +<guilabel>Use auto detection</guilabel> box.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa61" revision="1">Even though many connection types are offered here, do not configure your +Internet connection now. You should now limit yourself to configuring the +<literal>Ethernet</literal> <acronym>LAN</acronym> access, so that you can +later connect to the administration interface and configure other +connections easily through it.</para> + </warning> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa62">We will not detail each configuration option – just make sure that you have +all the parameters, such as IP address, default gateway, DNS servers, +etc. from your Internet Service Provider or system administrator.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa63" revision="1">You will be able to configure all your other network interfaces (Internet, +<acronym>DMZ</acronym>, etc.) later on through +<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> interface.</para> + + </section> + + + + <section condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti16">Where Should You Place the Bootloader</title></info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx-MNF-setupBootloaderBeginner.png" format="PNG" +xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im12" width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa64">You must indicate where you wish to place the information the bootloader +requires to boot to <application>GNU/Linux</application>.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa65">Unless you know exactly what you are doing, choose <guibutton>First sector +of drive (MBR)</guibutton>.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa66" revision="1">You are then presented the different boot entries that will be proposed at +system boot. You can modify them here.</para> + + </section> + + <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-createBootdisk"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti17">Boot Disk</title></info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-createBootdisk.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im13" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa67">The <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> +has a built-in rescue mode. You can access it by booting the +<acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>, pressing the <userinput>F1</userinput> key at +boot and typing <userinput>rescue</userinput> at the prompt. If your +computer cannot boot from the <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>, there are at least +two situations where having a boot floppy is critical: + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa68" revision="1">when installing the <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it56"><primary>bootloader</primary> + </indexterm>bootloader, +<application>DrakX</application> will rewrite the boot sector (<indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it57"> + <primary>MBR</primary></indexterm><acronym>MBR</acronym>) of your main disk (unless +you are using another boot manager), to allow you to start up with either +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> or +<application>GNU/Linux</application> (assuming you have +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on your +system). If at some point you need to reinstall +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>, the +<application>Microsoft</application> install process will rewrite the boot +sector and remove your ability to start +<application>GNU/Linux</application>!</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa69">if a problem arises and you cannot start +<application>GNU/Linux</application> from the hard disk, this <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it58"> <primary>boot disk</primary></indexterm>floppy will be the only means of starting up +<application>GNU/Linux</application>. It contains a fair number of system +tools for restoring a system that has crashed due to a power failure, an +unfortunate typing error, a forgotten root password, or any other reason.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist>If you say <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>, you will be asked to insert a disk in +the drive. The floppy disk must be blank or have non-critical data on it – +<application>DrakX</application> will format the floppy and will rewrite the +whole disk.</para> + + + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakxid-installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti18" revision="1">Installing Updates from the Internet</title></info> + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-installUpdates.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im14" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa70" revision="1">At the time you are installing <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>, +it is likely that some packages have been updated since the initial +release. Bugs may have been fixed, security issues resolved. To allow you +to benefit from these updates, you are now able to download them from the +Internet. Choose <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> if you have a working Internet +connection, or <guibutton>No</guibutton> if you prefer to install updated +packages later.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa71">Choosing <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> displays a list of places from which +updates can be retrieved. Choose the one nearest you. A package-selection +tree will appear: review the selection, and press +<guibutton>Install</guibutton> to retrieve and install the selected +package(s), or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort.</para> + + + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakxid-exitInstall"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti19">It's Finished!</title></info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-exitInstall.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im15" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa72" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it59"><primary>boot</primary> + <secondary>dual-boot</secondary></indexterm>There you are. Installation is now +complete and your <application>GNU/Linux</application> system is ready to +use. Carefully write down the <acronym>URL</acronym> given in that dialog, +it's the address you'll have to use in your Web browser to access the +<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> Web interface with +<literal>admin</literal> account. Now, just click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> +twice to reboot the system.</para> + + </section> + + + <section><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti20">How to Uninstall Linux</title></info> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa73">The uninstallation process consists of two steps:</para> + + <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts"> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa74">Delete all partitions on your hard drive and replace them by a single +<acronym>FAT</acronym> partition with <application>DiskDrake</application>.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa75">Uninstall the <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it30"><primary>bootloader</primary> +<secondary>uninstall</secondary> </indexterm> bootloader (generally +<application>GRUB</application>) from the Master Boot Record +(<acronym>MBR</acronym>). To do so, boot under +<application>DOS</application> and run the <command>fdisk /mbr</command> +command.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa76">If you have another <acronym>OS</acronym>, please consult its documentation +to determine how to perform the same step.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa77" revision="1">Goodbye, and thank you for using +<application>Mandrakesecurity</application>!</para> + + </section> +</chapter> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..15db214e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-acceptLicense"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-ti1">Застаріле — ліцензійна угода щодо дистрибутива</title></info> + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-license.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-im1" revision="3" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-pa1" revision="5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-it1"> + <primary>ліцензія</primary> + </indexterm>Before continuing, you should +carefully read the terms of the license. It covers the entire +<application>Mageia</application> distribution. If you agree with all the +terms it contains, select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and click on +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. If not, clicking on <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> +will reboot your computer.</para> + + <tip> + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-acceptLicense-pa2">If you are curious about any technical changes which have occurred in the +distribution since the last release, you can click on the <guibutton>Release +Notes</guibutton> button to display them.</para> + </tip> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cdcb5dfd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakxid-addUser" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-ti1">Застаріле — додавання користувача</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx-addUser.png" +width="11.5cm" align="center" format="PNG" +xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa1"><application>GNU/Linux</application> is a multi-user system which means each +user can have his or her own preferences, own files and so on. But unlike +<literal>root</literal>, who is the system administrator, the <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-it1"> + <primary>users</primary> + + <secondary>adding</secondary> + </indexterm>users you add at this point won't be authorized to +change anything except their own files and their own configurations, +protecting the system from unintentional or malicious changes which could +have a serious impact on it.</para> + + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-addUser-pa5">You will have to create at least one regular user for yourself — this is the +account which you should use for routine, day-to-day usage. Although it's +very easy to log in as <literal>root</literal> to do anything and +everything, it may also be very dangerous! A very simple mistake could mean +that your system won't work any more. If you make a serious mistake as a +regular user, the worst that can happen is that you'll lose some +information, but you won't affect the entire system.</para> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa2">The first field asks you for a real name. <application>DrakX</application> +will use the first word you type in this field and copy it, all in +lowercase, to the <guimenu>Login name</guimenu> field, which is the name +this user will enter to log on to the system. You can override it and change +the <guimenu>Login Name</guimenu>. The next step is to enter a +password. From a security point of view, a non-privileged (regular) user's +password is not as crucial as the <literal>root</literal> password, but +that's no reason to neglect it by making it blank or too simple: after all, +<emphasis>your</emphasis> files could be the ones at risk.</para> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa3">Once you click on <guimenu>Accept user</guimenu> you can add other +users. Add a user for each one of your friends, your father, your sister, +etc. Click <guimenu>Next</guimenu> when you're finished adding users.</para> + + <para revision="3"></para> + + <para revision="3"></para> + + <tip condition="expert"> + <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa4">Clicking the <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button allows you to change the +default <literal>shell</literal> for that user +(<application>bash</application> by default).</para> + </tip> + + +<!-- We don't give the option to autologin anymore - Marja 20120317 - <mediaobject condition="expert"> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-autologin.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakx-im17a" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa142a" revision="6">When you're finished adding + users, you'll be asked to choose a user who will be automatically + logged into the system when the computer boots up. If you're + interested in that feature (and don't care much about security), + choose the desired user (if more than one regular user is defined) + and select a window manager, then click on + <guibutton> +Next</guibutton>. If you're not interested in this + feature, uncheck the <guilabel>Do you want to use this + feature?</guilabel> box.</para> --> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..20c2422e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s" revision="1" userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">Deprecated - Choosing Mount Points</title></info> + + + + + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa1">Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard +drive. You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for +most common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define +a <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-it1"><primary>root</primary> + <secondary>partition</secondary></indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-it2"><primary>partitions</primary> + <secondary>root</secondary></indexterm>root partition (<literal revision="3">/</literal>). Do not choose +too small a partition or you will not be able to install enough software. In +most cases it is best to also create a <literal>/home</literal> partition, +to store your data on (only possible if you have more than one Linux +partition available).</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa2">Each partition is listed as follows: "Device", "Capacity", "Mount +point","Type".</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa3">"Device", is structured: "hard drive type", "hard drive number", "partition +number" (for example, "sda5"). </para> + + + + + <!-- This paragraph might not be true, I thought I was always able to do this at this point, but now in Mga2b2 my four Mga partitions aren't mounted yet, so impossible to see what is where with "df" - Marja, 20120317 + <note><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa6">You can switch to tty 2 with ctrl+alt+F2 and type df to view the partitions if you're not sure installer's choice is correct and then switch back to the installer screen with ctrl+alt+F7</para> +</note> --> +<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa7">When the mount points are correct, or corrected, click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. You'll then be given the choice to format one +or more of the partitions you just chose to install Mageia on. Usually, +formatting <literal>/</literal> and saving <literal>/home</literal> (if the +same partition was your <literal>/home</literal> before), is a good choice.</para> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac6f3e12 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-chooseCd"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-chooseCd-ti1">Deprecated - Multiple CD-ROM Installation</title></info> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-chooseCd-pa1" revision="4">The <application>Mandriva Linux</application> installation is distributed on +several <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>s. If a selected package is located on +another <acronym>CD</acronym>, <application>DrakX</application> will eject +the current <acronym>CD</acronym> and ask you to insert the required one. If +you do not have the requested <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> at hand, just click +on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, and the corresponding packages will not be +installed.</para> + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8e392a66 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakx-choosePackages"><!-- <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-choosePackages-pa20"> +Depending on the + installation media you are currently using, you may be first asked + to select the <acronym>CD</acronym>s you actually have at hand.</para> --> +<info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-ti1">Deprecated - Choose Packages to Install</title></info> + + + + + + <section xml:id="drakxid-choose-graphical-env"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choose-graphical-env-ti2" >Graphical Environment</title></info> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choose-graphical-env-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choose-graphical-env-it5"> <primary>packages</primary> + <secondary>graphical environment</secondary></indexterm> <guilabel>Graphical +Environment</guilabel>: this is where you will choose your preferred +graphical environment. At least one must be selected if you want to have a +graphical interface available.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakxid-choosePackages"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackagesGroups-ti3" revision="1">Choose Package Groups to Install</title></info> + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-choosePackages.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-im1" revision="3" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it1"><primary>packages</primary> + <secondary>installing</secondary></indexterm>It's now time to specify which +programs you wish to install on your system. There are thousands of packages +available for <application>Mageia</application>, and to make it simpler to +manage, they have been placed into groups of similar applications.</para> + + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa2" revision="3"><application>Mageia</application> sorts package groups into categories. You +can mix and match applications from the various categories, so a +<guilabel>Workstation</guilabel> installation can still have applications +from the <guilabel>Server</guilabel> category installed.</para> + + <orderedlist revision="5" inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts"> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa3" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it2"> <primary>packages</primary> + <secondary>workstation</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Workstation</guilabel>: if +you plan to use your machine as a workstation, select one or more of the +groups in this category. The special <literal>LSB</literal> group will +configure your system so that it complies as much as possible with the <link +xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xlink:href="http://www.linuxbase.org/">Linux Standard Base Project</link> +specifications.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it4"> <primary>packages</primary> + <secondary>server</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Server</guilabel>: if your +machine is intended to be a server, select which of the more common services +you wish to install on your machine.</para> + </listitem> + + </orderedlist> + + <tip> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa7" revision="11">Moving the mouse cursor over a group name will display a short explanatory +text about that group.</para> + </tip> + + <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it6"> + <primary>packages</primary> + <secondary>individual selection</secondary> + </indexterm> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa11" revision="4">You can check the <guilabel>Individual package selection</guilabel> box, +which is useful if you're familiar with the packages being offered or if you +want to have total control over what will be installed.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa12" revision="11">If you start the installation in <guilabel>Upgrade</guilabel> mode, you can +deselect all groups and prevent the installation of any new packages. This +is useful for repairing or updating an existing system.</para> + +</section> + + + <section condition="expert" xml:id="minimal-install"><info><title xml:id="BId-minimal-install-ti4" revision="1">Minimal Installation</title></info> + + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-minimal-install-pa19" revision="3">If you deselect all groups when performing a regular installation (as +opposed to an upgrade), a new dialog shows after pressing the +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, suggesting different options for a +minimal installation:</para> + + <itemizedlist xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-choosePackages-item1" revision="2"> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa8"><guilabel>With X</guilabel>: install the minimum number of packages possible +to have a working graphical desktop.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa9"><guilabel>With basic documentation</guilabel>: installs the base system plus +basic utilities and their documentation. This installation is suitable for +setting up a server.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa10" revision="13"><guilabel>Truly minimal install</guilabel>: installs the absolute minimum +number of packages necessary to get a working +<application>Linux</application> system. With this installation you will +only have a command-line interface.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-choosePackagesTree"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackagesTree-ti5" revision="1">Choosing Individual Packages to Install</title></info> + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-choosePackagesTree.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-im2" revision="1" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa13" revision="2">If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present a +tree structure containing all packages classified by groups and +subgroups. While browsing the tree, you can select entire groups, subgroups, +or individual packages.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa14">Whenever you select a package on the tree, a description will appear on the +right to let you know the purpose of that package.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa15" revision="2">If a server package has been selected, either because you specifically chose +the individual package or because it was part of a group of packages, you +will be asked to confirm that you really want those server packages to be +installed. By default <application>Mageia</application> will automatically +start any installed services (servers) at boot time. Even if they are safe +and have no known issues at the time the distribution was shipped, it is +entirely possible that security holes were discovered after this version of +<application>Mageia</application> was finalized. If you don't know what a +particular service is supposed to do or why it's being installed, then click +<guibutton>No</guibutton>.</para> + </warning> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa16" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it7"> + <primary>залежності</primary> + <secondary>automatic</secondary></indexterm> The <guilabel>Show automatically +selected packages</guilabel> option is used to disable the warning +dialog. Those appear whenever the installer automatically selects a package +to resolve a dependency issue. Some packages depend on others and the +installation of one particular package may require the installation of +another one. The installer can determine which packages are required to +satisfy a dependency and to successfully complete the installation.</para> + + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa17" revision="4">The little floppy disk icon at the bottom of the list allows you to load or +save the packages list. This is useful if you have a number of machines that +you wish to configure identically. Click on this icon and select whether you +wish to <guilabel>Load</guilabel> or <guilabel>Save</guilabel> the packages +list, then select the medium in the following screen and click on the +<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c1379198 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-doPartitionDisks"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ti1" revision="1">Deprecated - Partitioning your Disk</title></info> + + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-doPartitionDisks.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-im1" revision="1" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa1" revision="2">You now need to decide where you want to install +<application>Mageia</application> on your hard drive. If your hard drive is +empty or if an existing operating system is using all the available space +you will have to re-partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard +drive means to logically divide it in order to create the space required for +your new <application>Mageia</application> system.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa2" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-it3"><primary>partitions</primary><secondary>DrakX</secondary> + </indexterm>Because the process of partitioning a +hard drive is usually irreversible and can lead to data loss, partitioning +can be intimidating and stressful for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, +<application>DrakX</application> includes a wizard which simplifies this +process. Before continuing with this step, read through the rest of this +section and, above all, take your time.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa3" revision="2">Depending on the configuration of your hard drive, several options are +available:</para> + + + + <itemizedlist revision="2"> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa4"><guibutton>Use free space</guibutton>. This option will perform an automatic +partitioning of your blank drive(s). If you use this option there will be no +further prompts.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa5" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-it1"><primary>mount points</primary></indexterm><guibutton>Use existing +partitions</guibutton>. The wizard has detected one or more existing +<application>Linux</application> partitions on your hard drive. If you want +to use them, choose this option. You will then be asked to choose the mount +points associated with each of the partitions. The legacy mount points are +selected by default, and for the most part it's a good idea to keep +them. You will also be asked to choose the partitions to be formatted or +preserved.</para> + </listitem> + + + + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa6" revision="15"><guibutton>Use the free space on the Windows partition</guibutton>. If +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> is installed +on your hard drive, you might have to create free space for +<application>GNU/Linux</application>. To do so, you can delete your +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and +data (see the <quote>Erase entire disk</quote> solution below) or resize +your <acronym>FAT</acronym> or <acronym>NTFS</acronym> partition. Resizing +can be performed without the loss of any data, <emphasis>provided you've +previously defragmented the +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> +partition. Backing up your data is strongly recommended</emphasis>. Using +this option is recommended if you want to use both +<application>Mageia</application> and +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on the same +computer in a <emphasis>dual boot</emphasis> configuration.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa7" revision="1">Before choosing this option, please understand that after this procedure, +the size of your +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition +will be smaller than when you started, which means you will have less free +space to store your data or to install new software.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa8" revision="1"><guibutton>Erase entire disk</guibutton>. If you want to delete all data and +all partitions present on your hard drive and replace them with +<application>Mageia</application>, choose this option. Be warned that you +won't be able to undo this operation after you confirm.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa9">If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will +be deleted.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="4"><guibutton>Remove Windows(TM)</guibutton>. This option appears when the hard +drive is entirely taken by +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>. Choosing +this option will simply erase everything on the drive, partitioning +everything from scratch.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa11">If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will +be lost.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa12" revision="5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-it2"> + <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>custom</secondary> + </indexterm><guibutton>Custom disk +partitioning</guibutton>. Choose this option if you want to manually +partition your hard drive. Be careful: it is a powerful but dangerous choice +and you can very easily lose all your data. That's why this option is only +recommended if you have performed custom disk partitioning before, and have +enough <application>GNU/Linux</application> experience to know what you are +doing. For more instructions on how to use the +<application>DiskDrake</application> utility, refer to <phrase +condition="Starter" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph1"><xref +linkend="diskdrake"/></phrase><phrase condition="Discovery" +xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph3">the <citetitle +xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ct1">Managing Your +Partitions</citetitle> section in the <citetitle>Starter +Guide</citetitle></phrase><phrase condition="QSP" +xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph4">the <citetitle +xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ct2">Managing Your +Partitions</citetitle> section in the <citetitle>Starter +Guide</citetitle></phrase>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..15d2f21d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-exitInstall" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-ti1">Deprecated - It's Done!</title></info> + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-exitInstall.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-im1" revision="1" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa1" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it1"><primary>boot</primary> + <secondary>dual-boot</secondary></indexterm>There you are. The installation is now +complete and your <application>GNU/Linux</application> system is ready to be +used. Just click on <guibutton>Reboot</guibutton> to restart the +system. Don't forget to remove the installation media +(<acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> or floppy). The first thing you should see after +your computer has finished doing its hardware tests is the bootloader menu, +which allows you to choose between the <acronym>OS</acronym>es your system +can boot.</para> + + <section><info><title xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-exitInstall-ti2">Advanced Options</title></info> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa2" revision="5">The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button shows more buttons to:</para> + + <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts"> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it2"><primary>floppy</primary> + <secondary>auto-install</secondary> + </indexterm><guibutton>Generate auto-install +floppy</guibutton>: enables you to create an installation floppy disk which +will automatically perform a whole installation, similar to the one just +finished, without the help of an operator.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa4">Note that two different options are available after clicking on that button:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it3"> + <primary>installation</primary><secondary>replay</secondary> + </indexterm><guibutton>Replay</guibutton>. This is +a partially automated installation. The partitioning step is the only +interactive procedure.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa6"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it4"> + <primary>installation</primary> + <secondary>automated</secondary> + </indexterm><guibutton>Automated</guibutton>. Fully automated installation: +<emphasis>the hard disk is completely rewritten, all data is +lost</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + + + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-exitInstall-pa9">This feature is very handy when installing on a number of similar +machines. See the <link xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xlink:href="http://www.mandrakelinux.com/drakx/auto_inst.html">Auto +install</link> section on our web site for more information.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa7" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it5"> + <primary>installation</primary> <secondary>save package selection</secondary> </indexterm><guibutton>Save package +selection</guibutton><footnote><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa8" revision="3">If you chose to save on a floppy, you will need a +<acronym>FAT</acronym>-formatted floppy. To create one under +<application>GNU/Linux</application>, type <command>mformat a:</command> or, +as root, <command>fdformat /dev/fd0</command> followed by <command>mkfs.vfat +/dev/fd0</command>.</para></footnote>: saves a list of +the packages selected in this installation. The following screen shows you +the possible media to use to save the package list onto: you might need to +fill some parameters when you click on the <guilabel>Next</guilabel> button.</para> + + + + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-exitInstall-pa10">To use this selection of packages with another installation, perform the +installation as usual up to the point of the package selection, and choose +to select individual packages, without worrying about the current package +selection. Use the floppy icon and select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> +option. Then choose the medium which contains the package list. Finally +click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>: the list of packages you loaded will be +selected and be installed.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8c8d7eb --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-formatPartitions" revision="1" condition="extra"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-ti1">Deprecated - Choose Partitions to Be Formatted</title></info> + + + + + <note> + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa8" revision="2">This step is available only if you chose to reuse existing +<application>Linux</application> partitions.</para> + </note> + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-formatPartitions.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-im1" revision="1" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa2" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-it1"> + <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>If you chose to reuse some legacy +<application>GNU/Linux</application> partitions, you may wish to reformat +some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please select those +partitions as well.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa3">Please note that it's not necessary to reformat all <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-it2"> + <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>pre-existing</secondary> + </indexterm>pre-existing partitions. You must reformat the +partitions containing the operating system (such as <literal>/</literal>, +<literal>/usr</literal> or <literal>/var</literal>) but not the partitions +containing data you wish to keep (typically <literal>/home</literal>).</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa4" revision="1">Please be careful when selecting partitions. After the formatting is +completed, <emphasis>all data on the selected partitions will be +deleted</emphasis> and you won't be able to recover it.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa5" revision="1">Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> when you're ready to format the +partitions.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa6" revision="1">Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you want to choose other +partitions for your new <application>Mageia</application> operating system +installation.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa7">Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> if you wish to select partitions +which will be checked for <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-it3"> + <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>bad blocks</secondary></indexterm>bad blocks +on the disk.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1fe02b2c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-ti1" revision="1">Deprecated - Installing Updates from the Internet</title></info> + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-installUpdates.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-im1" revision="1" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-pa1" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-installUpdates-it1"> + <primary>installation</primary><secondary>updates</secondary></indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-installUpdates-it2"><primary>updates</primary></indexterm>By the time you install <application>Mageia</application>, it's +likely that some packages will have been updated since the initial +release. Bugs may have been fixed, security issues resolved, etc. To allow +you to benefit from these updates, you're now able to download them from the +Internet. Select <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> if you have a working Internet +connection and you want to install any updated packages now, or +<guilabel>No</guilabel> if you prefer to install updated packages later.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-pa2" revision="2">Choosing <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> will display a list of web locations from +which updates can be retrieved. You should choose one near to you. A tree +containing package selections will appear: review the selection, and press +<guibutton>Install</guibutton> to retrieve and install the selected +package(s), or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort.</para> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-intro.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-intro.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..558f6623 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-intro.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakx-intro" role="titlepage"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakx-intro-ti1">About the Installer Help Manual</title> + </info> + + <note> + <para>Всі сторінки, описані у цьому підручнику побачити одразу неможливо. Набір +сторінок, які ви побачите залежить від набору обладнання у вашій системі та +вибраного вами варіанта встановлення.</para> + </note> + + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +xlink:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link></para> + + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +xlink:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +xlink:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link></para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68906cc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,244 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakx-misc-params"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti1">Deprecated - Checking Miscellaneous Parameters</title></info> + + + <section xml:id="drakxid-summary"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti2" revision="1">Summary</title></info> + + + <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-summary"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-summary.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-im1" revision="1" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa1" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-it16"> + <primary>configuration</primary> </indexterm>As a review, +<application>DrakX</application> will present a summary of information it +has gathered about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your +machine, you may have some or all of the following entries. Each entry is +made up of the hardware item to be configured, followed by a quick summary +of the current configuration. Click on the corresponding +<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button to make any changes.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa3" revision="2"><guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it2"><primary>time zone</primary><secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm>by +default, <application>DrakX</application> deduces your time zone based on +the country you have chosen. You can click on the +<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button here if this is not correct.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="drakxidselectCountry" revision="5"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it54a"> <primary>country</primary> + <secondary>configuration</secondary> + </indexterm><guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>: +check the current country selection. If you're not in the country selected +by <application>DrakX</application>, click on the +<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button and choose another. If your country +isn't in the list shown, click on the <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> +button to get a complete country list.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="drakx-pa152a" revision="3"><guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>: if you wish to change your bootloader +configuration, click this button. This should be reserved to advanced +users. Refer to the printed documentation or the in-line help about +bootloader configuration in the <application>Mageia Control +Center</application>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="drakx-pa155b"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it57c"> + <primary>services</primary> <secondary>configuration</secondary> + </indexterm><guilabel>Services</guilabel>: with +this entry you can fine tune which services will be run on your machine. If +you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good idea to review this +setup.</para> + </listitem> + + + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa2" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it1"> <primary>keyboard</primary> + <secondary>configuration</secondary> + </indexterm><guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>: check +the current keyboard map configuration and change it if necessary.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa4"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it3"> <primary>mouse</primary> + <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>: verify the +current mouse configuration and click on the button to change it if +necessary.</para> + </listitem> + + + + <!-- Printers are no longer in Summary section or Installer - John + <listitem> + + <para xml:id="drakxid-configurePrinter" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it4"> <primary>printer</primary> + <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Printer</guilabel>: + clicking on the <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button will + open the printer configuration wizard. Consult <phrase xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph2" condition="Discovery">the + corresponding chapter of the + <citetitle>Starter Guide</citetitle></phrase><phrase condition="Startonly" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph3" revision="1"><xref linkend="printerdrake"/></phrase><phrase condition="only-in-ML-Full-Manual" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph4" revision="1"><xref linkend="printerdrake"/></phrase> for more information on how to + set up a new printer. The interface presented in our manual is + similar to the one used during installation.</para> + </listitem> + +--> +<listitem> + <para xml:id="drakxid-sound_config" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it5"> <primary>sound card</primary> + <secondary>configuration</secondary> + </indexterm><guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>: if a +sound card is detected on your system, it will be displayed here. If you +notice the sound card isn't the one actually present on your system, you can +click on the button and choose a different driver.</para> + </listitem> + + + <!-- TV cards are no longer in Summary section or Installer - Marja + <listitem> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa5" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it6"> <primary>tv card</primary> + <secondary>configuration</secondary> </indexterm><guilabel>TV + card</guilabel>: if you have a TV card, this is where + information about its configuration will be displayed. If you + want to try a different driver for your TV card, or its + detection wasn't accurate you can click on + <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> to try to configure it + manually.</para> + </listitem> + --> +<listitem> + <para xml:id="drakx-pa152b" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it57b"> + <primary>graphical interface</primary> + <secondary>configuration</secondary> + </indexterm><guilabel>Graphical +Interface</guilabel>: by default, <application>DrakX</application> +configures your graphical interface with a resolution that best matches your +video card and monitor combination. If that doesn't suit you, or +<application>DrakX</application> could not automatically configure it +(<guilabel>not configured</guilabel> is displayed), click on +<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> to reconfigure your graphical +interface. You can click on <guibutton>Help</guibutton> from within the +configuration wizard to benefit from full in-line help.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="drakx-pa152c" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it57d"> + <primary>network</primary> + <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm> <guilabel>Network</guilabel>: if you +wish to configure your Internet or local network access, you can do so from +here. Refer to the printed documentation or use the <application>Mageia +Control Center</application> after the installation has finished to benefit +from full in-line help.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-pa62" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-it17"> <primary>network</primary> + <secondary>proxy</secondary> + </indexterm><guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>: allows +you to configure <acronym>HTTP</acronym> and <acronym>FTP</acronym> proxy +addresses if the machine you're installing on is to be located behind a +proxy server.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="drakx-pa155a"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it58a"> + <primary>security</primary> + <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>: +this entry allows you to redefine the security level<phrase +condition="Starter" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ph1"> as set in a previous +step (see <xref linkend="drakxidmiscellaneous"/>)</phrase>.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + + <para xml:id="draxid-tinyfirewall" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it59a"> <primary>firewall</primary> + <secondary>configuration</secondary> + </indexterm><guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>: if you +plan to connect your machine to the Internet, it's a good idea to protect +yourself from intrusions by setting up a firewall. Consult <phrase +condition="Discovery" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph5">the +corresponding chapter of the <citetitle>Starter +Guide</citetitle></phrase><phrase condition="Startonly" +xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph6" revision="2"><xref +linkend="tinyfirewall"/></phrase><phrase condition="only-in-ML-Full-Manual" +xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph7" revision="2"><xref +linkend="tinyfirewall"/></phrase> for details about firewall settings.</para> + </listitem> + + + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakxidconfigureTimezoneGMT" revision="11" role="manual"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti3" revision="2">Time Zone Options</title></info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-configureTimezoneGMT"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx-configureTimezoneGMT.png" format="PNG" +xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-im2" revision="2" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para condition="no-inline-help" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa7" revision="3">This dialog appears after selecting a new time zone in the time zones +list. After you've chosen the location nearest to your time zone, two more +options are shown.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa8" revision="1"><application>GNU/Linux</application> manages time in <acronym>GMT</acronym> +(Greenwich Mean Time) and translates it to local time according to the time +zone you selected. If the clock on your motherboard is set to local time, +you may deactivate this by deselecting <guilabel>Hardware clock set to +GMT</guilabel>, which will let <application>GNU/Linux</application> know +that the system clock and the hardware clock are in the same time zone. This +is useful when the machine also hosts another operating system.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa9" revision="3">The <guilabel>Automatic time synchronization</guilabel> option will +automatically regulate the system clock by connecting to a remote time +server on the Internet. For this feature to work, you must have a working +Internet connection. We recommend that you choose a time server located near +you or the generic <guilabel>World Wide</guilabel> entry which will select +the best server for you. This option actually installs a time server which +can be used by other machines on your local network as well.</para> + </section> + + + + + + <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxidconfigureServices"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti10">Selecting Available Services at Boot Time</title></info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-configureServices"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-configureServices.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-im5" revision="2" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa57" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it15"> <primary>services</primary> + </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-it18"> + <primary>boot</primary><secondary>services</secondary></indexterm>This dialog is used to select which services you wish to start at +boot time.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa58" revision="2"><application>DrakX</application> will list all services available on the +current installation. Review each of them carefully and uncheck those which +aren't needed at boot time.</para> + + <tip> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa59" revision="1">A short explanatory text will be displayed about a service when it is +selected. However, if you're not sure whether a service is useful or not, it +is safer to leave the default behavior.</para> + </tip> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa60" revision="2">At this stage, be very careful if you intend to use your machine as a +server: you probably don't want to start any services which you don't +need. Please remember that some services can be dangerous if they're enabled +on a server. In general, select only those services you +<emphasis>really</emphasis> need.</para> + </warning> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8dc94e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-miscellaneous"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-ti1">Deprecated - Security Level</title></info> + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-miscellaneous.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-im1" revision="1" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-pa1" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-it1"><primary>security</primary> + <secondary>level</secondary></indexterm>At this point, +<application>DrakX</application> allows you to choose your machine's +security level. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set higher +if the machine is to contain crucial data, or if it's to be directly exposed +to the Internet. The trade-off is that a higher security level is generally +obtained at the expense of ease of use.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-pa2" revision="3">If you don't know what to choose, keep the default option. You'll be able to +change it later with the <application>draksec</application> tool<phrase +condition="not-in-QSPlus" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-miscellaneous-ph1"> (see +<xref linkend="draksec"/>)</phrase>.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-pa3" revision="1">Fill the <guilabel>Security Administrator</guilabel> field with the e-mail +address of the person responsible for security. Security-related messages +will be sent to that address.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f26852f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake" userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-ti1">Deprecated - Format Disks with DiskDrake</title></info> + + + + + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa1">At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the +installation of your <application>Mandriva Linux</application> system. If +partitions have already been defined, either from a previous installation of +<application>GNU/Linux</application> or by another partitioning tool, you +can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard drive partitions must be +defined.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa2">To create partitions, you must first select a hard drive. You can select the +disk for partitioning by clicking on <quote>hda</quote> for the first IDE +drive, <quote>hdb</quote> for the second, <quote>sda</quote> for the first +<acronym>SCSI</acronym> drive and so on.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa3">To partition the selected hard drive, you can use these options:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa4"><guibutton>Clear all</guibutton>: this option deletes all partitions on the +selected hard drive</para></listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa5" revision="1"><guibutton>Auto allocate</guibutton>: this option enables you to +automatically create <acronym>ext3</acronym> and swap partitions in the free +space of your hard drive</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa6" revision="1"><guibutton>More</guibutton>: gives access to additional features:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa7"><guibutton>Save partition table</guibutton>: saves the partition table to a +floppy. Useful for later partition-table recovery if necessary. It is +strongly recommended that you perform this step.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa8"><guibutton>Restore partition table</guibutton>: allows you to restore a +previously saved partition table from a floppy disk.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa9"><guibutton>Rescue partition table</guibutton>: if your partition table is +damaged, you can try to recover it using this option. Please be careful and +remember that it doesn't always work.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa10"><guibutton>Reload partition table</guibutton>: discards all changes and +reloads the partition table that was originally on the hard drive.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa11"><guilabel>Removable media auto-mounting</guilabel>: unchecking this option +will force users to manually mount and unmount removable media such as +floppies and <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>s.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa12"><guibutton>Wizard</guibutton>: use this option if you wish to use a wizard +to partition your hard drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good +understanding of partitioning.</para></listitem> + + <listitem><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa13"><guibutton>Undo</guibutton>: use this option to cancel your changes.</para></listitem> + + <listitem><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa14"><guibutton>Toggle between normal/expert mode</guibutton>: allows additional +actions on partitions (type, options, format) and gives more information +about the hard drive.</para></listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa15"><guibutton>Done</guibutton>: when you are finished partitioning your hard +drive, this will save your changes back to disk.</para> + </listitem> + + </itemizedlist> + + <tip> + <para xml:id="drakx-pa71a">When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition size +by using the <keysym>Arrow</keysym> keys of your keyboard.</para> + </tip> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa16">Note: you can reach any option using the keyboard. Navigate through the +partitions using <keycap>Tab</keycap> and the <keycap>Up/Down</keycap> +arrows.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa17">When a partition is selected, you can use:<itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa18"><keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>c</keysym></keycombo> to create a +new partition (when an empty partition is selected)</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa19"><keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>d</keysym></keycombo> to delete a +partition</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa20"><keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>m</keysym></keycombo> to set the +mount point</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <note revision="10"> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa21">To get information about the different file system types available, please +read the <acronym>ext2FS</acronym> chapter from the <citetitle>Reference +Manual</citetitle>.</para> + </note> + + <para condition="ppc" xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa22" revision="1">If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS +<quote>bootstrap</quote> partition of at least 1<acronym>MB</acronym> which +will be used by the <application>yaboot</application> bootloader. If you opt +to make the partition a bit larger, say 50<acronym>MB</acronym>, you may +find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for +emergency boot situations.</para> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c86c6352 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section condition="extended" userlevel="expert" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" + xml:id="drakxid-resizeFATChoose" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-ti1">Deprecated - Choose FAT Partition to Be Resized</title> + </info> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa1"><indexterm> + <primary>partitions</primary> + + <secondary>resize</secondary> + </indexterm> More than one +<application>Microsoft</application> partition has been detected on your +hard drive. Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to +install your new <application>Mageia</application> operating system.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa2">Each partition is listed as follows: "Linux name", "Windows name", +"Capacity".</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa3">"Linux name" is structured: "hard drive type", "hard drive number", +"partition number" (for example, "sda1").</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa4">"Hard drive type" is "sd" + </para> + + <para><!-- (mentioning SCSI doesn't seem needed anymore - Marja) if it is a <acronym>SCSI</acronym> hard drive. +I rewrote it and added it back - MrsB--> +This is standard for hard drives now and has nothing to do with SD Memory +Cards. Hard drives were previously prefixed "hd" for IDE drives or "sd" for +SATA drives but they are all now prefixed with "sd". </para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa5">"Hard drive number" is actually a letter and always follows "sd": <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa6">"a" means "first hard drive";</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa7">"b" means "second hard drive";</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa8">and so on...</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa11">"Windows name" is the letter of your hard drive under +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> (the first +disk or partition is called "C:").</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7eb7d355 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectInstallClass" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-ti1">Deprecated - Installation Class</title></info> + + + <para xml:id="drakx-pa19a" revision="1">This step is shown only if an existing <application>GNU/Linux</application> +partition is found on your machine.</para> + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectInstallClass.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-im1" revision="1" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa1" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-it1"><primary>installation</primary> + <secondary>class</secondary></indexterm><application>DrakX</application> now +needs to know if you want to install from scratch or upgrade your existing +<application>Mageia</application> system:</para> + + + + + <itemizedlist> + +<listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa3" revision="2"><guilabel>Upgrade</guilabel>.<indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-it2" revision="2"> + <primary>upgrade</primary></indexterm>If you +have an older <application>Mageia</application> operating system, this +option allows you to upgrade it. Your existing partitioning scheme and user +data won't be altered. Most of the other configuration steps remain +available and are similar to a standard installation.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa2" revision="4"><!-- Removed - simon, grenoya and marja think it is not needed: - For the most part, this + completely wipes out the old system. However, depending on your + partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of your existing data + (particularly <literal> +/home</literal> directories) from being + overwritten. If you wish to change how your hard drives are + partitioned, or to change the file system, you should use this + option.--> +<guilabel>Install</guilabel>. Use this option for everything except +upgrading an existing Mageia installation.</para> + </listitem> + + + + </itemizedlist> + + + + +<!-- This note is not needed, now. To be used again when we have older Mageia versions from which upgrading is no longer supported. -marja + <note revision="12"> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa4" revision="1">Using the + <quote>Upgrade</quote> option should work fine on <application>Mageia</application> + systems running version <literal>1</literal> or later. Performing + an upgrade on prior versions is not recommended.</para> + </note> --> +</section> + diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d60a4e08 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectKeyboard"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring the Keyboard</title></info> + + + <note> + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa5">DrakX shows one or more keyboards, depending on which language(s) you have +chosen</para> + </note> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectKeyboard.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-im1" revision="1" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa1" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-it1"><primary>keyboard</primary> + </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectKeyboard-it2"> + <primary>language</primary><secondary>keyboard</secondary></indexterm>Depending on the language you chose (see <xref +linkend="drakxid-selectLanguage"/>), <application>DrakX</application> +automatically selects a particular type of keyboard configuration. Verify +that the selection suits you or choose another keyboard layout. If you don't +know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications that came +with your system, or ask the computer vendor. You can also look here: <link +xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link> +</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa2">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton +revision="1">More</guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard +there. Note that after having chosen your keyboard, you will return to the +first screen and it'll seem that a keyboard from this first screen was +chosen. You can safely ignore this and go on, the keyboard you chose from +the full list will now be configured! </para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa3">If you choose a keyboard layout based on a non-Latin alphabet, the next +dialog will allow you to choose the key binding which will switch the +keyboard between the Latin and non-Latin layouts.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa4" revision="1">Additional information: You may have a keyboard which does not correspond +exactly to your language: for example, if you are an English-speaking Swiss +native, you may have a Swiss keyboard. Or if you speak English and are +located in Québec, you may find yourself in the same situation where your +native language and country-set keyboard don't match. In either case, this +installation step will allow you to select an appropriate keyboard. </para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bcbbfe80 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-selectLanguage" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-ti1">Deprecated - Choosing your Language</title></info> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa1" revision="1">The first step is to choose your preferred language.</para> + + <figure xml:id="selectLanguage-fig" revision="2"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-ti2">Choosing the Default Language</title></info> <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectLanguage.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-im1" revision="4" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa2" revision="5"><indexterm + xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-it1"> + <primary>language</primary> + </indexterm>First open the tree relative to the +continent you are located in, and then choose the language you speak. Your +language choice will affect the installer, the documentation, and the system +in general. </para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa3" revision="3">Click the <guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> button near the botom of +the list to go to the screen to select additional languages for your +workstation, thereby installing the language-specific files for system +documentation and applications. For example, if Spanish friends are to use +your machine, select English as the default language in the first screen and +<guilabel>Español</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> +screen.</para> + +<note> +<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa4" revision="2">You are advised to install the language of your keyboard and the language of +the country you live in as additional languages if they are not the same as +your preferred language.</para> + </note> + + <note> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa5" revision="2">About <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> (unicode) support: Unicode is a character +encoding intended to cover all existing languages. <application>Mageia +Linux</application> uses <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> by default for all +languages</para> + + + <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts"> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa6" revision="1">If you know UTF-8 encoding doesn't work well for your language, tick the box +<guilabel>Old compatibility (non-UTF) encoding</guilabel> at the top of the +<guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> screen</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa7" revision="1">Be aware that this will then apply to all languages on your system</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </note> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa4" revision="4">Note that you're not limited to choosing a single additional language. You +may choose several, or even install them all by selecting the <guilabel>All +languages</guilabel> box. Selecting support for a language means +translations, fonts, spell checkers, etc. will also be installed for that +language. Make sure you select all languages which are likely to be useful +on the machine now, it may be difficult to configure support for languages +not chosen at install time at a later date.</para> + + + + <tip> + <para xml:id="drakx-pa18a" revision="2">To switch between the various languages installed on your system, you can +launch the <command>localedrake</command> command as <literal>root</literal> +to change the language used by the entire system. Running the command as a +regular user will only change the language settings for that particular +user.</para> + </tip> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..22336cb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectMouse" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring your Mouse</title></info> + + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectMouse.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-im1" revision="1" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa1" revision="12"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-it1"><primary>mouse</primary></indexterm>Usually, +<application>DrakX</application> has no problems detecting the number of +buttons on your mouse. If it fails to properly recognize it, it assumes you +have a two-button mouse and will configure it for third-button +emulation. The third-button mouse button of a two-button mouse can be +obtained by simultaneously clicking the left and right mouse +buttons. <application>DrakX</application> will automatically know whether +your mouse uses a <acronym>PS/2</acronym>, serial or <acronym>USB</acronym> +interface.</para> + + <note> + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectMouse-pa5" revision="2">If you have a 3-button mouse without a wheel, you can choose a +<guilabel>with Wheel emulation</guilabel> +mouse. <application>DrakX</application> will then configure your mouse so +that you can simulate the wheel with it: to do so, press the middle button +and move your mouse pointer up and down.</para> + </note> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa2">If for some reason you wish to specify a different type of mouse, select it +from the list provided.</para> + + <tip> + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectMouse-pa6">You can select the <guilabel>Universal | Any PS/2 & USB mice</guilabel> +entry to choose a <quote>generic</quote> mouse type which will work with +nearly all mice.</para> + </tip> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa3" revision="12">If you choose a mouse other than the default one, a test screen will be +displayed. Use the buttons and wheel to verify that the settings are correct +and that the mouse is working correctly. If the mouse isn't working well, +press the <keycap>space</keycap> bar or <keycap>Enter</keycap> key to cancel +the test and you will be returned to the mouse list.</para> + + <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-it2"> + <primary>mouse</primary> <secondary>Wheel</secondary> + </indexterm> + + <note> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa4" revision="3">Occasionally wheel mice are not detected automatically, so you will need to +select your mouse from a list. Be sure to select the one corresponding to +the port that your mouse is attached to. After selecting a mouse and +pressing the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, a mouse image will be +displayed on-screen. Scroll the mouse wheel to ensure that it is correctly +activated. As you scroll your mouse wheel, you will see the on-screen scroll +wheel moving. Test the buttons and check that the mouse pointer moves +on-screen as you move your mouse about.</para> + </note> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f179ed1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-selectSerialPort" userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectSerialPort-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring your Mouse</title></info> + + + + + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectSerialPort-pa1" revision="10">Please select the correct port. For example, the <literal>COM1</literal> +port under <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> is +named <literal>ttyS0</literal> under <application>GNU/Linux</application>.</para> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e2a43525 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-setRootPassword"> + <info> + <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-ti1">Deprecated - Root Password</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject condition="expert"> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx-setRootPassword.png" +width="11.5cm" align="center" format="PNG" +xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it1"> + <primary>root</primary> + + <secondary>password</secondary> + </indexterm> + + <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it2"> + <primary>password</primary> + + <secondary>root</secondary> + </indexterm> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa1">This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your +<application>GNU/Linux</application> system: you must enter the +<literal>root</literal> password. <literal>Root</literal> is the system +administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add users, +change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, +<literal>root</literal> can do everything! That's why you must choose a +password which is difficult to guess: <application>DrakX</application> will +tell you if the password you chose is too simple. You're not forced to enter +a password, but we <emphasis>strongly</emphasis> encourage you to do so. +<application>GNU/Linux</application> is just as prone to operator error as +any other operating system. Since <literal>root</literal> can overcome all +limitations and unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly +accessing the partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to +become <literal>root</literal>.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa2">The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least 8 +characters long. Never write down <literal>root</literal>'s password — it +makes it far too easy to compromise your system.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa3">One caveat: don't make the password too long or too complicated because you +must be able to remember it!</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa4">The password won't be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce the +chance of a blind typing error you will need to enter the password twice. If +you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you will have to use this +<quote>incorrect</quote> password when you try to connect as +<literal>root</literal>, at least for the first time.</para> + + <para revision="4" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa5">You can change the way users are authenticated on your computer by clicking +on the <guibutton>Authentication method</guibutton> button. The following +authentication methods are available:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa7"><guilabel>Local file</guilabel>. Use a local file for all authentication and +user information. This is the default method.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa8"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it3"> + <primary>LDAP</primary> + </indexterm><indexterm revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it4"> + <primary>authentication</primary> + + <secondary>LDAP</secondary> + </indexterm><guilabel>LDAP</guilabel>. Use an <acronym>LDAP</acronym> server for +some or all authentication needs. An <acronym>LDAP</acronym> directory +consolidates certain types of information within your organization.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa9"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it5"> + <primary>NIS</primary> + </indexterm><indexterm revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it6"> + <primary>authentication</primary> + + <secondary>NIS</secondary> + </indexterm><guilabel>NIS</guilabel>. Authenticates users against a +<acronym>NIS</acronym> domain. This allows you to run a group of computers +in the same <acronym>NIS</acronym> domain using a common password and group +file.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem condition="ML-Full-Manual" xml:id="drakxid-setRootPassword-SmartCard"> + <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa10"><guilabel>Smart Card</guilabel>. Uses <application>SmartCard</application> +hardware for providing authentication services.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa11"><indexterm revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it7"> + <primary>authentication</primary> + + <secondary>PDC</secondary> + </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-it8"> + <primary>authentication</primary> + + <secondary>Active Directory</secondary> + </indexterm><guilabel>Windows Domain</guilabel>. Uses a +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> domain +controller to provide authentication services through <application>Active +Directory</application>, <application>Microsoft</application>'s +implementation of <acronym>LDAP</acronym>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakx-pa6">If you select a method other than <guilabel>Local file</guilabel>, you will +be asked to provide some parameters, which vary from one method to the +other. If you don't know those parameters, you should ask your network +administrator.</para> + + <note> + <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakx-pa137a">If you happen to have problems remembering passwords, or if your computer +will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely trust everybody +who uses your computer, you can choose to have <guibutton>No +password</guibutton>. Please bear in mind that this is an insecure option, +and it is not recommended.</para> + + <para revision="2"></para> + + <para revision="2"></para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..78858054 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner" ><info><title xml:id="setupBootloaderBeginner-title">Deprecated - Installing a Bootloader</title></info> + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-setupBootloader.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-im1" revision="1" +width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it1"> + <primary>bootloader</primary> + <secondary>LILO</secondary> + </indexterm> + <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it2"> + <primary>bootloader</primary> + <secondary>GRUB</secondary> + </indexterm> + <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it3"> + <primary>LILO</primary> + </indexterm> + <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it4"> + <primary>GRUB</primary> + </indexterm> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa1" revision="4">A bootloader is a small program which is started by the computer at boot +time. It's responsible for starting up the whole system. Normally, the +bootloader installation is totally +automated. <application>DrakX</application> will analyze the disk boot +sector and act according to what it finds there:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa2" revision="1">If a <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> boot +sector is found, it will replace it with a +<application>GRUB</application>/<application>LILO</application> boot +sector. This way you will be able to load either +<application>GNU/Linux</application> or any other <acronym>OS</acronym> +installed on your machine.</para> + </listitem> + + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa3" revision="1">In any other case it will ask you where it should place the boot +loader. Generally, the <guilabel>First sector of the drive (MBR)</guilabel> +is the safest place.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa4" revision="1">Choosing <guilabel>Skip</guilabel> won't install a bootloader. Use this +option only if you know what you're doing.</para> + + + + + + + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupSCSI.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupSCSI.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a0e6f23 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupSCSI.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns52="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" condition="extended" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-setupSCSI"> + <info> + <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-ti1">Hard Disk Detection and Configuration</title> + </info> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa1"><application>DrakX</application> will first attempt to detect any +<acronym>IDE</acronym> and <acronym>SATA</acronym> devices present in your +computer. It will also scan for one or more <acronym>PCI</acronym> +<acronym>SCSI</acronym> cards. If a <acronym>SCSI</acronym> card is found, +<application>DrakX</application> will attempt to install the correct driver.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa2">However, because hardware detection is not foolproof, +<application>DrakX</application> may fail to detect your +<acronym>SCSI</acronym> hard drives. If so, you mayl need to specify your +hardware.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa3">If you have had to specify your <acronym>PCI</acronym> +<acronym>SCSI</acronym> adapter(s), <application>DrakX</application> will +ask if you want to pass configuration options to it. Allow +<application>DrakX</application> to probe the hardware to determine any +card-specific options needed to initialize the adapter.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa4"><application>DrakX</application> will usually complete this step without +issues.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa5">If <application>DrakX</application> cannot automatically determine the +parameters to be passed to the hardware, you'll need to manually configure +the driver.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa6">How you determine these parameters is beyond the scope of this help screen.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d13a472 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + <!-- Created by Marja Van Waes --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakx-setupX"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring X, the Graphical Server</title></info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-setupX"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-configureX.png" +format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-im3" revision="2" width="11.5cm"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-it9"> <primary>X Window System</primary> + </indexterm><application>X</application> (for X +Window System) is the heart of the <application>GNU/Linux</application> +graphical interface on which all the graphical environments +(<application>KDE</application>, <application>GNOME</application>, +<application>AfterStep</application>, +<application>WindowMaker</application>, etc.) bundled with +<application>Mageia</application> rely on.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa2">You will see a list of different parameters which you can change in order to +optimize your graphical display.</para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureX_card_list"> + <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te1">Graphic Card</term> + + + + + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa3">If everything works fine, the installer should detect and configure the +video card installed on your machine. If the detection or configuration is +incorrect, you can choose the card installed on your system from a list.</para> + + + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureX_monitor"> + <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te2">Monitor</term> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa4">If the installer fails to detect or configure your monitor properly, you can +choose from this list the monitor which is connected to your computer.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureX_resolution"> + <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te3">Роздільна здатність</term> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa5">Here you can choose the resolutions and color depths available for your +graphics hardware. Choose the one which best suits your needs (you will be +able to make changes after the installation). A sample of the chosen +configuration will be shown in the monitor picture.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te4">Перевірити</term> + <listitem> + + <note> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa6">Depending on your hardware, this entry might not appear.</para> + </note> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa7">The system will try to open a graphical screen at the desired resolution. If +you see the test message during the test and answer <guimenu>Yes</guimenu>, +then <application>DrakX</application> will proceed to the next step. If you +don't see it, it means that some part of the auto-detected configuration was +incorrect and the test will automatically end after a few seconds and return +you to the menu. Change settings until you get a correct graphical display.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureXxdm"> + <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te5">Параметри</term> + <listitem> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa8">This step allows you to choose whether you want your machine to +automatically switch to a graphical interface at boot. Obviously, you may +want to select the <guilabel>No</guilabel> option if your machine is to act +as a server, or if you were not successful in getting the display +configured.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </section> + + diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..872e219b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-takeOverHdChoose" userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdChoose-ti1">Deprecated - Choose drive to install Linux on</title></info> + + + + + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdChoose-pa1" revision="1">Choose the hard drive you want to erase in order to install your new +<application>Mageia</application> partition. Be careful, all data on this +drive will be lost and will not be recoverable!</para> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..55df583c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm" userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm-ti1" revision="1">Deprecated - Confirm data deletion</title></info> + + + + + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm-pa1"><!-- The arrows aren't on the button anymore -marja -> --> +<!-- ->--> +Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you want to delete all data and +partitions present on this hard drive. Be careful, after clicking on +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> you will not be able to recover any data and +partitions present on this hard drive, including any +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> data.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm-pa2"><!--<- --> +Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> to quit this operation without +losing data and partitions present on this hard drive.</para> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakxservices.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakxservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4fe3282e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakxservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakxservices" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakxservices-ti1">Manage system services by enabling or disabling them</title><subtitle>drakxservices</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata width="80%" xml:id="drakxservices-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakxservices.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">drakxservices</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/harddrake2.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/harddrake2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dbac2d2b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/harddrake2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="harddrake2" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="harddrake2-ti1">Налаштування обладнання</title> + + <subtitle>harddrake2</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="harddrake2.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="harddrake2-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>За допомогою цієї програми<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">harddrake2</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> ви зможете +здійснити загальний огляд обладнання вашого комп’ютера. Після запуску +програма виконує автоматичний пошук всіх компонентів обладнання. З цією +метою вона використовує програму <code>ldetect</code>, яка у своїй роботі +покладається на список обладнання з пакунка <code>ldetect-lst</code>.</para> + + <section> + <title>Вікно програми</title> + + <para>Вікно поділено на два стовпчики.</para> + + <para>У лівому стовпчику буде показано список виявленого обладнання. Пристрої буде +згруповано за категоріями. Натисніть кнопочку >, щоб розгорнути список +категорії. За допомогою цього стовпчика можна вибирати пристрій зі списку.</para> + + <para>У правому стовпчику буде показано дані щодо позначеного пристрою. За +допомогою пункту меню <guimenu>Довідка -> Опис полів</guimenu> можна +отримати докладніший опис показаних полів.</para> + + <para>Відповідно до вибраного типу пристрою, у нижній частині правої панелі вікна +буде показано одну або дві кнопки:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Встановити параметри поточного драйвера</guibutton>: за допомогою +цієї кнопки можна змінити параметри роботи модуля системи, пов’язаного з +роботою пристрою. Цією кнопкою варто користуватися лише досвідченим +користувачам.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Запустити інструмент налаштування</guibutton>: отримати доступ до +засобу налаштовування пристрою. Зазвичай, доступ до цього засобу можна +отримати безпосередньо з Центру керування Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Меню програми</title> + + <para><bridgehead>Параметри</bridgehead></para> + + <para>За допомогою пунктів меню <guimenu>Параметри</guimenu> ви можете увімкнути +автоматичне виявлення деяких типів пристроїв:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>модемів</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>пристроїв Jaz</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>паралельних пристроїв Zip</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist>Типово, таке виявлення не виконується, оскільки воно є доволі +тривалим. Позначте відповідні пункти, якщо на вашому комп’ютері встановлено +відповідне обладнання. Виявлення буде виконано під час наступного запуску +програми.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/keyboarddrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/keyboarddrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e901f735 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/keyboarddrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="keyboarddrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="keyboarddrake-ti1">Налаштовування розкладки клавіатури</title> + + + + <!-- 2012-09-02 marja changed the title to "Set up the Keyboard Layout", so it is the same as the title in MCC --> +<subtitle>keyboarddrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" +fileref="keyboarddrake.png" xml:id="keyboarddrake-im1" format="PNG"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>Вступ</title> + + <para>The keyboarddrake tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">keyboarddrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> helps you +configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on +Mageia. It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can +be found in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled +"Configure mouse and keyboard".</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Розкладка клавіатури</title> + + <para>Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed +in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each +layout should be used for.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Тип клавіатури</title> + + <para>This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are +unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/localedrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/localedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bdf3dae1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/localedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="localedrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="localedrake-ti1">Налаштовування локалізації системи</title> + + <subtitle>localedrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="localedrake.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="localedrake-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Цим модулем<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна також за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести +команду <emphasis role="bold">localedrake</emphasis> від імені +адміністратора (root). + </para></footnote> можна скористатися за +допомогою розділу «Система» Центру керування Mageia. Пункт модуля підписано +«Налаштувати локалізацію системи». У разі його вибору буде відкрито вікно, +за допомогою якого ви можете вибрати мову. Типовий список буде підібрано за +мовами, які було вибрано під час встановлення системи.</para> + + <para>За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна задіяти режим +сумісності з застарілими кодуваннями (не-UTF8).</para> + + <para>У другому вікні буде показано список країн, у яких може використовуватися +вказана мова. Доступ до пунктів країн, яких немає у списку, можна отримати +за допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Інші країни</guibutton>.</para> + + <para>Щоб внесені вами зміни набули чинності, вам слід вийти з вашого облікового +запису у системі і знову увійти до нього.</para> + +<section xml:id="input_method"> + <info> + <title xml:id="input_method-ti1">Метод вводу</title> + </info> + <para>За допомогою сторінки <guilabel>Інші країни</guilabel> ви також можете +вибрати метод вводу або спосіб введення (зі спадного меню під списком). За +допомогою способів введення можна вводити символи мов, у яких запис +здійснюється не за допомогою літер (китайської, японської, корейської тощо).</para> + <para> Для азійських і африканських мов типовим способом введення буде вибрано +IBus, отже потреби у налаштовуванні цього способу введення вручну немає.</para> + <para>Інші способи введення (SCIM, GCIN, HIME тощо) також надають подібні +функціональні можливості. Встановити пакунки цих способів, якщо їх немає у +контекстному меню, можна за допомогою іншого модуля Центру керування +Mageia. Див. <xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref>.</para> +</section> + +</section> + diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/logdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/logdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a9c0b31 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/logdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="logdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="logdrake-ti1">Перегляд системного журналу</title> + + <subtitle>logdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="logdrake-im1" +format="PNG" fileref="logdrake.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">logdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center System tab, labelled "<guilabel>View and search system +logs</guilabel>".</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>To do a search in the logs</title> + + <para>First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis +role="bold">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to +<emphasis>do not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field +<emphasis role="bold">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s) +to search in the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is +possible to limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis +role="bold">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the +month and year, and check "<guibutton>Show only for the selected +day</guibutton>". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button +to see the results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the +file</guilabel>. It is possible to save the results in the .txt format by +clicking on the <emphasis role="bold">Save</emphasis> button.</para> + + <note> + <para>The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia +configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools. These logs are +updated each time a configuration is modified.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <title>To configure a mail alert</title> + + <para><guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and +the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured +address.</para> + + <para>To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role="bold">Mail +Alert</emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> +Configure the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the +running services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to +look watch. (See screenshot above).</para> + + <para>The following services can be watched :</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Служба Webmin</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Поштовий сервер postfix</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Сервер FTP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Сервер World Wide Web Apache</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Сервер SSH</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Сервер Samba</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Служба xinetd</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>BIND Domain Name Resolve</para> + + <para><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="logdrake1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider +unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows +the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone +out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value +to 3 times the number of processors.</para> + + <para>In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the +person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local +or on the Internet</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mageia-doc-readme.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mageia-doc-readme.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8a12504 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mageia-doc-readme.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mageia-test-document" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title>Mageia Test Document</title> + </info> + +<para>Testing testing</para> +<para>This is a <application>Mageia</application> test document. This is an +absolute minimal format XML document. As you can see: It's not very +complex...</para> + <para>I nicked the container from an old <application>Mandriva</application> XML +document and have been using it to play with XML rather than alter any of +the main documentation files. <note userlevel="beginner"><para>This is an interesting note with a revision tag..</para></note> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para>This is the first item in a list</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>This is the second item</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> + +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-boot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-boot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63724327 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-boot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-boot"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-boot-ti1">Завантаження</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-boot.png" format="PNG" +revision="1" xml:id="mcc-boot-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot +steps. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + + <orderedlist><title>Налаштовування послідовності завантаження</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakboot"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakboot--boot"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakedm"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakboot.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakboot--boot.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakedm.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-hardware.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-hardware.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..de61f388 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-hardware.xml @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-hardware"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-hardware-ti1">Обладнання</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-hardware.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-hardware-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your +hardware. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Налаштовування обладнання</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="harddrake2"/><emphasis>Переглянути і налаштувати +обладнання</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksound"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Налаштовування графіки</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drak3d"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="XFdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Configure mouse and keyboard</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="keyboarddrake"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="mousedrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Configure printing and scanning</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="system-config-printer"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), +the print job queues, ...</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="scannerdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Інше</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakups"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="harddrake2.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksound.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drak3d.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="XFdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="keyboarddrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="mousedrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="system-config-printer.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="scannerdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakups.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-intro.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-intro.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0526a4bf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-intro.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="mcc-intro"><info><title xml:id="mcc-intro-ti1">About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center</title></info> + + + <para>The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options to choose from +in the left column. Each of these options gives a different set of tools +that can be selected in the big right panel.</para> + + <para>The eight following chapters are about those eight options and the related +tools.</para> + + <para>The titles of those pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool +screens.</para> + + <para>There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on +the "Search" tab in the left column.</para> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-localdisks.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-localdisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f05b4f01 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-localdisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-localdisks" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-localdisks-ti1">Local disks</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="mcc-localdisks-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-localdisks.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your +local disks. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>Local disks</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="drakdisk"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--removable"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--fileshare"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakdisk.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--removable.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--fileshare.xml"></xi:include> + + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-network.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-network.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..73e749d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-network.xml @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-network" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-network-ti1">Network and Internet</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" +fileref="mcc-network.png" xml:id="mcc-network-im1" /> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link +below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>Manage your network devices</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draknetcenter"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconnect"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconnect--del"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>Personalize and Secure your network</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakproxy"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakgw"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draknetprofile"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakvpn"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>Інше</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="draknetcenter.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconnect.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconnect--del.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakproxy.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakgw.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="draknetprofile.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakvpn.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakhosts.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networkservices.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networkservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a020cc33 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networkservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-networkservices"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-networkservices-ti1">Мережеві служби</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-networkservices.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-networkservices-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if +the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose +between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or +on <xref linkend="mcc-sharing"/>to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>Мережеві служби</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_dhcp"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_bind"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_squid"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_ntp"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_sshd"/></para> + </listitem> + + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_dhcp.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_bind.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_squid.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_ntp.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_sshd.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networksharing.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networksharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81138111 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networksharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-networksharing" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-networksharing-ti1">Спільний доступ</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="mcc-networksharing-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-networksharing.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and +directories. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>Налаштовування доступу до ресурсів Windows</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--smb"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="draksambashare"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and +directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>Configure NFS shares</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--nfs"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="draknfs"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>Configure WebDAV shares</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--dav"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--smb.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksambashare.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--nfs.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draknfs.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--dav.xml"></xi:include> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-security.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-security.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..725a0fa6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-security.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-security"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-security-ti1">Безпека</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-security.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-security-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a +link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>Безпека</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="msecgui"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, permissions +and audit</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakfirewall"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksec"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakinvictus"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakguard"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="msecgui.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakfirewall.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="draksec.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakinvictus.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="drakguard.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-sharing.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-sharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..33e9d144 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-sharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-sharing"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-sharing-ti1">Sharing</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-sharing.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-sharing-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only +visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can +choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link +below or on <xref linkend="mcc-networkservices"/>to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>Sharing</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_proftpd"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_apache2"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_proftpd.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_apache2.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-system.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-system.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..79b3e526 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-system.xml @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-system"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-system-ti1">System</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="mcc-system.png" xml:id="mcc-system-im1" +revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several system and administration +tools. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Керування системними службами</title> + <listitem> + <para> <xref linkend="drakauth"></xref> </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakxservices"></xref></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakfont"></xref></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Локалізація</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakclock"></xref></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="localedrake"></xref></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> +</listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Інструменти адміністрування</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="logdrake"></xref></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconsole"></xref></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="userdrake"></xref><emphasis> = Manage users on +system</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="transfugdrake"></xref></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksnapshot-config"></xref></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> +</listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakauth.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakxservices.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakfont.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakclock.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="localedrake.xml"></xi:include> + + + <xi:include href="logdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakconsole.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="userdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="transfugdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksnapshot-config.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mgaapplet-config.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mgaapplet-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ed8883b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mgaapplet-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mgaapplet-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mgaapplet-config-ti1">Configure updates frequency</title> + + <subtitle>mgaapplet-config</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" +xml:id="mgaapplet-config-im1" format="PNG" fileref="mgaapplet-config.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software +management</emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / +Updates configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <inlinemediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/> </imageobject></inlinemediaobject> in the system tray.</para> + + <para/> + + <para>The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for +updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check. The +check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is +out.</para> + + <para/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mousedrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mousedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..14b85f89 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mousedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mousedrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mousedrake-ti1">Налаштовування пристрою введення (миша, сенсорна панель)</title> + + <subtitle>mousedrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="mousedrake-im1" revision="1" +fileref="mousedrake.png" align="center" format="PNG" /> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">mousedrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by +Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse.</para> + + <para>The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse +and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time "Universal / Any +PS/2 & USB mice"' is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is +immediately taken into account.</para> + + </section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/msecgui.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/msecgui.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb727a26 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/msecgui.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="msecgui" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <info> + <title xml:id="msecgui-ti1">MSEC: System Security and Audit</title><subtitle>msecgui</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="msecgui-im1" revision="1" align="center" +format="PNG" fileref="msecgui.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">msecgui</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/rpmdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/rpmdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f9110d70 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/rpmdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,218 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="rpmdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + <!--2012-09-03 marja expanded xml:id's of section and title below, because they conflicted with identical xml:id's in another page of MCC help, also replaced first para in some sections with title tags, removed figure tags--> +<info annotations="simonnzg 6jan2013"> + <title xml:id="rpmdrake-ti1">Керування програмним забезпеченням (Встановлення або вилучення програм)</title> + + <subtitle>rpmdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="rpmdrake-im1" revision="1" +fileref="rpmdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + + + <section xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction"> + <title xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction-ti1">Вступ до rpmdrake</title> + + <para>За допомогою цього інструмента<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">rpmdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote>, також +відомого за назвою drakrpm, можна встановлювати, вилучати і оновлювати +пакунки з програмним забезпеченням. Програма є графічним інтерфейсом до +URPMI. Під час кожного запуску вона перевірятиме списки пакунків у інтернеті +(які називаються «носіями» пакунків), отримані безпосередньо з офіційних +серверів Mageia, і показуватиме список найсвіжіших пакунків з програмним +забезпеченням для вашої системи. Система фільтрування надає вам змогу +переглядати списки пакунків лише певного типу: ви можете переглянути список +встановлених пакунків (типове фільтрування) або лише доступні +оновлення. Також можна ознайомитися зі списком невстановлених пакунків. Ви +можете знайти пакунок за назвою або словом у резюме опису пакунка, а також +на назвами файлів, які є частиною пакунка.</para> + + <para>Для належної роботи rpmdrake слід налаштувати параметри сховищ пакунків за +допомогою <xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/>.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Основні частини вікна</title> + + <screenshot> +<mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake1_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></screenshot> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Фільтрування за типом пакунка:</emphasis></para> + + <para>За допомогою цього фільтра ви можете звузити список пакунків до певного +типу. Під час першого запуску програми для керування пакунками у списку +будуть лише програми з графічним інтерфейсом. Ви можете наказати програмі +показувати всі пакунки і всі залежності цих пакунків разом з бібліотеками +або наказати показувати лише групи пакунків (цілісні програмні комплекси), +лише оновлення або лише пакунки, портовані з новіших версій Mageia Linux.</para> + + <warning> + <para>Типовий режим фільтрування призначено для користувачів, які не мають +значного досвіду користування Linux або Mageia, тобто тих, кому не потрібні +програми, які керуються командним рядком, чи програми для +спеціалістів. Оскільки ви читаєте цю документацію, ви очевидно зацікавлені у +розширенні ваших знань щодо Mageia, отже, краще вибрати варіант «Всі».</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><firstterm> <emphasis role="bold">Фільтрування за станом пакунка:</emphasis> +</firstterm></para> + + <para>За допомогою цього фільтрування ви можете наказати програмі показати лише +встановлені пакунки, пакунки, які ще не встановлено, або всі пакунки, +встановлені і невстановлені.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Режим пошуку:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Натисніть цю піктограму, щоб вибрати дані, у яких виконуватиметься пошук: +назви пакунків, резюме, повні описи або списки файлів, що містяться у +пакунках.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Поле «Знайти»:</emphasis></para> + + <para>У цьому полі можна вказати одне або декілька ключових слів. Якщо для пошук +ви хочете використати декілька ключових слів, відокремте їх символом +«|». Наприклад, якщо ви хочете знайти пакунки для mplayer або xine, вкажіть: +«mplayer | xine» (без лапок).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Витерти все:</emphasis></para> + + <para>За допомогою натискання цієї піктограми можна вилучити всі ключові слова у +полі «Знайти».</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Список категорій:</emphasis></para> + + <para>На цій панелі наведено список всіх програм і пакунків, розподілених за +категоріями та підкатегоріями.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Панель опису:</emphasis></para> + + <para>На цій панелі буде показано назву пакунка, резюме та короткий опис. Тут ви +зможете знайти багато корисних даних щодо позначеного пакунка, а також точні +дані щодо пакунка, включених до нього файлів та список змін у пакунку, +створений супровідниками пакунка.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Стовпчик стану</title> + + <para>Після належного визначення параметрів фільтрування ви можете шукати +програмне забезпечення або за категоріями (у області 6 на рисунку) або за +назвою, резюме, описом тощо, за допомогою області 4. Список пакунків, які +відповідають вашому запиту на вказаних вами носіях пакунків, буде показано з +позначками стану (встановлено, не встановлено, оновлення). Щоб змінити цей +стан, просто позначте або зніміть позначку з пункту перед назвою пакунка у +списку і натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2" align="left"> + <colspec align="center"/> + + <thead> + <row> + <entry align="center">Піктограма</entry> + + <entry valign="middle" align="center">Умовне позначення</entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake2_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">Цей пакунок вже встановлено</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake3_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">Цей пакунок буде встановлено</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake4_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">Стан цього пакунка змінювати не можна</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake5_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">Цей пакунок є оновленням</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake6_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">Цей пакунок буде вилучено</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table></para> + + <para>Приклади на наведеному вище знімку:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Якщо зняти позначку з пункту digikam (значок з зеленою стрілкою означає, що +цей пакунок встановлено), піктограма стану стане червоною із зображенням +стрілки вгору. Пакунок буде вилучено одразу після натискання кнопки +<guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Якщо позначити пункт qdigidoc (пакунок не встановлено, як можна бачити зі +стовпчика стану), у стовпчику стану з’явиться помаранчева піктограма стану +зі стрілкою вниз. Пакунок буде встановлено одразу після натискання кнопки +<guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Залежності</title> + + <screenshot> +<mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake7_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></screenshot> + + <para>Для належної роботи деяких пакунків доведеться встановити інші пакунки, які +називають залежностями. Ці пакунки містять бібліотеки або додаткові +інструменти. Якщо вам трапиться такий пакунок, rpmdrake покаже інформаційне +вікно, за допомогою якого ви зможете погодитися зі встановленням +залежностей, скасувати встановлення або отримати додаткові дані +(див. вище). Також ви зможете вибрати потрібний вам пакунок, якщо залежності +можна вдовольнити у декілька способів. rpmdrake просто покаже вам вікно зі +списком варіантів задоволення залежностей і кнопками отримання додаткових +даних та вибору пакунка, який слід встановити.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-icons.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-icons.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab972ed8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-icons.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 26 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="sample-page-icons"> + <info> + <title xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-ti1">Simple sample page</title> + </info> + + <note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa1">Paragraph with <emphasis>note</emphasis> icon.</para> + </note> + + <tip> + <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa2">Paragraph with <emphasis>tip</emphasis> icon.</para> + </tip> + + <warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa3">Paragraph with <emphasis>warning</emphasis> icon.</para> + </warning> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa4"><emphasis>If you want to use other icons, make sure you import some cc-by-sa +ones first.</emphasis></para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-itemized-list.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-itemized-list.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e015a56d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-itemized-list.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + + + + +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list"><info><title xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-ti1">Sample page with itemized list</title></info> + + + + + <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa1" revision="1">If you want to copy this list to your page, don't forget to adjust the page +names and paragraph numbers in the code </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa2" revision="1">First item on the list</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa3" revision="1">Second item on the list</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa4" revision="1">Та інше</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-picture.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-picture.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65cdeed7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-picture.xml @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + + + + + + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="sample-page-picture"><!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 24 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- Same day, replaced <literal> + tags with <code> tags --> +<!-- Same day, replaced <literal> + tags with <example> tags arond the code for the screenhot and around part of the text in a paragraph .--> +<!-- Same day nested <code> + inside <para> --> +<!-- sams day, gave up on finding correct way of showing code --> +<info><title xml:id="sample-page-picture-ti1">Sample page with picture</title></info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + <para xml:id="sample-page-picture-pa1" revision="1">Look at the xml code of this page to see how the picture below was inserted</para> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-license.png" format="PNG" +align="center" xml:id="acceptLicense-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + + + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-sections.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-sections.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b0d81212 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-sections.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + + + + + + + +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="sample-page-sections"><info><title xml:id="sample-page-sections-ti1">Sample page with several sections</title></info> + +<section xml:id="first-section"><info><title xml:id="first-section-ti2" >This is the first section</title></info> + <para xml:id="sample-page-sections-pa2" revision="1">This section is nested in a section that covers the whole page</para> + + </section> + + + + + + <section xml:id="second-section"><info><title xml:id="second-section-ti3" >This is the second section</title></info> + <para xml:id="sample-page-sections-pa2" revision="1">In html you can link to it by adding #second-section to the link to this +page</para> + + </section> + + <section xml:id="third-section"><info><title xml:id="third-section-ti3" >This is the third section</title></info> + + <para xml:id="sample-page-sections-pa3" revision="1">And this section will be shown when going to +<code>/sample-page-sections#third-section</code> </para> + + </section> + + </section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-simple.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-simple.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..878bb613 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-simple.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + + + + + + + + +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="sample-page-simple"><info><title xml:id="sample-page-simple-ti1">Simple sample page</title></info> + + <para> TEST3: Again writing a line to test whether version number is increased on +saving this file </para> + + + <para xml:id="sample-page-simple-pa1" revision="1">You can use this page to make another simple page, but if you do so, don't +forget to not only change the name of this file, but to change the page name +in the code of this page, too </para> + + <para xml:id="sample-page-simple-pa2" revision="1">Everywhere where you see <code>sample-page-simple</code> in the code, you +should change that into your page name</para> + + <para xml:id="sample-page-simple-pa3" revision="1">If you want to make more paragraphs, copy one and change its number in the +code, for instance <code>pa3</code> to <code>pa4</code> and then change the +content. It is possible to put a paragraph between existing ones by adding a +letter to the number, e.g. <code>pa2a</code> </para> + + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/scannerdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/scannerdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8dd5192a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/scannerdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,224 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="scannerdrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerdrake-ti1">Налаштовування сканера</title> + <subtitle>scannerdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + + + <section xml:id="scannerinstallation"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerinstallation-ti1">Встановлення</title> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">scannerdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> allows you to configure a +single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. It +also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a +remote computer or to access remote scanners.</para> + + <para>When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following +message:</para> + + <para><emphasis>"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?"</emphasis></para> + + <para>Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install +<code>scanner-gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet +installed.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see +the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, +<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner +sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref +linkend="scannersharing"/>.</para> + + + <para>However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its +cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new +scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a +scanner manually</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the +list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis></para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake2.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im2"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click +<emphasis>Cancel</emphasis></para> + + <para>Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link +xlink:href="http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html">SANE: +Supported Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link +xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para> + </note> + +<figure xml:id="choosescannerport"> +<info> + <title xml:id="choosescannerport-ti1">Choose port</title> + </info> <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake3.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im3"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure> + + <para>You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available +ports</emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that +case, select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one.</para> + + <para>After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen +similar to the one below.</para> +<para>If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref +linkend="scannerextrasteps"/>.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake4.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im4"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + + <section xml:id="scannersharing"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannersharing-ti2">Scannersharing</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake5.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im5"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be +accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also +decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on +this machine.</para> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or +deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on +this computer.</para> + + <para>Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted +from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake6.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im6"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake7.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im7"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote +machines.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake8.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im8"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>"All remote machines" are allowed to access the local scanner.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake9.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im9"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool +offers to do it.</para> + + <para>At the end, the tool will alter these files:</para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive +"net"</para> + + <para>It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and +<emphasis>xinetd</emphasis> to be started on boot.</para> + </section> + +<section xml:id="scannerspecifics"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerspecifics-ti2">Специфічні поради</title> + </info> + + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Hewlett-Packard</para> + + <para>Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> +(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow +you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device +Manager</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Epson</para> + + <para>Drivers are available from <link +xlink:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this +page</link>. When indicated, you must install the +<emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then +<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the +<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict +with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be +ignored.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + +</section> + +<section xml:id="scannerextrasteps"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerextrasteps-ti1">Додаткові кроки зі встановлення</title> + </info> + + <para>It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref +linkend="choosescannerport"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra +steps to correctly configure your scanner.</para> + +<itemizedlist> + + <listitem> +<para>In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded +each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, +after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the +firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you +downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor.</para><para> + When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at +each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient.</para> +</listitem> + + <listitem> +<para>Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the +<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/"name_of_your_SANE_backend".conf file.</emphasis> </para> + </listitem> + +<listitem> +<para>Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know +what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link +xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para> +</listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/software-management.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/software-management.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6339ddfc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/software-management.xml @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" +xml:id="software-management"> + <info> + <title xml:id="software-management-ti1">Керування програмами</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="software-management-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="software-management.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for software +management. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + <orderedlist><title>Керування програмами</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="MageiaUpdate"></xref><emphasis> = Update your +system</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="mgaapplet-config"></xref></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media +sources for install and update</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="rpmdrake.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="MageiaUpdate.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="mgaapplet-config.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="drakrpm-edit-media.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/system-config-printer.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/system-config-printer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..79df705e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/system-config-printer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,352 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="system-config-printer"> + + + + + <info> + <!-- Language proof JohnR 2012/08/28 --> +<!-- 2012-09-03 marja: made the link to Complete the installation process work (I hope) + Lebarhon : added All in one devices in the chapter "Hewlett-Packard printers" 12/13--> +<title xml:id="system-config-printer-ti1">Встановлення і налаштовування принтера</title> + + <subtitle>system-config-printer</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" +xml:id="system-config-printer-im1" format="PNG" +fileref="system-config-printer.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="introduction"> + <title xml:id="introduction-ti1">Вступ</title> + + <para>Завданнями з друку у Mageia керує сервер, який називається CUPS. У сервера є +власний <link ns2:title="CUPS" ns2:href="http://localhost:631">інтерфейс +налаштовування</link>, доступ до якого здійснюється за допомогою програми +для перегляду сторінок інтернету. Втім, у Mageia передбачено і власний +інструмент для встановлення і налаштовування драйверів принтерів, який +називається system-config-printer і використовується також у інших +дистрибутивах, зокрема Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu та openSUSE.</para> + + <para>Вам варто увімкнути доступ до сховищ пакунків, які не є вільними, (non-free) +до того, як ви продовжите встановлення, оскільки пакунки деяких з драйверів +зберігаються лише у цьому сховищі.</para> + + <para>Керувати встановленням драйверів до принтерів можна за допомогою розділу +<guilabel>Обладнання</guilabel> Центру керування Mageia. Вам просто слід +вибрати пункт <guilabel>Налаштувати друк і сканування</guilabel><footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis>system-config-printer</emphasis>. Для роботи з програмою +доведеться вказати пароль адміністративного користувача (root).</para> + </footnote>.</para> + + <para>MCC попросить у вас дозволу щодо встановлення двох пакунків:</para> + + <blockquote> + <para>task-printing-server</para> + + <para>task-printing-hp</para> + </blockquote> + + <para>Вам слід погодитися на встановлення цих пакунків, щоб продовжити роботу з +програмою. За залежностями може бути встановлено до 230 МБ даних.</para> + + <para>Щоб додати принтер, натисніть кнопку <guilabel>Додати</guilabel>. Система +спробує виявити всі доступні принтери і порти. На знімку показано пункт +принтера, з’єднаного за допомогою USB. Якщо принтер буде виявлено, його буде +показано у першому рядку списку. За допомогою цього ж вікна можна +налаштувати мережевий принтер.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="automatic"> + <title>Принтер було виявлено автоматично</title> + + <para>Зазвичай, це стосується принтерів, з’єднаних з комп’ютером за допомогою +кабелю USB. Програма автоматично визначає назву принтера і показує +її. Виберіть принтер і натисніть кнопку <guilabel>Далі</guilabel>. Якщо з +принтером пов’язано відомий системі драйвер, його буде встановлено +автоматично. Якщо можна скористатися одним з декількох драйверів або або +системі не вдасться визначити найкращий драйвер, буде показано вікно з +проханням вибрати драйвер, пояснення до якого наведено у наступному +розділі. Продовжіть читання з розділу <xref linkend="terminate"/>.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="non_automatic"> + <title>Принтер не вдалося виявити автоматично</title> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="printer3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Після вибору порту система завантажить список драйверів і покаже вікно для +вибору драйвера. Ви зможете вибрати один з наведених нижче варіантів.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>вибрати принтер з бази даних</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>надати PPD-файл</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>пошукати драйвер для звантаження</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Якщо буде вибрано варіант з пошуком у базі даних, програма спочатку +запропонує вам вибрати назви компанії-виробника принтера, а потім назву +пристрою та драйвер, пов’язаний з роботою цього пристрою. Якщо можна буде +скористатися декількома драйверами, варто вибрати з них рекомендований. Якщо +у вас виникають якісь проблеми з роботою рекомендованого драйвера, виберіть +той з драйверів, який працює найкраще.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="terminate"> + <title>Завершення процедури встановлення</title> + + <para>Після вибору драйвера буде відкрито вікно введення даних, які допоможуть +системі позначити і розпізнати принтер. У першому рядку слід ввести назву +пристрою, яку буде показано у програмах у списку доступних принтерів. Після +введення даних засіб встановлення драйвера запропонує надрукувати тестову +сторінку. Щойно буде закрито сторінку тестового друку, запис принтера буде +додано до списку доступних принтерів, ним можна буде користуватися.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="network_printer"> + <title>Мережний принтер</title> + + <para>Мережні принтери — це принтери, які безпосередньо з’єднано з дротовою або +бездротовою мережею, сервером друку або іншою робочою станцією, яка працює у +режимі сервера друку.</para> + + <note> + <para>Часто, варто налаштувати сервер DHCP на автоматичну прив’язку IP-адреси до +MAC-принтера. Звичайно ж, якщо ця адреса є фіксованою, вона має збігатися з +IP-адресою принтера, на яку налаштовано сервер друку.</para> + </note> + + <para>MAC-адреса принтера — це серійний номер, який надається принтеру, серверу +друку або комп’ютеру, з яким з’єднано принтер, і яку можна визначити за +допомогою тестової сторінки, надрукованої самим принтером або наклейки на +принтері або сервері друку. Якщо ваш принтер спільного користування з’єднано +з системою Mageia, ви можете виконати від імені користувача root +(адміністратора) команду <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis>, щоб +визначити цю MAC-адресу. MAC-адресою є послідовність цифр і літер після +слова «HWaddr».</para> + + <para>Додати ваш мережний принтер можна так: виберіть протокол, який +використовується принтером для обміну даними мережею з вашим +комп’ютером. Якщо ви не знаєте, який протокол слід вибрати, ви можете +спробувати скористатися пунктом <guilabel>Мережний принтер</guilabel> - +<guilabel>Знайти мережний принтер</guilabel> у меню +<guilabel>Пристрої</guilabel> і вказати IP-адресу принтера у полі праворуч, +де вказано «вузол».</para> + + <para>Якщо програмі вдасться виявити ваш принтер або сервер друку, вона запропонує +вам визначені параметри протоколу та черги друку. Втім, ви можете вибрати +потрібний вам варіант зі списку, розташованого нижче, або вказати належну +назву черги друку, якщо відповідного пункту немає у списку.</para> + + <para>Для визначення переліку протоколів, підтримку яких передбачено у сервері +друку, та відповідних назв черг друку зверніться до документації з сервера +друку, яким ви користуєтеся.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="network_printing_protocols"> + <title>Протоколи друку мережею</title> + + <para>Однією з сучасних методик роботи з принтерами є розроблена Hewlett-Packard +технологія під назвою JetDirect. За її допомогою можна здійснювати доступ до +принтера, безпосередньо з’єднаного з мережею за допомогою порту +Ethernet. Вам слід буде вказати IP-адресу, яка використовується принтером у +мережі. Ця технологія використовується також у деяких ADSL-маршрутизаторах, +у яких передбачено порт USB для під’єднання принтера. Якщо ви користуєтеся +таким маршрутизатором, слід вказати його IP-адресу. Зауважте, що програма +«Hp Device manager» може працювати з динамічно визначеною IP-адресою, +визначаючи адресу файла пристрою як +<emphasis>hp:/net/<назва_принтера></emphasis> . Для такого динамічного +визначення фіксована IP-адреса не потрібна.</para> + + <para>Виберіть пункт <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> у списку +протоколів і вкажіть адресу у полі <guilabel>Вузол:</guilabel>. Не змінюйте +вміст поля <guilabel>Номер порту</guilabel>, якщо не певні, що це слід +зробити. Після вибору протоколу виконайте вибір драйвера відповідно до вже +описаної процедури.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="printer5-uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Серед інших можливих протоколів такі:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Протокол друку інтернетом (ipp)</emphasis>: принтер, доступ до +якого здійснюється у мережі TCP/IP за допомогою протоколу IPP. Наприклад, +принтер, з’єднаний з робочою станцією, де використовується CUPS. Цей +протокол може також використовуватися деякими маршрутизаторами ADSL.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Протокол друку інтернетом (https)</emphasis>: те саме, що і ipp, +але з використанням передавання даних HTTP з захистом TLS. Слід вказати +порт. Типовим номером порту є 631.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Протокол друку інтренетом (ipps)</emphasis>: те саме, що і ipp, +але із захистом TLS.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Вузол або принтер LPD/LPR</emphasis>: принтер, доступ до якого +здійснюється у мережі TCP/IP за допомогою протоколу LPD. Наприклад, принтер, +з’єднаний з робочою станцією, на якій використовується LPD.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Принтер Windows через SAMBA</emphasis>: принтер у спільному +користуванні, з’єднаний з робочою станцією під керуванням Windows або +сервером SMB.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Крім того, адресу URI можна додати безпосередньо. Ось декілька прикладів +форматування адреси URI:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Appsocket</para> + + <para><uri>socket://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:порт</uri></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Протокол друку Інтернетом (IPP)</para> + + <para><uri>ipp://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:номер-порту/ресурс</uri></para> + + <para><uri>http://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:номер-порту/ресурс</uri></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Протокол фонової служби лінійного принтера (LPD)</para> + + <para><uri>lpd://користувач@ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла/черга</uri></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Додаткові відомості можна знайти у <link +ns2:href="http://www.cups.org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html">документації +до CUPS</link>.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="properties"> + <title>Властивості пристрою</title> + + <para>Ви можете переглянути і змінити параметри роботи пристрою. За допомогою меню +можна отримати доступ до панелі налаштовування сервера CUPS. Типово, сервер +CUPS запускається вашою операційною системою, але ви можете вибрати інший +варіант за допомогою пункту меню <guimenu>Сервер</guimenu> → +<guimenuitem>З’єднатись...</guimenuitem>. Інше вікно налаштовування +параметрів сервера можна відкрити за допомогою пункту меню +<guimenu>Сервер</guimenu> → <guimenuitem>Параметри</guimenuitem>.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="troubleshoot">Діагностика проблем</title> + + <para>Дані щодо помилок, які могли трапитися під час друку, можна знайти у файлі +<filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>.</para> + + <para>Крім того, ви можете скористатися інструментом для діагностування і +вирішення проблем. Доступ до нього можна отримати за допомогою пункту меню +<guimenu>Довідка</guimenu> → <guilabel>Усунення проблем з друком</guilabel>.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="specificities"> + <title>Специфічні поради</title> + + <para>Драйверів, потрібних для роботи певних принтерів, немає у сховищах пакунків +Mageia через ліцензійні проблеми або ці драйвери є непрацездатними. Якщо ви +не можете знайти потрібного драйвера скористайтеся сторінкою системи <link +ns2:href="http://openprinting.org/printers/">openprinting</link>, щоб +переконатися, чи існує драйвер взагалі. Якщо виявиться, що драйвер існує, +перевірте, чи немає пакунка з цим драйвером у сховищах Mageia. Якщо такий +пакунок буде виявлено, встановіть його вручну. Після встановлення драйвера +повторіть процедуру встановлення і налаштовування принтера. Про проблеми +повідомляйте за допомогою системи стеження за вадами дистрибутива або +форуму. Також можна повідомляти про побажання щодо роботи програм +налаштовування та про те, чи працює принтер після встановлення. Нижче +наведено декілька адрес, за якими можна знайти найновіші версії драйверів +або драйвери до найновіших пристроїв.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Принтери Brother</emphasis></para> + + <para>На <link +ns2:href="http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/en/download_prn.html">цій +сторінці</link> можна знайти список драйверів, які надаються +Brother. Знайдіть драйвер до вашого пристрою, звантажте пакунки rpm з ним і +встановіть ці пакунки.</para> + + <para>Драйвери Brother слід встановити до запуску програми для налаштовування +системи друку.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Принтери та багатофункціональні пристрої +Hewlett-Packard</emphasis></para> + + <para>Для цих пристроїв використовуються програми з комплекту hplip. Цей комплект +програм буде автоматично встановлено після вибору принтера. Докладніші +відомості щодо комплекту програм можна знайти <link +ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html">тут</link>. +Програму «HP Device Manager» (Керування пристроями HP) можна буде знайти у +меню системи. Довідку щодо налаштовування принтера можна знайти <link +ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/install/manual/hp_setup.html">тут</link>.</para> + + <para>Багатофункціональні пристрої HP потребують встановлення драйвера принтера, +щоб працювати і у режимі сканера. Зауважте, що іноді у інтерфейсі програми +для сканування не передбачено можливостей зі сканування плівок або слайдів +(не працює модуль для слайдів). У цьому випадку можна скористатися для +сканування автономним режимом зі збереженням зображення на картку пам’яті +або на флеш-пристрій USB, вставлений до багатофункціонального +пристрою. Після сканування отримані зображення можна перенести з носія даних +до сховища вашого улюбленого програмного забезпечення для роботи з +зображеннями.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Кольорові принтери Samsung</emphasis></para> + + <para>Драйвери для окремих кольорових принтерів Samsung і Xerox, що працюють за +допомогою протоколу QPDL, можна <link +ns2:href="http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/">знайти тут</link>.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Принтери і сканери Epson</emphasis></para> + + <para>Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link +ns2:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this +search page</link>. For the scanner part, you must install the "iscan-data" +package first, then "iscan" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also +be available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages +according to your architecture. </para> + + <para> It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a +conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Принтери Canon</emphasis></para> + + <para>Якщо ви працюєте з принтерами Canon, вам може стати у пригоді програма, яка +називається turboprint. Відповідний (тестовий) пакунок можна отримати <link +ns2:href="http://www.turboprint.info/">тут</link>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/transfugdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/transfugdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d763e28 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/transfugdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="transfugdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"> + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written by yurchor 2013-07-03 --> +<!-- Tproof --> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="transfugdrake-ti1">Імпортування документів і параметрів Windows(TM)</title> + + <subtitle>transfugdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="transfugdrake-im1" revision="1" +fileref="transfugdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">transfugdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора +(root).</para> + </footnote> is found under the <emphasis +role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled +<guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel></para> + + <para>The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings +from a <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> +installation on the same computer as the Mageia installation.</para> + + <warning> + <para>Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake +immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </warning> + + <para>After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some +explanation about the tool and import options.</para> + + <para>As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of +<trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> installation.</para> + + <para>When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to +choose accounts in <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> and +Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account +than yours own.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of +transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> +user account names with special symbols can be displayed incorrectly.</para> + </note> + + <note> + <para>Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders.</para> + </note> + + <warning> + <para>Some <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> applications +(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For +example, NVidia drivers in <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark>are updated using +<emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not use such accounts for the +import purposes.</para> + </warning> + + <para>When you finished with the accounts selection press +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method +to import documents:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> data from <emphasis>My +Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</emphasis> and <emphasis>My +Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to skip import by selecting the +appropriate item in this window.</para> + + <para>When you finished with the document import method choosing press +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method +to import bookmarks:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and +<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia +<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance.</para> + + <para>Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> +button.</para> + + + + <!-- Does not work as expected, might be due to incompatible version of OE + <para> +With transfugdrake, it is possible to import <emphasis>Outlook Express</emphasis> settings and mail archives into <emphasis>Evolution</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>When you finished with the mail import method choosing press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import mail:</para> +--> +<para>The next page allows you to import desktop background:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> +button.</para> + + <para>The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the +<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/uninstall-linux.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/uninstall-linux.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1c947f0d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/uninstall-linux.xml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="uninstall-linux" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-ti38">How to Uninstall Linux</title></info> + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa200" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-it134"> + <primary>uninstall</primary> + </indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it139"> + <primary>Mandrakelinux</primary> + <secondary>uninstall</secondary> + </indexterm> If for any reason you want to uninstall +<application>Mageia</application>, you can do so. The process of +uninstalling <application>Mageia</application> is done in two steps:</para> + + + + <warning> + <para xml:id="BId-uninstall-linux-pa206" revision="2">Removing partitions on your hard drive will inevitably result in the loss of +all data stored on those partitions. Please make sure you've backed up all +of the data you want to keep <emphasis>before</emphasis> proceeding.</para> + </warning> + + <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts"> + <listitem> + + + + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa202" revision="4">Delete all partitions related to <application>Mageia</application> on your +hard drive (usually partitions hosting <acronym>ext3</acronym> file systems +and the <systemitem>Swap</systemitem> partition) and — optionally — replace +them with a single partition using +<application>DiskDrake</application><phrase condition="Starter" +xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-ph1" revision="1"> (see <xref +linkend="diskdrake" />)</phrase>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa203" revision="4">Remove<indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-it135" revision="2"> + <primary>bootloader</primary> + + <secondary>uninstall</secondary> + </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it136" revision="1"> + <primary>commands</primary> + + <secondary>lilo</secondary> + </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it137"> + <primary>Головний завантажувальний запис (MBR)</primary> + </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it138"> + <primary>MBR</primary> + </indexterm> the bootloader, <application>LILO</application> in this example, +from the Master Boot Record (<acronym>MBR</acronym>). To do so, execute +<command>lilo -U</command> in a console, as <literal>root</literal>. Doing +this will not only uninstall <application>LILO</application> but will also +restore the previous master boot record, if any.</para> + + <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa204" revision="2">If you have a different boot loader, please refer to its documentation to +determine how to regenerate the master boot record.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/userdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/userdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cf728a70 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/userdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="userdrake"> + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-27 --> +<!-- Tproof --> +<!-- Preliminary lproof JohnR 2012-08-30 --> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="userdrake-ti1">Користувачі і групи</title> + + <subtitle>userdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="userdrake-im1" revision="1" +fileref="userdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду +<emphasis role="bold">userdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para> + </footnote> is found under the <emphasis +role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled +"Manage users on system"</para> + + <para>The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this +means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings +(ID, shell, ...)</para> + + <para>When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in +the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the +<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way.</para> + + <para><guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton></para> + + <para>This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="userdrake1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The field <emphasis role="bold">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the +entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything +or nothing as well!</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login</emphasis> is the only required field.</para> + + <para>Setting a <emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis> is highly +recommended. There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the +password is weak, too short or is too similar to the login name. You should +use figures, lower and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The +shield will turn orange and then green as the password strength improves.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure +you entered what you intended to.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that allows +you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options are +Bash, Dash and Sh.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if +checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new +user as the only member (this may be edited).</para> + + <para>The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately +after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">2 Add Group</emphasis></para> + + <para>You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific +group ID.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)</para> + + <para><guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given +for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed).</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Account Info</emphasis>:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="userdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account. +Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary +accounts.</para> + + <para>The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long +as the account is locked.</para> + + <para>It is also possible to change the icon.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an +expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his +password periodically.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="userdrake3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups that +the user is a member of.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be +effective until his/her next login.</para> + </note> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the group +name.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the users +who are members of the group</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">5 Delete</emphasis></para> + + <para>Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis +role="bold">Delete</emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to +ask if home directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group +has been created for the user, it will be deleted as well.</para> + + <warning> + <para>It is possible to delete a group which is not empty.</para> + </warning> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">6 Refresh</emphasis></para> + + <para>The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to +refresh the display.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">7 Guest Account</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is intended +to give somebody temporary access to the system with total security. Login +is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to make modifications +to the system from this account. The personal directories are deleted at the +end of the session. This account is enabled by default, to disable it, click +in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest account</guimenu>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file |